MY PEUGEOT 508
HANDBOOK
Access to the Handbook
MOBILE APPLICATION ONLINE
Install the (content available Visit the website and select the Scan MyPeugeot App PEUGEOT offline). ‘MyPeugeot’ section to view or download the handbook or go to the following address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/
Scan this QR Code for direct access.
Then select: – the vehicle, Select: – the issue period corresponding to the vehicle’s initial – the language, registration date. – the vehicle and body style, – the issue period of the handbook corresponding to the vehicle’s initial registration date.
This symbol indicates the latest information available.
Welcome Key
Safety warning Thank you for choosing a Peugeot 508. This document presents the key information and recommendations required Additional information for you to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly
recommend familiarising yourself with this document and the Warranty and
Maintenance Record. Environmental protection feature Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this
document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the Left-hand drive vehicle country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only.
Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, Right-hand drive vehicle equipment and accessories without having to update this guide.
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is Location of the equipment / button passed on to the new owner. described using a black area.
Contents
Overview ■ Mirrors 45 Electronic stability control (ESC) 78 Rear seats 46 Seat belts 80 Heating and Ventilation 48 Airbags 81
Eco-driving ■ Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 49 Active bonnet 84
Front demisting - defrosting 52 Child seats 85 Heated windscreen 52 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 87 Instruments 1 Rear screen demisting/defrosting 52 ISOFIX child seats 89 Digital instrument panels 9 Additional heating/ventilation system 53 i-Size child seats 93 Warning and indicator lamps 11 Thermal pre-conditioning (Hybrid) 54 Child lock 94 Indicators 16 Front fittings 55 Manual test 20 Courtesy lamps 58 Driving Total distance recorder 20 Interior ambient lighting 59 6 Lighting dimmer 20 Rear fittings 59 Driving recommendations 96 Trip computer 21 Boot fittings 60 Starting/Switching off the engine 97 Touch screen 22 Starting hybrid vehicles 98 Remote features (Hybrid) 24 Electric parking brake 99 Lighting and visibility 4 Manual gearbox 102 Exterior lighting control stalk 65 Automatic gearbox 102 Access 2 Direction indicators 66 Electric automatic gearbox (Hybrid) 105 Electronic key with remote control function and Headlamp beam height adjustment 67 Hill start assist 106 built-in key, 25 Automatic illumination of headlamps 67 Active Suspension Control 107 Keyless Entry and Starting 27 Guide-me-home and welcome lighting 67 Driving modes 107 Back-up procedures 29 Automatic headlamp dipping 68 Gear efficiency indicator 108 Central locking 30 Static cornering lighting 69 Stop & Start 109 Alarm 31 Night Vision 69 Under-inflation detection 110 Doors 33 Wiper control stalk 71 Driving and manoeuvring aids - General Boot 34 Changing a wiper blade 73 recommendations 112 Hands-free tailgate 34 Automatic wipers 73 Speed Limit Recognition and Electric windows 38 Recommendation 113 Panoramic sunroof 39 Speed limiter 116 Safety 5 Programmable cruise control 119 General safety recommendations 75 Ease of use and comfort 3 Memorising speeds 120 Hazard warning lamps 75 Drive Assist Plus 121 Driving position 41 Horn 76 Adaptive Cruise Control 121 Front seats 42 Pedestrian horn (Hybrid) 76 Active Lane Keeping Assist 125 Steering wheel adjustment 45 Emergency or assistance call 76
2 Contents
Active Safety Brake with Distance Alert and Spare wheel 177 Connected navigation 228 Intelligent emergency braking assistance 128 Changing a bulb 180 Applications 230 Distraction detection 130 Changing a fuse 183 Radio 233 Active Lane Keeping Assistance 131 12 V battery 189 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 234 Active Blind Spot Monitoring System 135 Accessory batteries (Hybrid) 192 Media 235 Parking sensors 136 Towing the vehicle 194 Telephone 236 Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 138 Settings 239 Park Assist 142 Frequently asked questions 240 Technical data Full Park Assist 145 9 Engine technical data and towed loads 197 Petrol engines 198 Alphabetical index ■ Practical information 7 Diesel engines 199 Compatibility of fuels 151 Hybrid engine 202 Refuelling 151 Dimensions 203 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 152 Identification markings 204 Hybrid system 152 Charging the traction battery (Hybrid) 156 PEUGEOT Connect Radio Towing device 158 10 Towing device with retractable ball joint 159 First steps 205 Roof bars 160 Steering mounted controls 206 Snow chains 161 Menus 207 Energy economy mode 162 Applications 208 Bonnet 162 Radio 208 Engine compartment 163 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 210 Checking levels 164 Media 210 Checks 166 Telephone 212 AdBlue® (BlueHDi) 168 Settings 215 Access to additional videos Free-wheeling 170 Frequently asked questions 217
Advice on care and maintenance 170
PEUGEOT Connect Nav 11 In the event of a breakdown 8 First steps 219 Warning triangle 172 Steering mounted controls 220
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 172 Menus 220 Tool kit 173 Voice commands 222 bit.ly/helpPSA Temporary puncture repair kit 174 Navigation 225
3 Overview
Instruments and controls 2. Warning lamp display for seat belts and front 3. 12 V socket / USB socket(s) passenger airbag Storage These illustrations and descriptions are provided Emergency call / Assistance call Wireless smartphone charger for information. The presence and location of 3. Interior mirror / Driving in ELECTRIC mode 4. Gearbox control some elements vary depending on the version indicator LED Full Park Assist or trim level. 4. Head-up digital display 5. Switching the engine on/off "START/STOP" 5. Side switch panel / Ticket holder 6. Electric parking brake 6. Fusebox 7. "DRIVE MODE" selector. 7. Bonnet release 8. Door mirror and electric window control Steering mounted controls panel 9. Front armrest Auxiliary (Jack) socket 10. 12 V socket or USB sockets 11. Front passenger airbag 12. Glove box
1. Exterior lighting controls / Direction indicators / Service indicator
2. Wiper controls / Screenwash / Trip computer 1. Sunroof and blind controls 1. Hazard warning lamps 3. Automatic gearbox control paddles Touch-sensitive courtesy lamp / Front touch- Central locking 4. Horn / Driver front airbag sensitive reading lamps 2. 8" (PEUGEOT Connect Radio) or 10" HD 5. Cruise control / speed limiter controls / (PEUGEOT Connect Nav) touch screen Adaptive Cruise Control
4 Overview
3. 12 V socket / USB socket(s) 6. Audio system setting controls Centre switch panels Storage A. Select the instrument panel display mode Wireless smartphone charger B. Voice commands 4. Gearbox control C. Decrease / Increase volume
Full Park Assist D. Select previous / next media 5. Switching the engine on/off "START/STOP" Confirm a selection 6. Electric parking brake E. Access to the Telephone menu 7. "DRIVE MODE" selector. Manage calls F. Select an audio source Steering mounted controls G. Display the list of radio stations / audio tracks
Side switch panel
1. 8" (PEUGEOT Connect Radio) or 10" HD (PEUGEOT Connect Nav) touch screen controls
Access to the Hybrid menu 2. Heated seats 3. Stop & Start 4. Windscreen and front windows demisting 5. Recirculation of interior air 6. Rear screen defrosting 7. Automatic air conditioning 1. Halogen headlamp beam height adjustment 2. Hands-free tailgate
3. Active Lane Keeping Assistance 1. Exterior lighting controls / Direction indicators 4. Lane positioning assist / Service indicator 5. Alarm 2. Wiper controls / Screenwash / Trip computer 6. Temperature pre-conditioning indicator lamp 3. Automatic gearbox control paddles 7. Heated windscreen 4. Horn / Driver front airbag 8. Opening the fuel filler flap 5. Cruise control / speed limiter controls / Adaptive Cruise Control
5 Overview
Rechargeable hybrid mode in case of moderate demand. It assists the petrol engine during starting and acceleration system phases. The electric power is supplied by a rechargeable traction battery.
1. Petrol engine 2. Electric motor 3. Traction battery 4. 12 V accessories batteries 5. 8-speed electric automatic gearbox (e-EAT8) 6. Charging flap 7. Fuel filler flap 8. Driving mode selector 9. Charging cable The rechargeable hybrid technology combines two sources of energy: that of the petrol engine and that of the electric motor, which drive the front wheels (traction). The engine and the motor can operate alternately or simultaneously, according to the driving mode selected and the driving conditions. The electric power alone provides the mobility of the vehicle in ELECTRIC mode, and in HYBRID
6 Eco-driving
Eco-driving Use electrical equipment wisely bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a Before moving off, if the passenger compartment roof box. Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. practices that allow the motorist to optimise their and air vents before using the air conditioning. At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit fuel consumption and CO emissions. 2 At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the summer tyres. Optimise your use of the gearbox windows and leave the air vents open. Comply with servicing instructions With a manual gearbox, move off gently and Consider using equipment that can help keep Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres change up promptly. While accelerating, change the temperature in the passenger compartment cold, referring to the label in the door aperture on up early. down (sunroof blind and window blinds, etc.). the driver's side. With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic Unless automatically regulated, switch off the air Carry out this check in particular: mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal conditioning as soon as the desired temperature – before a long journey. heavily or suddenly. has been reached. – at each change of season. The gear efficiency indicator prompts you to Switch off the demisting and defrosting functions, – after a long period out of use. engage the most suitable gear: whenever this if they are not managed automatically. Do not overlook the spare wheel and, where indication is displayed on the instrument panel, Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan. follow it straight away. Switch off the headlamps and foglamps when Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, With an automatic gearbox, this indicator the visibility conditions do not require their use. oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter, appears only in manual mode. Avoid running the engine before moving off, etc.) and observe the schedule of operations in Drive smoothly particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up the manufacturer's service schedule. much faster while driving. Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system As a passenger, avoid connecting your engine braking rather than the brake pedal and is faulty, your vehicle will emit pollution. Visit multimedia devices (film, music, video game, press the accelerator gradually. These attitudes a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop etc.) to help reduce consumption of electrical help to save fuel, reduce CO emissions and as soon as possible to restore your vehicle’s 2 energy, and hence fuel. decrease general traffic noise. nitrogen oxide emissions to regulatory Disconnect all portable devices before leaving Favour the use of the "Eco" driving mode by compliance. the vehicle. selecting it using the "Drive Mode" control. When filling the fuel tank, do not continue after If the vehicle has the steering-mounted Limit the causes of excess consumption the third nozzle cut-out, to avoid overflow. "CRUISE" control, use cruise control at speeds Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the You will only see the fuel consumption of your above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is heaviest items in the boot, as close as possible new vehicle settle down to a consistent average flowing well. to the rear seats. after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres). Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and minimise wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack,
7 Eco-driving
Optimising the driving range (hybrid vehicles) Connect the vehicle as soon as possible. Favour the ECO zone of the power indicator by driving smoothly and at a steady speed. Anticipate slowing down as much as possible and, if possible, favour decelerations with regenerative braking (power indicator in the CHARGE zone). When GPS navigation is activated, select the HYBRID mode to optimise electric consumption.
8 Instruments
Head-up digital display Depending on the display mode selected, certain – in fixed locations: information is hidden or presented differently. • Information related to the gearbox and gear 1 This digital instrument panel can be customised. Example with the "ÉNERGIE" display mode: shift indicator. Depending on the display mode selected, certain • Fuel gauge. information is hidden or presented differently. • Coolant temperature indicator (Petrol or Example with the "DIALS" display mode:
Diesel). • Charge level and range indicator (Hybrid). • Driving mode.
• Total distance recorder. 1. Fuel gauge and remaining range (miles or – in variable locations: km) • Digital speedometer. 2. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) • Status or alert messages displayed 1. Fuel gauge READY Indicator lamp temporarily. 2. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h) 3. Selector position and gear on automatic Optional information 3. Gear shift indicator (arrow and recommended gearbox Depending on the display mode selected and the gear) 4. Energy flows active features, additional information may be Selector position and gear on automatic 5. Driving mode selected displayed: gearbox 6. Power indicator – Rev counter (Petrol or Diesel). 4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) 7. Battery charge level and remaining range – Trip computer. 5. Cruise control / speed limiter settings (miles or km) – Driving aid functions. Display of speed limit signs 8. Total distance recorder (miles or km) – Speed limiter or cruise control. 6. Rev counter (x 1000 rpm) – Media currently playing. 7. Engine coolant temperature indicator (°C) – Navigation instructions. 8. Driving mode selected (except "NORMAL" Displays – Engine information (G-meters, Power-meters, mode) Some lamps have a fixed location, others can Boost, Torque) in Sport mode. 9. Total distance recorder (miles or km) change location. For certain functions that have indicator lamps – Night Vision function. for both operation and deactivation, there is only – Power flow (Hybrid). one dedicated location. Head-up digital display Customising the instrument (Hybrid) Permanent information In the standard display, the instrument panel panel This digital instrument panel can be customised. shows: You can modify the appearance of the instrument panel by choosing:
9 Instruments
– a display colour. Changing the display mode – "NIGHT VISION": minimal display, plus the
– a display mode. infrared camera image (associated with the Night Vision function). Display language and units – "MINIMAL ": minimal display with digital These depend on the touch screen speedometer, distance recorder and: settings. • fuel gauge and engine coolant temperature When travelling abroad, the speed must be indicator (Petrol or Diesel). shown in the official units of the country you • fuel gauge and battery charge indicator are driving in (mph, miles or km/h, km). (Hybrid). – "ÉNERGIE": specific display showing a visual As a safety measure, these adjustments representation of the vehicle’s energy flows must be carried out with the vehicle (Hybrid). stationary. – "PERSONAL": minimal display, with the ability ► Turn the thumbwheel on the left of the to select and display optional information in the steering wheel to display and scroll through the customisable areas on the left and right. Choosing a display colour various modes on the right-hand side of the (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav) instrument panel. Configuring a "PERSONAL" display mode The instrument panel display colour depends on ► Press the thumbwheel to confirm the mode. With 8" touch screen the colour scheme chosen in this system. If you do not press the thumbwheel, the selected ► Press Settings in the banner of the ► Press Settings in the banner of the display mode is automatically applied after a few touch screen. touch screen. moments. ► Select "Configuration". ► Select "Color schemes". Display mode overview ► Select a display colour and then press ► Select "Instrument panel – "DIALS": standard display of analogue and "OK" to confirm. personalisation". digital speedometers, distance recorder and: With 10" HD touch screen • fuel gauge, coolant temperature indicator Setting the display mode ► Press Settings in the banner of the and rev counter (Petrol or Diesel). In each mode, specific types of information are touch screen. • fuel gauge, battery charge indicator and displayed on the instrument panel. ► Select "OPTIONS". power indicator (Hybrid). ► Select "Instrument panel – NAVIGATION": specific display, showing personalisation". the current navigation information (map and ► For each customised display area (left and navigation instructions). right), select a type of information using the – " ": specific display, showing the DRIVING corresponding scroll arrows on the touch screen: information relating to active driving aid systems.
10 Instruments
• "Driving aids". Relating the type of alert to the operating status List of warning and • "Empty". of the vehicle allows you to determine whether 1 • "Engine info" (Sport mode). the situation is normal or whether a fault has indicator lamps • "G-metres" (Sport mode). occurred: refer to the description of each lamp Red warning/indicator lamps • "Temperatures" (engine oil). for further information. STOP • “Media". When the ignition is switched on Fixed, associated with another warning • “Navigation". Certain red or orange warning lamps come on lamp, accompanied by the display of a • “Trip computer". for a few seconds when the ignition is switched message and an audible signal. • "Rev counter". on. These warning lamps should go off as soon A serious fault with the engine, braking system, • "Energy flow" (depending on version). as the engine is started. power steering, automatic gearbox or a major • "Power indicator" (depending on version). For more information on a system or a function, electrical fault has been detected. • "Energy consumption" (depending on refer to the corresponding section. Carry out (1) and then (2). version). • "Night vision". Maximum engine coolant temperature ► Confirm to save and exit. Warning lamp continuously Fixed. The "PERSONAL" display mode is enabled lit The temperature of the cooling system is immediately. The illumination of a red or orange warning lamp too high. indicates the occurrence of a fault that needs Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has further investigation. cooled down before topping up the level, if Warning and indicator necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2). If a warning lamp remains lit lamps Engine oil pressure The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning Fixed. Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator and indicator lamp description indicate whether There is a fault with the engine lubrication lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a you should contact a qualified professional in system. malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating addition to the immediate recommended actions. Carry out (1) and then (2). status of a system (operation or deactivation (1): You must stop the vehicle. indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off System malfunction (Hybrid) ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. the ignition. Fixed. Associated warnings (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The rechargeable hybrid system is faulty. Carry out (1) and then (2). The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied workshop. by an audible signal and/or a message displayed (3): Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified in a screen. workshop.
11 Instruments
Cable connected (Hybrid) Seat belts not fastened/unfastened Identify the cause of the fault using the message Fixed. Fixed or flashing, accompanied by an displayed in the instrument panel. It is not possible to start the vehicle while increasing audible signal. You can deal with certain problems yourself, for the charging cable is connected to the vehicle’s A seat belt has not been fastened or has been example an open door or the start of saturation connector. unfastened. of the particle filter. Disconnect the charging cable and close the Electric parking brake For other faults, such as with the tyre under- flap. Fixed. inflation detection system, carry out (3). 12 V battery charge The electric parking brake is applied. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a Fixed. Flashing. message. The battery charging circuit has a fault Application/release is faulty. One or more major faults, for which there is/are (dirty terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, etc.). Carry out (1): park on flat ground (on a level no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. Carry out (1). surface). Identify the cause of the fault using the message If the electric parking brake is no longer working, With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out immobilise the vehicle: With an automatic gearbox, select mode P. (3). ► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. Switch off the ignition and carry out (2). Fixed, accompanied by the message "Parking brake fault". ► With an automatic gearbox, put the chocks Braking Automatic release of the electric parking brake is against one of the wheels. Fixed. unavailable. Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning The brake fluid level in the braking circuit Carry out (2). lamp does not go off when the engine is started, has dropped significantly. Service warning lamp fixed and carry out (2). Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies service spanner flashing then Door(s) open with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the fixed. Fixed, associated with a message problem persists, carry out (2). The servicing interval has been exceeded. identifying the access. Fixed. The vehicle must be serviced as soon as A door or the tailgate is not properly closed The electronic brake force possible. (speed less than 6 mph (10 km/h)). distribution (EBFD) system is faulty. Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines. Fixed, associated with a message Carry out (1) and then (2). Engine pre-heating (Diesel) identifying the access, accompanied by Orange warning/indicator lamps an audible signal. Temporarily on A door or the tailgate is not properly closed Service (up to approximately 30 seconds in (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). Temporarily on, accompanied by the severe weather conditions). display of a message. When switching on the ignition, if the weather One or more minor faults, for which there is/are conditions and the engine temperature make it no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. necessary.
12 Instruments
Wait until the warning lamp goes off before Fixed. You must add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® to its starting. The emissions control system has a fault. tank. 1 When the warning lamp goes off, starting will The warning lamp should go off when the engine SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi) occur immediately if you press and hold: is started. Fixed when the ignition is – the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox. Carry out (3) without delay. switched on, accompanied – the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. AdBlue® (BlueHDi) by an audible signal and a message. If the engine does not start, make the engine On for around 30 seconds when starting A malfunction involving the SCR emissions starting request again, while keeping your foot the vehicle, accompanied by a message control system has been detected. on the pedal. indicating the driving range. This alert disappears once the exhaust Low fuel level The driving range is between 1,500 and 500 emissions return to normal levels. Fixed, with the reserve level shown in red, miles (2,400 and 800 km). Flashing AdBlue® warning accompanied by an audible signal and the Top up the AdBlue®. lamp on switching on the display of a message. Fixed, on switching on the ignition, ignition, with the Service and Engine self- When it first comes on, there remains accompanied by an audible signal and a diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank message indicating the driving range. accompanied by an audible signal and a (reserve). The driving range is between 500 and 62 miles message indicating the driving range. Until the fuel level is topped up, this alert will be (800 and 100 km). Depending on the message displayed, it may be repeated every time the ignition is switched on, Promptly top up the AdBlue®, or carry out (3). possible to drive for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) at increased frequency as the fuel level goes Flashing, accompanied by an audible before the engine immobiliser is triggered. down and comes close to zero. signal and a message indicating the Carry out (3) without delay, to avoid starting Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel. driving range. being prevented. Never drive until completely empty, as The driving range is less than 62 miles (100 km). Flashing AdBlue® warning this could damage the emissions control and You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid engine lamp on switching on the injection systems. starting being prevented, or carry out (3). ignition, with the Service and Engine self- Engine self-diagnostics system Flashing, accompanied by an audible diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, Flashing. signal and a message indicating that accompanied by an audible signal and a The engine management system has a starting is prevented. message indicating that starting is prevented. ® fault. The AdBlue tank is empty: the regulatory engine The engine immobiliser prevents the engine There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be immobiliser prevents the engine from being from restarting (over the authorised driving limit destroyed. restarted. after confirmation of an emissions control system ® You must carry out (2). To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue , or malfunction). carry out (2). To start the engine, carry out (2).
13 Instruments
Deactivation of the automatic functions message "Parking brake fault". Distance Alert/Active Safety Brake (with electric parking brake) The parking brake is faulty: manual and Flashing. Fixed. automatic functions may not be working. The system activates and brakes the The "automatic application" (on switching When stationary, to immobilise the vehicle: vehicle momentarily so as to reduce the speed of off the engine) and "automatic release" (on ► Pull and hold the control lever for collision with the vehicle ahead. acceleration) functions are deactivated. approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until the indicator Fixed, accompanied by a message and If automatic application/release is no longer lamp comes on on the instrument panel. an audible signal. possible: If this procedure does not work, secure the The system has a fault. ► Start the engine. vehicle: Carry out (3). ► Use the control lever to apply the parking ► Park on a level surface. Distance Alert / Active Safety Brake brake. ► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. Fixed. ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. ► With an automatic gearbox, select P, then The system has a fault. ► Hold the control lever pressed in the release place the supplied chocks against one of the If these warning lamps come on after the engine direction for between 10 and 15 seconds. wheels. is switched off and then restarted, carry out (3). ► Release the control lever. Then carry out (2). Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ► Depress and hold the brake pedal. Braking Fixed. ► Hold the control lever in the “Application” Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a fault. direction for 2 seconds. A minor fault with the braking system has The vehicle retains conventional braking. ► Release the control lever and the brake been detected. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry pedal. Drive carefully. out (3). Malfunction (with electric parking brake) Carry out (3). Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip Fixed, accompanied by the Pedestrian horn (Hybrid) regulation (ASR) message "Parking brake fault". Fixed. Fixed. The vehicle cannot be immobilised with the Horn fault detected. The system is deactivated. engine running. Carry out (3). The DSC/ASR system is reactivated If manual application and release commands are Distance Alert / Active Safety Brake automatically when the vehicle is restarted, and not working, the electric parking brake control Fixed, accompanied by the display of a from around 31 mph (50 km/h). lever is faulty. message. Below 31 mph (50 km/h), it can be reactivated The automatic functions must be used at all The system has been deactivated via the touch manually. times and are automatically re-enabled in the screen ( Driving/ Vehiclemenu). Flashing. event of a control lever fault. The DSC/ASR adjustment is activated if Carry out (2). there is a loss of grip or trajectory. Fixed, accompanied by the
14 Instruments
Fixed. Carry out (3). Under-inflation The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Lane positioning assist Fixed. 1 Carry out (3). Fixed, accompanied by the Service The pressure in one or more tyres is too Emergency brake malfunction (with warning lamp. low. electric parking brake) The system has a fault. Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as Fixed, accompanied by the Carry out (3). possible. Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting message "Parking brake fault". Airbags the pressure. Emergency braking does not deliver optimal Fixed. Under-inflation warning lamp performance. One of the airbags or seat belt flashing then fixed and Service If automatic release is not available, use manual pyrotechnic pretensioners is faulty. warning lamp fixed. release or carry out (3). Carry out (3). The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty. Hill start assist The active bonnet has been triggered. Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored. Fixed, accompanied by the Do not touch the bonnet. Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible message "Anti roll-back system Call a roadside assistance provider or carry and carry out (3). fault". out (3) while driving no faster than 19 mph (30 The system has a fault. km/h). Parking sensors Fixed, accompanied by the display of a Carry out (3). Front passenger airbag (ON) message and an audible signal. Active Lane Keeping Assistance Fixed. The system has a fault. Fixed. The front passenger airbag is activated. Carry out (3). The system has been automatically The control is in the "ON" position. deactivated or placed on standby. In this case, do NOT install a "rearward Stop & Start Flashing. facing" child seat on the front passenger seat Fixed, accompanied by the display of a You are about to cross a broken - Risk of serious injury! message. The Stop & Start system has been deactivated lane marking without operating the direction Front passenger airbag (OFF) manually. indicators. Fixed. The engine will not switch off at the next traffic The system is activated, then corrects the The front passenger airbag is deactivated. stop. trajectory on the side of the lane marking The control is in the "OFF" position. Press the button to reactivate Stop & Start. detected. A "rearward facing" child seat can be installed, Fixed. Fixed, accompanied by the display unless there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags The Stop & Start system has been of a message and an audible warning lamp on). signal. deactivated automatically. The system has a fault.
15 Instruments
The engine will not switch off at the next traffic The indicator lamp goes out upon reaching a Automatic headlamp dipping stop, if the exterior temperature is: speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and Fixed. – below 0°C. lights up again when the vehicle stops moving. The function has been activated – above +35°C. The lamp will go out when you turn off the via the touch screen (Driving / Vehicle menu). Flashing then fixed, accompanied by a engine and exit the vehicle. The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO" message. Park Assist or Full Park Assist position. The system has a fault. Fixed. Blue warning/indicator lamps Carry out (3). The function is active. Main beam headlamps Night Vision Active Lane Keeping Assist Fixed. Fixed. Fixed. The lamps are on. The system has been activated, but The function has been activated. Black/white warning lamps the vehicle is travelling too fast or the exterior All the conditions have been met: the system is temperature conditions are outside the operating operating. Automatic gearbox or Electric automatic range. Automatic wiping gearbox (e-EAT8) (Hybrid) The display is available with the "Night vision" Fixed. Fixed. mode but the system does not emit an alert. Automatic windscreen wiping is activated. The automatic gearbox is locked. Rear foglamps You must press the button to unlock it. Night Vision Unlock Fixed. Fixed. eSave function (Hybrid) The lamps are on. The function has been activated. Fixed, accompanied by the reserved Green warning/indicator lamps All the conditions have been met: the system is electric range. The eSave function is activated. Stop & Start operating. Fixed. Direction indicators When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start Flashing with audible signal. Indicators puts the engine into STOP mode. The direction indicators are on. Flashing temporarily. Sidelamps Service indicator STOP mode is momentarily unavailable Fixed. The servicing information is expressed in terms or START mode is automatically triggered. The lamps are on. of distance (kilometres or miles) and time Vehicle ready to drive (Hybrid) Dipped beam headlamps (months or days). Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal Fixed. The alert is given at whichever of these two when it comes on. The lamps are on. terms is reached first. The vehicle is ready to drive.
16 Instruments
The servicing information is displayed in the Resetting the service indicator On versions fitted with an electric gauge, the instrument panel. Depending on the version of The service indicator must be reset after each engine oil level status is displayed on the 1 the vehicle: service. instrument panel for a few seconds when – The distance recorder display line indicates If you have serviced your vehicle yourself: the ignition is switched on, after the servicing the distance remaining before the next service ► Switch off the ignition. information, in the form of messages. is due, or the distance travelled since it was due The level read will only be correct if the preceded by the "-" sign. vehicle is on level ground and the engine – An alert message indicates the distance has been off for more than 30 minutes. remaining, as well as the period before the next service is due or how long it is overdue. Oil level incorrect
The value indicated is calculated ► Press and hold the button located on the end This is indicated by a message prompting you according to the distance covered and of the lighting control stalk. to top up, accompanied by the lighting of the the time elapsed since the last service. ► With no action on the brake pedal, press the Service warning lamp and an audible signal. The alert may also be triggered close to a START/STOP button once; a temporary display If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using due date. window appears and a countdown begins. the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid ► When the display indicates =0, release the damage to the engine. Service spanner lighting control stalk button; the spanner symbol For more information on Checking levels, refer On temporarily when the ignition is disappears. to the corresponding section. switched on. Gauge fault Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000 If you disconnect the battery following km) remain before the next service is due. this operation, lock the vehicle and wait This is indicated by the message "Oil level Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. at least 5 minutes for the reset to be measurement invalid" on the instrument panel. The next service is due in less than 620 registered. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified miles (1,000 km). workshop. Have your vehicle serviced very soon. Retrieving the servicing information In the event of a fault with the electric Service spanner flashing You can view the servicing information by gauge, the oil level is no longer Flashing then fixed, when the pressing the "Check / Diagnostic" button monitored. ignition is switched on. in the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. If the system is faulty, you must check the (With BlueHDi Diesel engines, combined with the engine oil level using the manual dipstick Service warning lamp.) Engine oil level indicator located under the bonnet. The servicing interval has been exceeded. For more information on , (Depending on version.) Checking levels Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. refer to the corresponding section.
17 Instruments
Engine coolant temperature AdBlue® range indicators Actions required related to a lack of ® indicator (BlueHDi) AdBlue
The following warning lamps light up when the The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with quantity of AdBlue® is lower than the reserve a system that associates the SCR (Selective level corresponding to a range of 1,500 miles Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system (2,400 km). and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the Together with the warning lamps, messages treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot regularly remind you of the need to top up to function without AdBlue® fluid. avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to When the level of AdBlue® falls below the the Warning and indicator lamps section for reserve level (between 1,500 and 0 miles (2,400 details of the messages displayed. and 0 km)), a warning lamp lights up when
the ignition is switched on and an estimate For more information on AdBlue® With the engine running: of the distance that can be travelled before (BlueHDi engines), and in particular on – In zone A, the temperature is correct. engine starting is prevented is displayed in the topping up, refer to the corresponding section. – In zone B, the temperature is too high; the instrument panel. associated warning lamp and the central STOP The engine starting prevention system warning lamp come on in red on the instrument Warning/ Action Remaining panel, accompanied by the display of a message required by regulations is activated ® indicator range and an audible signal. automatically once the AdBlue tank is empty. It is then no longer possible to start the lamps lit
You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is engine until the minimum level of AdBlue® has safe to do so. Top up. Between been topped up. 1,500 and
Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine. 500 miles Manual display of the range (2,400 and After switching off the ignition, carefully 800 km)
open the bonnet and check the coolant While the range is greater than 1,500 miles Top up as Between 500 level. (2,400 km), it is not displayed automatically. soon as and 62 miles
The range information can be accessed via the " " button in the possible. (800 and For more information on Checking Check/Diagnostics menu of the touch screen. 100 km) levels, refer to the corresponding Driving/Vehicle section.
18 Instruments
when switching on the ignition for subsequent To be able to restart the engine, call on a Warning/ Action Remaining journeys, while the fault persists. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified 1 indicator range workshop. lamps lit If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappears during the next journey, after A top-up is Between 62 self-diagnostic checks of the SCR emissions vital, there and 0 miles Power indicator (Hybrid) control system. is the risk (100 and The power indicator makes it possible to know in that the 0 km) real time the power requested from the vehicle. Malfunction confirmed during the engine will There are 3 zones: permitted driving phase (between 685 and be prevented 0 miles (1,100 and 0 km)) from starting.
If the warning lamp is still on after 31 miles To be able 0 miles (km) (50 km) of driving, the fault in the SCR system is to restart confirmed. the engine, The AdBlue warning lamp flashes, accompanied add at least
by the display of a message ("Emissions fault: 5 litres of Starting prevented in X miles") indicating the ® AdBlue to remaining range in miles or kilometres. its tank. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds. The alert is repeated when switching
Malfunction of the SCR emissions on the ignition. POWER High power demand, using the You can continue driving for up to 685 miles control system combined capabilities of the petrol (1,100 km) before the engine starting Malfunction detection engine and the electric motor. system is triggered. prevention The cursor is located in this zone
If a malfunction is detected, Have the system checked by a during more dynamic driving phases these warning lamps come on, PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified when high levels of performance are accompanied by an audible workshop as soon as possible. being requested. signal and the display of an "Emissions fault" message. Starting prevented
Every time the ignition is switched on, the message "Emissions fault: Starting prevented" is The alert is triggered while driving as soon displayed. as the fault is detected for the first time, then
19 Instruments
ECO Optimal use of energy (internal are permanently displayed when the vehicle is 30 seconds after switching off the ignition. It is combustion or electric). switched on. displayed when the driver's door is opened, and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The cursor is located in this zone With the ignition off, opening the driver's during electric driving phases and door activates the indicator. When travelling abroad, you may have to during optimal usage phases of the change the distance units (km or miles): petrol engine, accessible with suitable the road speed must be displayed in the local driving. Manual test country’s official unit (km/h or mph). An indicator indicates the restart The unit is changed via the screen This function allows you to check certain threshold of the petrol engine. The configuration menu, with the vehicle indicators and display the alerts log. driver can therefore moderate their stationary. acceleration to remain in electric It can be accessed via the "Diagnostic / driving mode. Check" button in the Driving / Vehicle CHARGE Energy recovery for recharging the touch screen menu. traction battery. The following information is displayed on the Lighting dimmer The cursor is located in this zone instrument panel: This system allows the brightness of the during deceleration phases: taking – Engine oil level. instruments and controls to be adjusted to suit your foot off the accelerator pedal or – Next service due. the ambient light level. braking. – Tyre pressures. – Driving range associated with the AdBlue and With 8" touch screen Charge level indicator the SCR system (BlueHDi Diesel). ► Press this button to select the – Active alerts. Settings menu. (Hybrid) ► Select "Brightness".
This information is also displayed automatically every time the ignition is ► Adjust the brightness by pressing the switched on. arrows or moving the slider. The settings are applied immediately. ► Press outside the settings window to exit. Total distance recorder You can also switch off the screen: The total distance recorder measures the total ► Press this button to select the distance travelled by the vehicle since its initial Settings menu.
registration. ► Select "Dark". The charge level of the traction battery and With the ignition on, the total distance is the remaining range in electric driving mode displayed at all times. It remains displayed for The screen goes off completely.
20 Instruments
► Press the screen again (anywhere on its Display of data in the Trip reset surface) to activate it. 1 instrument panel ► When the desired trip is displayed, press the button on the end of the wiper Trip computer data is displayed permanently With 10" HD touch screen control stalk for more than 2 seconds. when the "PERSONAL" display mode is ► Press this button to select the Trips " " and " " are independent and are used selected. 1 2 Settings menu. identically. ► Select "OPTIONS". In all other display modes, pressing the end of ► Select "Screen configuration". the wiper control stalk causes this data to appear temporarily in a specific window. Definitions Display of the different tabs ► Select the "Brightness" tab. Range ► Adjust the brightness by pressing the (miles or km) arrows or moving the slider. The distance which can still be travelled
► Press this button to save and exit.
with the fuel remaining in the tank (depending on the average fuel consumption You can also switch off the screen: over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled). ► Press this button to select the This value may vary following a change in menu. Settings the style of driving or the terrain, resulting ► Select " ". Turn off screen in a significant change in the current fuel
consumption. The screen goes off completely. ► Press this button located on the end of the When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), ► Press the screen again (anywhere on its wiper control stalk to display the different tabs dashes are displayed. surface) to activate it. in turn: – Current information: After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range • Total range (petrol or Diesel). is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 Trip computer • Total range (petrol or Diesel). miles (100 km). If dashes instead of figures continue to be Displays information related to the current trip • Stop & Start time counter (petrol or Diesel). displayed when driving, contact a PEUGEOT (range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.). • Percentage of the current journey travelled in all-electric driving mode (Hybrid). dealer or a qualified workshop. – Trips "1" then "2": • Average speed. Current fuel consumption • Average fuel consumption. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) • Distance travelled. Calculated during the last few seconds.
21 Instruments
This function is only displayed at speeds above – Permanent display of the time and the exterior Principles 19 mph (30 km/h). temperature (a blue warning lamp appears if ► Use the buttons arranged below the touch there is a risk of ice). screen for access to the menus, then press the Average fuel consumption – Heating/air conditioning controls. virtual buttons on the touch screen. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) – Vehicle functions and equipment setting Some menus may display across two pages: Calculated since the last trip computer menus. press the "OPTIONS" button to access the reset. – Audio system and telephone controls and second page. display of related information. Average speed – Display of visual manoeuvring aid functions After a few moments with no action on (mph or km/h) (visual parking sensor information, Park Assist, the second page, the first page is Calculated since the last trip computer etc.). displayed automatically. reset. – Internet services and display of related To deactivate/activate a function, select " " information. OFF or " ". Distance travelled – Navigation system controls and ON Settings for a function (miles or km) display of related information (depending on Calculated since the last trip computer version). Access to additional information on the reset. For safety reasons, always stop the function Stop & Start time counter vehicle before performing operations Confirm that require sustained attention. (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes) Some functions are not accessible while Return to the previous page or confirm driving. If your vehicle is equipped with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey. Recommendations It resets to zero every time the ignition is This screen is of the capacitive type. switched on. Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen. Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. Touch screen Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch screen. This system gives access to the following elements:
22 Instruments
Menus Activation, deactivation and settings for certain functions. 1 The functions are organised in 2 tabs : "Driving functions" and "Vehicle settings". Telephone Refer to the “Audio equipment and telematics” section. Applications 1. Active driving mode Access to certain configurable equipment. 2. Petrol engine For the other functions, refer to the "Audio 3. Electric motor equipment and telematics" section. 4. Traction battery charge level Settings Main settings for the audio system, touch Energy flows have a specific colour for each type Press with three fingers on the touch screen and digital instrument panel. of driving: screen to show all menu buttons. or – Blue: 100% electric power. Hybrid – Orange: power from the petrol engine. Radio / Media Access to the hybrid system features – Green: energy recovery. Refer to the “Audio equipment and (energy flow, consumption statistics, deferred Consumption statistics telematics” section. charge, eSave function). Climate For more information on Charging the battery The Statistics tab shows electrical energy and Settings for temperature, air flow, etc. (Hybrid), refer to the corresponding section. fuel consumption statistics. For more information on Automatic dual-zone Volume adjustment/mute. air conditioning, refer to the corresponding See "Audio equipment and telematics" section. section. Connected Navigation* (Depending on equipment) Hybrid menu Refer to the “Audio equipment and telematics” section. Energy flow
Driving or Vehicle (depending on The Flow tab presents the operation of the equipment) rechargeable hybrid system in real time.
* The TomTom Traffic logo displayed on the map confirms the availability of connected navigation services. For more information, refer to the connected navigation section.
23 Instruments
1. Average electrical consumption for the current internal combustion engine starts to ensure Remote features (Hybrid)
trip (kWh/100 km) and historical values: that the traction battery is recharged to the – Blue bar chart: directly consumed energy requested threshold - risk of downgraded supplied by the traction battery. performance and overconsumption of fuel! – Green bar chart: energy recovered during These features are accessible deceleration and braking, used to recharge the using a smartphone, via the battery. Information banner(s) MyPeugeot application: 2. Average fuel consumption for the current trip Certain information is displayed permanently in the touch screen banner(s). (kWh/100 km) and historical values (orange bar – Battery charge management. chart). 8" touch screen upper banner – Temperature pre-conditioning management. ► You can change the displayed time scale by – Time and exterior temperature (a blue warning – Consumption, charge status and driving range pressing the - or + buttons. lamp appears if there is a risk of ice). statistics. eSave function – Reminder of the air conditioning information, Installation procedure and direct access to the corresponding menu. ► Download the MyPeugeot app from the The eSave tab makes it possible to reserve all or – Reminder of the information in the part of the electrical energy of the traction battery appropriate online store for your smartphone. Radio Media and Telephone menus. ► Create an account. for later use during a journey (e.g. driving in an – Notifications. urban area or in an area reserved for electric ► Enter the vehicle’s VIN (code beginning with – Access to the Settings for the touch screen "VF" on the vehicle registration document). vehicles). and the digital instrument panel (date/time, For more information on Identification ► Activate the function by choosing ON then languages, units, etc.). select the electrical energy to be reserved: 10 markings, refer to the corresponding section. 10" HD touch screen side banners km, 20 km or all of the electrical energy (MAX). Network coverage – Exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp Activation of the function is confirmed by In order to be able to use the various appears if there is a risk of ice). the lighting up of this indicator lamp in the remotely operable features, ensure that your – Access to the Settings for the touch screen instrument panel and the display of the energy vehicle is located in an area covered by the and the digital instrument panel (date/time, reserve in miles or kms. mobile network. languages, units, etc.). ► To use the energy reserve, choose the A lack of network coverage may prevent – Notifications. ELECTRIC driving mode in the mode selector. communication with the vehicle (for example, – Reminder of the air conditioning information, The function settings are not saved when the if it is in an underground car park). In such and direct access to the corresponding menu. ignition is switched off. cases, the application will display a message – Time. If the requested range exceeds the indicating that the connection with the vehicle available range (not recommended), the could not be established.
24 Access
Electronic key with procedures, please refer to the corresponding Selective unlocking (driver’s door, boot) is section. configured in the Driving/Vehicle touch 2 remote control function screen menu. and built-in key, Integral key The key built into the remote control can be Complete unlocking Remote control function used for the following operations, depending on ► Press the unlocking button.
version: – Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle. Selective unlocking – Activation/Deactivation of the manual child Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap lock. ► Press the unlocking button. – Activation/Deactivation of the front passenger ► Press it again to unlock the other doors and airbag. the boot. – Back-up Unlocking/Locking of the doors. Complete or selective unlocking and alarm deactivation is confirmed by the flashing of the sidelamps and/or daytime running lamps. The door mirrors unfold.
Selective unlocking and opening of The remote control can be used for the following the tailgate remote functions, depending on version: By default, selective unlocking of the tailgate – Unlocking / Locking / Deadlocking the vehicle. is deactivated and its motorised operation is – Unlocking - Opening / Closing the boot. activated. – Remote operation of lighting. ► Press and hold this button to unlock – Folding / Unfolding the door mirrors. the boot and trigger the motorised
– Activating / Deactivating the alarm. ► To eject the key or put it back in place, pull opening of the tailgate. – Locating the vehicle. and hold the button. The doors and fuel filler flap remain locked. – Opening / Closing the windows. If selective unlocking of the tailgate is – Closing the sunroof. Unlocking the vehicle deactivated, pressing the button unlocks – Activating the vehicle’s electronic immobiliser.
the whole vehicle. Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be locked / unlocked in the event of a failure of the remote control, the central locking, the battery, etc. For more information on the Back-up
25 Access
If motorised operation of the tailgate is Deadlocking renders the interior door – The courtesy lamps come on. Locking the vehicle deactivated, pressing the button releases controls inoperative. It also deactivates ► Press this button. Driving with the doors locked could make the tailgate. the central locking button. it more difficult for the emergency services to To lock the vehicle, it is necessary to close The horn remains operational. enter the vehicle in an emergency. the tailgate again. Never leave anyone inside the vehicle Remote lighting of the As a safety precaution, take the electronic key when it is deadlocked. lamps with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. Locking the vehicle Closing the windows Availability of this function depends on version. Holding the locking button pressed for ► Press this button. The sidelamps, Purchasing a second-hand vehicle more than 3 seconds closes the windows. dipped beam headlamps, number plate lamps and door mirror spotlamps come on for 30 Have the key codes memorised by a When closing the windows, ensure that PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys Normal locking seconds. no person or object could prevent their Pressing again before the end of the timed in your possession are the only ones able to ► Press the locking button. correct closure. period switches off the lamps immediately. start the vehicle. Locking and alarm activation is confirmed by the To leave the windows partly open on versions lighting of the direction indicators. with alarm, you must first deactivate the Advice The door mirrors fold. interior volumetric alarm protection. Keyless Entry and Remote control An access (door or boot) that is not For more information on the Alarm, refer to The remote control is a sensitive, high- Starting properly closed prevents locking of the the corresponding section. frequency device; avoid handling it in your vehicle. However, if the vehicle is fitted with pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally an alarm, it will be activated after 45 seconds. "Peugeot Adaptive LED technology" unlocking the vehicle. If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or boot With the Full LED 3D rear lamps, the Avoid pressing the remote control buttons are not subsequently opened, the vehicle lamps illuminate in a scrolling pattern upon while out of range of the vehicle, due to will automatically lock itself again after about locking and unlocking the vehicle, as well as the risk of rendering the remote control 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with an when the lamps are lit remotely. inoperative. It would then be necessary to alarm, it will also be reactivated automatically. reset it. Locating the vehicle Deadlocking This function helps you to spot your vehicle from Anti-theft protection ► Press the locking button again within a distance, with the vehicle locked: Do not modify the electronic vehicle
5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed by – The direction indicators or sidelamps and/or immobiliser, as this might result in This system allows the unlocking, locking the temporary lighting of the direction indicators). daytime running lamps, depending on version, malfunctions. and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the flash for approximately 10 seconds. – The door mirror spotlamps come on.
26 Access
Locking the vehicle electronic key on your person in the recognition ► Pass your hand behind the driver’s door Driving with the doors locked could make zone A. handle. 2 it more difficult for the emergency services to ► To unlock the vehicle completely, pass your enter the vehicle in an emergency. Unlocking the vehicle hand behind the handle of one of the passenger As a safety precaution, take the electronic key doors with the electronic key close to the with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a passenger door, or press the tailgate opening short time. control with the electronic key close to the rear of the vehicle. Purchasing a second-hand vehicle Complete or selective unlocking, and Have the key codes memorised by a deactivation of the alarm depending on PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys version, is confirmed by the flashing of the in your possession are the only ones able to sidelamps and/or daytime running lamps.
start the vehicle. The door mirrors unfold. Selective unlocking (driver’s door, boot) is configured in the Driving/Vehicle touch Selective unlocking of the tailgate Keyless Entry and screen menu. ► Press the tailgate opening control to unlock Selective unlocking is deactivated by default. just the boot. Starting The doors remain locked. Complete unlocking If selective unlocking of the tailgate is ► Pass your hand behind the handle of one deactivated, pressing this control also of the four doors or press the tailgate opening unlocks the doors. control. If the motorised tailgate opening control is activated, this action triggers its automatic Locking the vehicle opening. Opening the windows Normal locking Depending on version, keeping your hand behind the door handle or maintaining the press on the tailgate opening control allows the
windows to be opened to the desired position. This system allows the unlocking, locking
and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the Selective unlocking Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap
27 Access
► Press the handle on one of the four doors The automatic door mirror folding/ Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt, (at the markings) or the locking control on the unfolding function is configured via the etc.) on the inner surface of the door tailgate. touch screen’s Driving / Vehicle menu. handle may affect detection. It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the If cleaning the inner surface of the door electronic keys is left inside the vehicle. As a safety measure, never leave the handle using a cloth does not restore
Closing the windows and sunroof detection, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a ► Press the handle on one of the four doors vehicle, even for a short time, without Maintaining pressure on the door handle or qualified workshop. (at the markings) or the locking control on the taking the Keyless Entry and Starting the tailgate control allows the windows and, A sudden splash of water (stream of water, tailgate to lock the vehicle. system’s electronic key with you. depending on version, the sunroof to be closed high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be ► Press it again within 5 seconds to deadlock Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if to the desired position. identified by the system as the desire to open the vehicle (confirmed by the temporary lighting the key is present in one of the defined areas This operation also closes the sunroof blind. the vehicle. of the direction indicators). while the vehicle is unlocked. Make sure that no item or person could "Peugeot Adaptive LED technology" prevent the correct closing of the To preserve the battery charge in the With the Full LED 3D rear lamps, the windows and sunroof. electronic key and the vehicle's battery, Back-up procedures lamps illuminate in a scrolling pattern upon Pay particular attention to children when the "hands-free" functions are set to locking and unlocking the vehicle, as well as operating windows. hibernation mode after 21 days without use. when the lamps are lit remotely. Lost keys, remote control, To restore these functions, press one of the The locking, and the activation of the alarm remote control buttons or start the engine with electronic key depending on version, is confirmed by the If one of the doors or the boot is still open the electronic key in the reader. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's temporary lighting of the direction indicators. or if the electronic key for the Keyless For more information on starting with the registration certificate, your personal The door mirrors fold. Entry and Starting system has been left inside Keyless Entry and Starting system, refer to identification documents and if possible, the label the vehicle, central locking will be disabled. the corresponding section. bearing the key code. Deadlocking However, if the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the it will be activated after 45 seconds. key code and the transponder code, enabling a Deadlocking renders the interior door Electrical interference new key to be ordered. controls inoperative. It also deactivates The electronic key may not operate if If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or the central locking button. close to certain electronic devices: telephone Complete unlocking/locking The horn remains operational. boot are not subsequently opened, the (switched on or on standby), laptop computer, Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it vehicle will automatically lock itself again after strong magnetic fields, etc. of the vehicle with the key is deadlocked. about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with Use this procedure in the following situations: an alarm, it will also be reactivated – Remote control battery discharged.
automatically. – Remote control malfunction. – Vehicle battery discharged.
28 Access
Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt, – Vehicle in an area subject to strong Driver's door etc.) on the inner surface of the door electromagnetic interference. ► Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle 2 handle may affect detection. In the first case, change the remote control to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it. If cleaning the inner surface of the door battery. handle using a cloth does not restore In the second case, reinitialise the remote Passenger doors detection, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a control. Unlocking qualified workshop. Refer to the corresponding sections. ► Pull the interior door opening control. A sudden splash of water (stream of water, ► Insert the key in the door lock. Locking high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be ► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ identified by the system as the desire to open lock the vehicle. the vehicle. ► Turn the key rearwards again within 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will Back-up procedures not be activated when locking with the key. Lost keys, remote control, If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds electronic key when the door is opened; switch on the ignition to stop it. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration certificate, your personal identification documents and if possible, the label Central locking not ► Open the doors. bearing the key code. functioning ► For the rear doors, check that the child lock The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the is not on. Use these procedures in the following cases: key code and the transponder code, enabling a Refer to the corresponding section. – Central locking malfunction. new key to be ordered. ► Remove the black cap, located on the edge – Battery disconnected or discharged. of the door, using the key. Complete unlocking/locking In the event of a malfunction of the ► Insert the key into the socket without forcing of the vehicle with the key central locking system, the battery must it, then turn the latch towards the inside of the be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is door. Use this procedure in the following situations: locked fully. ► Remove the key and refit the black cap. – Remote control battery discharged. ► Close the doors and check from the outside – Remote control malfunction. that the vehicle is locked. – Vehicle battery discharged.
29 Access
Changing the battery Reinitialising the remote Central locking Automatic (anti-intrusion A message is displayed on the instrument panel control security) when the battery needs changing. Following replacement of the battery or in The doors and boot lock automatically while Battery type: CR2032 / 3 volts.
the event of a fault, it may be necessary to driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)).
reinitialise the remote control. To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated by default): ► Press the button until an audible warning is triggered and a confirmation message appears.
Transporting long or voluminous objects Manual Press the central locking control to drive ► Press this button to lock/unlock the vehicle with the boot open and the doors locked. (doors and boot) from inside the vehicle. Otherwise, every time the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the locks
The indicator lamp comes on to confirm the will rebound and an alert will appear. ► Unclip the cover by inserting a small central locking of the vehicle.
screwdriver in the slot and raise the cover. The central locking does not take place if ► Remove the discharged battery from its ► Insert the mechanical key (incorporated into one of the doors is open. housing. the remote control) into the lock to open the Alarm ► Insert the new battery, observing the polarity, vehicle. (Depending on version)
When locking/deadlocking from the and clip the cover onto the housing. ► Place the electronic key against the back-up outside ► Reinitialise the remote control. reader on the steering column and hold it there When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked For more information on Reinitialising the until the ignition is switched on. from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes
remote control, refer to the corresponding ► Switch on the ignition by pressing the and the button is inoperative. section. "START/STOP" button. ► After normal locking, pull one of the ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever Do not throw remote control batteries interior door controls to unlock the vehicle. in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. away, as they contain metals that are ► After deadlocking, it is necessary to use ► With an automatic gearbox, while in mode harmful to the environment. Take them to an the remote control, Keyless Entry and Starting P, depress the brake pedal. approved disposal point. or the integral key to unlock the vehicle. If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact System which protects and provides a deterrent a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop against theft and break-ins. without delay.
30 Access Automatic (anti-intrusion Exterior perimeter monitoring Locking the vehicle with full 2 security) The system checks for opening of the vehicle. alarm system The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a The doors and boot lock automatically while door, the boot or the bonnet, for example. driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). Activation To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated Interior volumetric monitoring ► Switch off the ignition and exit the vehicle. by default): The system checks for any variation in volume in ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the ► Press the button until an audible warning is the passenger compartment. remote control or with the “Keyless Entry and triggered and a confirmation message appears. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a Starting” system. window, enters the passenger compartment or When the monitoring system is active, the red Transporting long or voluminous moves inside the vehicle. indicator lamp in the button flashes once per objects second and the direction indicators come on for Press the central locking control to drive Anti-tilt monitoring about 2 seconds. with the boot open and the doors locked. The system checks for any change in the attitude The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated Otherwise, every time the speed of the of the vehicle. after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the locks The alarm goes off if the vehicle is lifted or anti-tilt monitoring after 45 seconds. will rebound and an alert will appear. moved. If an opening (door, boot or bonnet) is not When the vehicle is parked, the alarm properly closed, the vehicle is not locked, will not be triggered if the vehicle is but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be Alarm knocked. activated after 45 seconds, at the same time (Depending on version)
as the interior volumetric and anti-tilt Self-protection function monitoring. The system checks for the putting out of service
of its components. The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central Deactivation control or the siren wiring is put out of service or ► Press one of the remote control unlocking damaged. buttons: short press For all work on the alarm system, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified long press System which protects and provides a deterrent workshop. against theft and break-ins. or
31 Access
► Unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Entry and ► Lock the vehicle immediately using the rapid flashing of the red indicator lamp in the remote control or unlock the vehicle using the Starting system. remote control or with the “Keyless Entry and button informs you that the alarm was triggered “Keyless Entry and Starting” system. The monitoring system is deactivated: the Starting” system. during your absence. When the ignition is indicator lamp in the button goes off and the Only the exterior perimeter monitoring is switched on, this flashing stops. sidelamps and/or the daytime running lamps activated; the red indicator lamp in the button Doors flash for about 2 seconds. flashes every second. Failure of the remote control Your vehicle has doors with frameless windows. To deactivate the monitoring functions: A window micro-descent system is activated If the vehicle automatically locks itself To take effect, this deactivation must be ► Unlock the vehicle using the key in the when the door is opened and closed, as soon as again (as happens if a door or the boot is carried out after each time the ignition is driver's door lock. an action is performed on the interior or exterior not opened within 30 seconds of unlocking), switched off. ► Open the door; the alarm is triggered. door handle. the monitoring system is automatically ► Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm. reactivated. Reactivating the interior volumetric The indicator lamp in the button goes off. Opening and anti-tilt monitoring Locking the vehicle without From outside
Locking the vehicle ► Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring with exterior perimeter by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control activating the alarm monitoring only or the Keyless Entry and Starting system. ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key The indicator lamp in the button goes off. (integral to the remote control) in the driver's Disable volumetric monitoring to avoid unwanted ► Reactivate all monitoring by locking the door lock. alarm triggering in certain cases, such as: vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless ► After unlocking the vehicle or with the – Slightly open window. Entry and Starting system. Malfunction Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key in the – Washing the vehicle. The red indicator lamp in the button once again When the ignition is switched on, fixed recognition zone, pull the door handle. – Changing a wheel. flashes every second. illumination of the red indicator lamp in the The window automatically lowers by a few – Towing your vehicle. button indicates a malfunction of the system. millimetres, allowing the door to be sealed when – Transport on a ship or ferry. Triggering of the alarm Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a closed. This is indicated by sounding of the siren Deactivating the interior volumetric qualified workshop. If the door remains open for more than and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 one minute, the window goes back up; and anti-tilt monitoring seconds. Automatic activation pull the handle again to reactivate the system. ► Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds Depending on the country of sale, certain (Depending on country of sale) In freezing temperatures, the presence of press the alarm button until its red indicator lamp monitoring functions remain active until the alarm The system is activated automatically 2 minutes ice may interfere with the window micro- is on fixed. has been triggered eleven times consecutively. after the last door or the boot is closed. descent system; remove any ice that may ► Get out of the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote ► To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the have formed along the seal at the base of the control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system, vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the window, then gently open the door.
32 Access remote control or unlock the vehicle using the When the selective unlocking is The window automatically goes back up after “Keyless Entry and Starting” system. activated, the first press of the remote a few seconds and adjusts to seal the window 2 control unlocking button permits unlocking of perfectly. the driver's door only. Doors Beware of the risk of trapping your fingers when the window comes up Your vehicle has doors with frameless windows. automatically. A window micro-descent system is activated From inside
when the door is opened and closed, as soon as – If a door is not properly closed, this an action is performed on the interior or exterior warning lamp comes on accompanied by door handle. a message if the engine is running, and an
audible signal when the vehicle is travelling at Opening ► Pull the interior opening control of a door; this more than 6 mph (10 km/h). unlocks the vehicle completely. When washing the vehicle From outside The window automatically comes down by a few First lock the vehicle using the remote millimetres, allowing the door to be sealed when control or remove the electronic key from the closed. recognition zone, with the doors closed. With selective unlocking activated: Avoid spraying the upper part of the windows. – Opening the driver's door unlocks Keep the end of the high-pressure lance at ► After unlocking the vehicle or with the the driver's door only (if the vehicle has not least 1 metre away from the door and window Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key in the already been completely unlocked). seals. recognition zone, pull the door handle. – Opening one of the passenger doors Clean the door and window seals regularly The window automatically lowers by a few unlocks the rest of the vehicle. with a cloth wetted with demineralised water, millimetres, allowing the door to be sealed when then dry with a soft cloth. closed. Closing
If the door remains open for more than Looking after the seals one minute, the window goes back up; From time to time, the rubber door and pull the handle again to reactivate the system. window seals must be sprayed with a silicone In freezing temperatures, the presence of type care product to prevent premature wear ice may interfere with the window micro- and sealing problems. descent system; remove any ice that may This also makes the doors easier to open, have formed along the seal at the base of the especially in winter to prevent freezing.
window, then gently open the door.
33 Access
In case of battery failure When selective unlocking is activated, Check that there is enough space to The micro-descent system may not the electronic key must be close to the allow for the movement of the motorised operate: rear of the vehicle. tailgate.
► Open the driver's door gently. ► Recharge or replace the battery. The tailgate is not designed to hold a ► Switch on the ignition again. bicycle carrier. ► Slightly lower all the windows using the driver's side electric window switches. ► Reinitialise the windows. Closing the tailgate ► Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the ► Lower the tailgate using the interior grips. lock to unlock the boot. ► Release the grips and press down on the ► Move the latch to the left. outside of the tailgate to close it. Boot Locking after closing
In the event of a malfunction or if you If the fault persists after closing again, the boot Opening the tailgate experience difficulty opening or closing will remain locked. the tailgate, have it checked by a PEUGEOT Never insert a finger in the locking dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, In the event of a fault with the central system of the motorised tailgate - risk of to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent locking system, it is essential to serious injury! any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially disconnect the battery to lock the boot and so ensure complete locking of the vehicle. causing serious injury. Anti-pinch The motorised tailgate has an obstacle detection Back-up release system that automatically interrupts and reverses Hands-free tailgate its movement by a few degrees, to allow the To manually unlock the boot in the event of a The motorised tailgate must only be operated obstacle to be cleared. battery or central locking failure. with the vehicle stationary. Please note that this anti-pinch system is not
Unlocking active at the end of the closing travel (around 1 cm from completely closed). ► With the vehicle unlocked or with the ► Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock "Keyless Entry and Starting" system electronic from inside the boot. key in the recognition zone, press the central tailgate control. ► Raise the tailgate.
* Depending on version.
34 Access
Check that there is enough space to To avoid the risk of injury through allow for the movement of the motorised pinching or trapping, before and during 2 tailgate. operation of the motorised tailgate:
– ensure that there is no-one close to the rear of the vehicle, – monitor the activity of the rear passengers, particularly any children.
Bicycle carrier / Towbar The motorised tailgate is not designed to support a bicycle carrier. When installing a bicycle carrier on a towbar
with connection of a cable to the towbar socket, the motorised operation of the tailgate will be Never insert a finger in the locking automatically deactivated. system of the motorised tailgate - risk of
If using a towbar or bicycle carrier not serious injury! recommended by PEUGEOT, it is essential There are several ways of operating the tailgate: to deactivate the motorised operation of the A. Using the Keyless Entry and Starting system Anti-pinch tailgate. electronic key. The motorised tailgate has an obstacle detection B. Using the exterior tailgate control. system that automatically interrupts and reverses Motorised operation C. Using the interior tailgate control. its movement by a few degrees, to allow the Motorised operation of the tailgate is set D. Using the control on the dashboard*. obstacle to be cleared. via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen E. Using the hands-free function below the rear Please note that this anti-pinch system is not menu. bumper.
active at the end of the closing travel (around 1 cm from completely closed). Opening / Closing ► Press and hold the central button A of the electronic key. or
* Depending on version.
35 Access
► Briefly press the exterior tailgate control B, It is possible to interrupt the operation of been detected, wait at least 2 seconds before with the electronic key on your person. the tailgate at any point. repeating the movement. or Pressing one of these controls again Do not perform repetitive “kicking” ► Briefly press the interior tailgate control C interrupts the movement that is underway. movements. (closing only). Following the interruption of a movement, or pressing one of these controls again reverses If the tailgate has not started to open, check that: ► Press the control D on the dashboard twice in the movement. – the function is activated. succession. – the electronic key is on your person, outside or the vehicle in the rear recognition area. Hands-free function (“Hands-Free ► With the electronic key on your person, – the “kicking” movement was performed in the use the hands-free function E by performing a Tailgate Access”) detection zone, close enough to the bumper. "kicking" movement below the rear bumper, near With the electronic key on your person, this – the foot was removed from the bumper quickly the number plate. function opens, closes or stops the movement of enough. For more information on the Hands-free the tailgate with a “kicking” movement below the Automatic locking with the hands-free (“Hands-Free Tailgate Access”) function, refer rear bumper. function to the corresponding section. The "Hands-Free Tailgate/Access" function is set via the Driving / Vehicle The tailgate opens, either completely by touch screen menu. default, or to the position memorised
beforehand. Ensure that you are steady on your feet
If motorised operation is not activated, these before performing the “kicking” ► Position yourself behind the vehicle by the ► To activate/deactivate the automatic locking actions release the tailgate (partially-open movement. number plate and perform a “kicking” movement of the vehicle when closing the tailgate with the position). Take care not to touch the exhaust system in the "OK" detection zone. hands-free function, press this button. When the vehicle is locked, the request to which may be hot - risk of burns! The “kicking” movement must be given forwards, The green indicator lamp comes on to indicate
open the boot with one of controls , or smoothly, not too fast and with a vertical A B that the function is activated. E unlocks the vehicle, or only the boot if movement from low to high. Raise the foot selective unlocking is activated, prior to the sufficiently and remove it immediately. Recommendations on the hands-free opening of the boot. The taking into account of the “kicking” function ("Hands-Free Tailgate Access") Closing the tailgate with the hands-free movement is confirmed by the lighting of the If it does not work, check that the electronic key function enables you to lock the vehicle. direction indicators. is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic "Sideward kicking" movements do not interference (e.g. smartphone). work. If the “kicking” movement has not The function may be deactivated or affected if there is rain or snow.
36 Access
been detected, wait at least 2 seconds before The function may not work correctly with a to 1 metre between the low position and the repeating the movement. prosthetic leg. high position of the tailgate. 2 Do not perform repetitive “kicking” In some circumstances, the tailgate may open or movements. close by itself, particularly when: To delete the memorised position: – hitching up or removing a trailer; ► open the tailgate to any position. If the tailgate has not started to open, check that: – fitting or removing a bicycle carrier; ► press button C or the exterior control B for – the function is activated. – loading or unloading bicycles on / from a more than 3 seconds (deletion is confirmed by a – the electronic key is on your person, outside bicycle carrier; long audible signal). the vehicle in the rear recognition area. – depositing or lifting something behind the – the “kicking” movement was performed in the vehicle; Manual operation detection zone, close enough to the bumper. – an animal approaches the rear bumper; The tailgate can be manoeuvred by hand, even – the foot was removed from the bumper quickly – washing the vehicle; with motorised operation activated. enough. – maintenance is performed on the vehicle; The tailgate must be stationary. Automatic locking with the hands-free – accessing the spare wheel. When opening and closing the motorised tailgate function To avoid such operating problems, keep the manually, there is no assistance from gas struts.
electronic key away from the recognition zone or Resistance to opening and closing is therefore deactivate the hands-free function. entirely normal.
The installation of a towing device may Repeatedly opening and closing the disturb the detection system. motorised tailgate can cause overheating of its electric motor, after which opening and ► To activate/deactivate the automatic locking closing will not be possible. of the vehicle when closing the tailgate with the Memorising an opening Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric hands-free function, press this button. motor to cool down before operating the The green indicator lamp comes on to indicate position tailgate again. that the function is activated. To memorise a position, in order to limit the If you are unable to wait, operate it manually. motorised tailgate opening angle: Recommendations on the hands-free ► move the tailgate to the desired position function ("Hands-Free Tailgate Access") manually or by pressing the button. Manual closing of the If it does not work, check that the electronic key ► press button C or the exterior control B for motorised tailgate in case of is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic more than 3 seconds (memorisation is confirmed interference (e.g. smartphone). by a brief audible signal). failure The function may be deactivated or affected if Memorising is not available until the This operation is only necessary in the case of there is rain or snow. height of opening is more than or equal failure of the tailgate motor.
37 Access
If the failure originates from the battery, it is the vehicle to prevent any risk of unwanted opens/closes completely when the switch is The rear electric windows can still be controlled recommended to recharge it or change it with the opening. released. using the driver's controls. tailgate closed. Operating the switch again stops the movement In the event of a serious impact, use of In this situation, a significant force may be of the window. the rear electric window controls is needed to close the tailgate. Electric windows Window controls remain operational for re-enabled, if they had been deactivated. ► Close it gently without slamming, as slowly as approximately 45 seconds after switching possible, by pushing at the centre of the tailgate. off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. Do not lower the tailgate by pushing at After that time, the controls are disabled. Reinitialising the electric one of its sides - risk of damage! To reactivate them, switch on the ignition or windows unlock the vehicle. Following reconnection of the battery, or if the windows move abnormally, the anti-pinch Precautions in use 1. Left-hand front Anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. 2. Right-hand front To avoid unintentionally opening the 3. Right-hand rear If the window meets an obstacle while rising, it The safety anti-pinch function is not active tailgate while operating the towing 4. Left-hand rear stops and immediately partially lowers again. during these operations. For each of the windows: device: 5. Deactivation of the electric window controls – Deactivate the hands-free function in located by the rear seats Deactivating the rear ► Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will advance in the vehicle configuration menu. Locking the rear doors - Electric child lock controls for the rear electric rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the – Or remove the electronic key from the (depending on version) control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the recognition zone, with the tailgate closed. windows window is fully closed.
For more information on the Towing device For more information on the Electric child lock, ► Continue to pull the switch for at least with retractable towball, refer to the refer to the corresponding section. one second after reaching the window closed position. corresponding section. Manual operation If an electric window meets an obstacle ► To open/close the window, press/pull the In wintry conditions during operation, the movement of the switch without passing the point of resistance; To avoid any operating problems, remove window must be reversed. To do this, press the window stops as soon as the switch is For your children's safety, press control 5 to the snow or wait until the ice melts before the switch concerned. released. deactivate the controls for the rear electric requesting motorised opening of the tailgate. windows, irrespective of their positions. When the driver operates the passengers’ Automatic operation The red indicator lamp in the button comes electric window switches, it is important to When washing ensure that nothing can prevent the window ► To open/close the window, press/pull the on and a confirmation message is displayed. When washing the vehicle in an from closing properly. switch past its resistance point: the window The lamp will remain lit until the controls are automatic car wash, do not forget to lock reactivated. It is important to ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly.
38 Access
The rear electric windows can still be controlled Be particularly aware of children when Precautions using the driver's controls. operating the windows. 2 Be aware of passengers and/or other persons Do not put your head or arms through the In the event of a serious impact, use of present when closing the windows using sunroof when driving - risk of serious the rear electric window controls is the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and injury! re-enabled, if they had been deactivated. Starting" system. Ensure that any luggage or accessories Reinitialising the electric carried on the roof bars does not Panoramic sunroof interfere with the movement of the sunroof. windows Do not place heavy loads on the movable The panoramic sunroof consists of a movable Following reconnection of the battery, or if glass panel of the sunroof. the windows move abnormally, the anti-pinch glass panel that slides over the roof and a blind function must be reinitialised. that can be opened independently. Opening the If the sunroof is wet, following a shower The safety anti-pinch function is not active sunroof automatically opens the blind. or washing the vehicle, wait until it is during these operations. ► To operate the panoramic sunroof or the completely dry before opening. For each of the windows: blind, use the buttons in the roof console. Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered by ► Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will snow or ice - risk of damage! rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow or control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the ice from the sunroof. window is fully closed. ► Continue to pull the switch for at least one second after reaching the window closed Check the condition of the sunroof seals position. regularly (presence of dust or deposits, dead leaves, etc.). If an electric window meets an obstacle If using a car wash, check that the roof is during operation, the movement of the correctly closed in advance and keep the window must be reversed. To do this, press A. Sunroof blind control tip of the high-pressure lance at least 30 the switch concerned. B. Sunroof control centimetres from the seals. When the driver operates the passengers’ The sunroof or blind can be operated when the electric window switches, it is important to ignition is turned on (if the battery is charged Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof ensure that nothing can prevent the window enough), with the engine running, in STOP mode open. from closing properly. of Stop & Start, and up to 45 seconds after It is important to ensure that the passengers turning off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. use the electric windows correctly.
39 Access
Operation ► To close the sunroof or the blind, use the part Reinitialisation of the button located towards the . When opening the sunroof fully, the movable front Following reconnection of the battery or in the glass moves to a partially open position, then Operation of buttons event of a fault or jerky movement of the sunroof slides over the roof. All intermediate positions ► Pressing a button beyond its point of or blind, reinitialisation is required. are allowed. resistance directly opens or closes the sunroof ► Check that nothing is interfering with the sunroof or blind and that the seals are clean. Depending on the speed of the vehicle, fully. ► With the ignition on, fully close the sunroof the partially open position may vary to ► Pressing the button again stops the current and blind. improve the acoustics. movement. ► When holding a button (without going ► Press and hold the front part of button B, until beyond the point of resistance), the movement the sunroof and blind move slightly, then hold for Before operating the sunroof or blind of the sunroof or blind stops when this button is a further 1 second before releasing. control buttons, ensure that no object or released. ► Wait 2 seconds and then press and hold the person might prevent the movement. ► When the sunroof is closed: pressing once front part of button B. The blind and the sunroof Be particularly aware of children when without passing the point of resistance moves it will open and close, one after the other. When operating the sunroof or blind. to a partially open position. both are completely closed again, hold for a If something is trapped when operating the ► When the sunroof is partially open: pressing further 2 seconds and release. sunroof or blind, you should reverse the once without passing the point of resistance movement of the sunroof or blind by pressing If there is an operating fault, restart the opens or closes it fully. the control in question. whole procedure. The driver must ensure that passengers use The roof and windows, then the blind, the sunroof and blind correctly. can be closed by holding down the door locking control. The operation stops as soon Anti-pinch system as the locking control is released. If the sunroof or blind encounters an obstacle when closing, the movement is automatically Closing of the blind is limited by the reversed. position of the sunroof: the blind cannot The roof anti-pinch system is designed to be go further than the front of the mobile glass. effective at speeds of up to 75 mph (120 km/h). During simultaneous movements of the Opening / Closing sunroof and blind, the blind automatically stops or resumes movement depending on ► To open the sunroof or the blind, use the part the position of the sunroof. of the button located towards the rear.
40 Ease of use and comfort
Driving position Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so that level with the top of your head. you are at a distance of at least 25 cm from the 3 Adopting a good driving position helps improve Adjust the length of the seat cushion to support dashboard. your comfort and protection. your thighs. Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is It also optimises interior and exterior visibility as Adjust the lumbar support so that it conforms to level with the top of your head. well as access to controls. the shape of your spine. Adjust the steering wheel so that you can hold it Before moving off Sitting comfortably with your arms slightly bent. Adjust the interior and exterior door mirrors to Whether or not your vehicle has certain seat The steering wheel should not hide the reduce blind spots. adjustments described in this section depends instrument panel. Fasten your seat belt: place the diagonal belt in on the trim level and country of sale. the middle of your shoulder and adjust the lap As a safety precaution, adjust the seats belt so that it is tightened across your pelvis. Driver’s side only when the vehicle is stationary.
Ensure that all passengers have fastened their seat belts correctly. If your vehicle has electric seats, the ignition must be on to adjust them. If your vehicle has electric door mirrors, the ignition must be on to adjust them. Passenger’s side When driving Maintain a good driving position and hold the steering wheel with both hands at the 'quarter to three' position, so that you can easily and quickly reach the controls behind and near the steering wheel. Follow these recommendations as much as your height and body shape permit... Never adjust the seats or steering wheel Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis, back when driving. and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest. Always keep your feet on the floor. Adjust the seat cushion height so that your eyes are level with the centre of the windscreen. Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis, back Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest. that you can fully depress the pedals with legs slightly flexed.
41 Ease of use and comfort
Removing a head restraint Height Electric lumbar adjustment
Front seats ► Pull the head restraint fully up. Before moving the seat backwards, ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint ensure that there is no person or object and remove it completely. that might prevent the full travel of the seat. ► Stow the head restraint securely. There is a risk of trapping or pinching passengers if present in the rear seats or of Refitting a head restraint
jamming the seat if large objects are placed ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides ► Pull the control upwards to raise the seat or The control allows independent adjustment of on the floor behind the seat. in the corresponding seat backrest. push it downwards to lower the seat, until the the depth and vertical position of the lumbar ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will position required is obtained. support. Front head restraints go. ► Press and hold the front or rear of the ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint Backrest angle control to increase or reduce the lumbar and push it down. support. Height adjustment ► Adjust the height of the head restraint. ► Press and hold the top or bottom of the Never drive with the head restraints control to raise or lower the lumbar support area. removed; they should be in place and adjusted for the occupant of the seat. ‘AGR’ certified seats In addition to the manual adjustments and the
► Turn the knob to adjust the backrest. previous electric lumbar adjustment, this seat Manually-adjustable seats features manual adjustment of the seat cushion length and electric adjustment of the seat Seats with electric lumbar Forwards-backwards cushion angle. ► Upwards: pull the head restraint up to the adjustment desired position; the head restraint can be felt to In addition to the previously mentioned Seat cushion length
click into position. manual adjustments, this seat features electric ► Downwards: press and hold button B and adjustment of the lumbar support. push the head restraint down to the desired position.
The adjustment is correct when the ► Raise the control bar and slide the seat upper edge of the head restraint is level
forwards or backwards. with the top of the head. ► Release the bar to lock the seat in position on one of the notches.
42 Ease of use and comfort
Electric lumbar adjustment ► Pull the handle forwards to release the Longitudinal cushion, then move the front part of the seat 3 cushion forwards or backwards.
Seat cushion angle
The control allows independent adjustment of ► Push the control forwards or backwards to the depth and vertical position of the lumbar slide the seat. support.
► Press and hold the front or rear of the Backrest angle control to increase or reduce the lumbar ► Press and hold the front or rear of the button support. to raise or lower the front of the seat cushion. ► Press and hold the top or bottom of the control to raise or lower the lumbar support area. Electrically adjustable ‘AGR’ certified seats
‘AGR’ certified seats For safety reasons, seat adjustments In addition to the manual adjustments and the ► Tilt the control forwards or backwards. previous electric lumbar adjustment, this seat must only be made when the vehicle is features manual adjustment of the seat cushion stationary. Cushion height and angle length and electric adjustment of the seat cushion angle. To avoid discharging the battery, carry out these adjustments with the engine Seat cushion length running.
This seat also features the manual seat cushion
length adjustment and electric lumbar support adjustment mentioned previously. ► Tilt the rear of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the required height. ► Tilt the front of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the required angle.
43 Ease of use and comfort
Comfort functions You can interrupt the current movement by Do not use the function when the seat pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the is not occupied. Memorising driving positions seat adjustment controls. Reduce the heating intensity as soon as A stored position cannot be recalled while possible. Associated with the electrically-adjusted driver’s driving. When the seat and passenger compartment seat, this function allows two driving positions Recalling stored positions is deactivated 45 have reached a satisfactory temperature, to be memorised, to make these adjustments seconds after switching off the ignition. switch the function off; reducing electricity easier if there are frequent driver changes. consumption in turn decreases fuel It takes account of the electric adjustments of the Heated seats consumption.
seat and the door mirrors.
Prolonged use of the heated seats is not
recommended for those with sensitive skin. There is a risk of burns for people whose perception of heat is impaired (illness, taking medication, etc.).
To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent a short circuit: Using buttons M / 1 / 2 The function is active only with the engine – do not place sharp or heavy objects on the ► Enter the vehicle and switch the ignition on. running. ► Adjust your seat and the door mirrors. seat, ► Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 On/Off – do not kneel or stand on the seat, – do not spill liquids onto the seat, within 4 seconds. ► Press the button corresponding to your seat. – never use the heating function if the seat An audible signal confirms the memorisation. ► Each press changes the heating level; the is wet. Memorising a new position cancels the previous corresponding number of indicator lamps come position. on. Recalling a stored position ► To stop heating, press the button again until Multipoint massage all the indicator lamps are off. System with a choice of type of massage and Ignition on or engine running The system status is memorised when the adjustment of its intensity. ► Press button 1 or 2 to recall the ignition is switched off. This system operates with the engine running, as corresponding position. well as in STOP mode of the Stop & Start. An audible signal sounds when the adjustment The massage settings are adjusted via the touch is finished. screen.
44 Ease of use and comfort
From the front seat: Steering wheel As a safety measure, the mirrors should ► Press this button; its green indicator be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots". 3 lamp comes on. adjustment The objects that you see in the mirrors are The settings page is displayed on the touch in fact closer than they appear. Take this screen with the last memorised settings. into account in order to correctly judge the If the settings suit you and you make no distance of vehicles approaching from behind. changes, the display returns to its previous state, and the function activates immediately. Demisting/Defrosting Seats must be adjusted one after another, starting with the driver's seat. If the vehicle is so equipped, demisting/ To modify the settings: defrosting of the heated door mirrors is ► When stationary, pull the control to release ► Begin with the driver’s seat. performed when the heated rear screen is the steering wheel. ► Select a massage intensity from the three switched on. ► Adjust the height and reach to suit your levels offered: "1" (Low), "2" (Normal) or "3" For more information on Rear screen driving position. (High). demisting/defrosting, refer to the ► Push the control lever to lock the steering ► Select another type of massage from the corresponding section. wheel. ones offered. Adjustment
► Wait for the driver's seat settings page to As a safety measure, these adjustments disappear. must only be carried out with the vehicle ► Next, proceed with the passenger's seat in stationary. the same way. The changes are applied immediately. Once activated, the system starts a one hour Mirrors massage cycle, made up of sequences of 6 minutes of massage followed by 3 minutes at rest. Door mirrors The system automatically stops at the end of the On versions fitted with ‘electrochrome’ mirrors, cycle; the indicator lamp for the button goes off. a system connected to a brightness sensor darkens the mirror to reduce the nuisance to the
driver caused by low sun or headlamp beams ► Move control A to the right or to the left to from other vehicles. select the corresponding mirror. ► Move control B in any of the four directions to adjust.
45 Ease of use and comfort
► Return control A to its central position. With the engine running, on engaging reverse This system automatically and progressively Removing a head restraint gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards. transitions between day and night modes, using ► First tilt the corresponding backrest. Electric folding They return to their initial position: a sensor that measures the light entering from ► Pull the head restraint fully up. If the vehicle is so equipped, the mirrors can – A few seconds after coming out of reverse the rear of the vehicle. ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint be folded electrically from the inside, with the gear. To ensure optimum visibility during your and remove it completely. vehicle parked and the ignition on: – Once the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph manoeuvres, the mirror lightens ► Store the head restraint. (10 km/h), ► Place control A in the centre automatically when reverse gear is engaged. Refitting a head restraint – When the engine is switched off. position. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides ► Pull control A back. screen menu. in the corresponding seat backrest. Rear seats ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will ► Lock the vehicle from the outside. Interior rear view mirror go. Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which Rear head restraints ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint
Electric unfolding darkens the mirror glass and reduces the and push it fully down. ► From outside: unlock the vehicle. nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, Never drive with passengers seated at ► From inside: with the ignition on, place headlamps of other vehicles, etc. the rear when the head restraints are control A in the central position and then pull it removed; the head restraints should be in rearwards. Automatic "electrochrome" model place and in the high position.
The automatic door mirror folding/ The head restraint for the centre seat unfolding function is configured via the and those for the outer seats are not Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. interchangeable.
Manual folding Folding the backrests
The mirrors can be folded manually (parking Each section of the backrest has two release High position (use): obstruction, narrow garage, etc.). ► Pull the head restraint fully up. controls: ► Turn the mirror towards the vehicle. – a grip on the outer edge of the backrest, Low position (stowing; when the seats are not 1 – a lever 2 on the boot side trim (SW). Automatic tilting in reverse gear in use): ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint Function which automatically tilts the mirrors Manoeuvring the seat backrests should and push it down. downwards to assist with parking manoeuvres in only be done when the vehicle is The rear head restraints can be removed. reverse gear. stationary.
46 Ease of use and comfort
Removing a head restraint First steps: ► Lower the head restraints, or remove them 3 ► First tilt the corresponding backrest. ► Pull the head restraint fully up. when carrying heavy loads. ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint ► Lift up the rear armrest. and remove it completely. ► If necessary, move the front seats forward. ► Store the head restraint. ► Check that no person or object will interfere with folding down the backrests (clothing, Refitting a head restraint luggage, etc.). ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides ► Check that the outer seat belts are lying flat in the corresponding seat backrest. on the backrests. ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will go. When the backrest is released, the red ► Guide the backrest 3 down to the horizontal indicator in the release grip is visible. ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint position. and push it fully down. From the boot (SW) Never drive with passengers seated at From the passenger compartment
the rear when the head restraints are removed; the head restraints should be in place and in the high position. The head restraint for the centre seat and those for the outer seats are not interchangeable.
Folding the backrests
Each section of the backrest has two release controls: ► Pull the backrest release paddle 2 towards
– a grip on the outer edge of the backrest, you. 1 ► Press backrest release handle 1. – a lever 2 on the boot side trim (SW). The backrest 3 folds fully onto the cushion. Manoeuvring the seat backrests should only be done when the vehicle is stationary.
47 Ease of use and comfort
Repositioning the backrests Heating and Ventilation 5. Air outlets to the front footwells 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells First check that the outer seat belts are Air intake 7. Adjustable air vents lying vertically flat alongside the backrest The air circulating in the passenger compartment latching rings. is filtered and originates either from the Advice exterior, via the grille located at the base of the windscreen, or from the inside in air recirculation Using the ventilation and air mode. conditioning system Controls ► To ensure that air is distributed evenly, keep the external air intake grilles at the base Depending on version, the controls are of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the accessible in the "Air conditioning" touch air outlets and the air extractor in the boot screen menu or are grouped together in the free from obstructions. control panel on the centre console. ► Do not cover the sunshine sensor located Air distribution on the dashboard; this sensor is used to regulate the automatic air conditioning system. ► Put the backrest in the upright position and 3 ► Operate the air conditioning system for at push it firmly to latch it home. least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to ► Check that the red indicator is no longer keep it in perfect working order. visible in the release grip . 1 ► If the system does not produce cold air, ► Ensure that the outer seat belts were not switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer trapped during the operation. or a qualified workshop. Please note: an incorrectly latched When towing the maximum load on a steep backrest compromises the safety of gradient in high temperatures, switching off passengers in the event of sudden braking or the air conditioning increases the available an accident. engine power, enhancing the towing capacity.
The contents of the boot may be thrown forward - risk of serious injury! 1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents Avoid driving for too long with the 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents ventilation off or with prolonged operation 3. Adjustable and closable side air vents of interior air recirculation. Risk of misting and 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents deterioration of the air quality!
48 Ease of use and comfort
If the interior temperature is very high Stop & Start after the vehicle has stood for a long The heating and air conditioning systems 3 time in the sunshine, air the passenger only operate when the engine is running. compartment for a few moments. Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start Put the air flow control at a setting high system to maintain a comfortable temperature enough to quickly change the air in the in the passenger compartment. passenger compartment. For more information on the Stop & Start, refer to the corresponding section.
Condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of ECO driving mode water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly Selection of this mode optimises fuel normal. consumption, but limits the performance of the heating and air conditioning, without Servicing the ventilation and air however deactivating them. conditioning system ► Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter Dual-zone automatic air elements replaced regularly. We recommend using a composite passenger conditioning compartment filter. Thanks to its special active This system automatically controls the activation additive, this type of filter helps to purify the of the air conditioning system, regulating the
air breathed by the occupants and keep the temperature, air flow and air distribution inside passenger compartment clean (by reducing the passenger compartment. 1. Temperature adjustment allergic symptoms, unpleasant odours and The air conditioning system operates with 2. Air flow adjustment greasy deposits). the engine running, but the ventilation and its 3. Air distribution adjustment ► To ensure correct operation of the controls can be accessed with the ignition on. 4. Air conditioning on/off air conditioning system, have it checked Press the Climate menu button to display 5. Automatic comfort programme on/off according to the recommendations in the the system controls page. 6. Maximum A/C
Maintenance and Warranty Guide. 7. Access to the secondary page 8. Mono-zone / Dual-zone 9. Selection of setting for the automatic comfort programme (Soft / Normal / Fast)
49 Ease of use and comfort
10. "AQS (Air Quality System)” function You can adjust the intensity of the "Air Quality System" (AQS) Air flow adjustment (depending on version) automatic Comfort programme by using the function ► Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to 11. Passenger compartment pre-conditioning "OPTIONS" button to select a profile: decrease or increase the speed of the air Using a pollution sensor, this function (depending on version) – "Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by booster fan. automatically activates recirculation of the 12. Automatic Visibility programme limiting air flow. The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in interior air once a certain level of polluting 13. Recirculation of interior air – "Normal": offers the best compromise progressively as the speed of the fan is substances in the exterior air is detected. 14. System switch-off between a comfortable temperature and quiet increased. When the air quality returns to a satisfactory operation (default setting). When the air flow is reduced to a minimum, level, recirculation of interior air is automatically – "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. ventilation stops. Temperature adjustment deactivated. To change the current profile (shown by the "OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. The driver and front passenger can each choose corresponding indicator lamp), press button 9 This function is not designed to detect their own temperature setting. repeatedly until the desired profile is displayed: unpleasant odours. Air distribution adjustment The value indicated corresponds to a level of Recirculation is automatically activated when the The "Normal" or "Fast" profiles are the most ► Press the buttons 3 to adjust the air flow comfort and not to a precise temperature. windscreen wash is used or when reverse gear comfortable for passengers in the rear seats. distribution inside the passenger compartment. ► Press one of the buttons to increase (red) is engaged. 1 This profile setting is associated with automatic Windscreen and side windows or decrease (blue) the value. mode only. However, on deactivation of the The function does not operate if the exterior It is recommended that you avoid a difference of temperature is below 5 °C, to avoid the risk of AUTO mode, the indicator lamp for the most Central and side air vents more than 3°C in the settings for left and right. recently selected profile remains on. misting of the windscreen and side windows. To activate or deactivate the function, go to the Changing the profile setting does not reactivate Footwells Automatic Comfort AUTO mode if it was deactivated. secondary page by using the "OPTIONS" button, then press button 10. programme In cold weather with the engine cold, the The lighting of the button indicates that air is This automatic mode ensures optimum air flow is increased gradually until the Manual control being blown in the specified direction. management of the passenger compartment comfort setting has been reached, in order to It is possible to activate all three buttons You can manually adjust one or more of these temperature, air flow and air distribution, based limit the delivery of cold air into the passenger simultaneously, for uniform distribution functions, while retaining automatic control of the on the selected comfort level. compartment. throughout the passenger compartment. other functions by the system: ► Press button 5 to activate or deactivate the On entering the vehicle, if the interior – air flow, air conditioning system’s automatic mode . temperature is much colder or warmer than Air conditioning on / off – air distribution. The indicator lamp in the button lights up the comfort setting requested, there is no The air conditioning is designed to operate As soon as you modify a setting, the indicator when the air conditioning system is operating need to alter the value displayed to more effectively in all seasons, with the windows lamp in the "AUTO" button goes off. automatically. quickly reach the required level of comfort. closed. ► Press button 5 again to reactivate the The system automatically corrects the It is used to: automatic comfort programme. temperature difference as quickly as possible. – lower the temperature in summer;
50 Ease of use and comfort
Air flow adjustment – increase the effectiveness of the demisting in It is available in the secondary page by pressing winter, above 3°C. the "OPTIONS” button. 3 ► Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to decrease or increase the speed of the air ► Press button 4 to activate / deactivate the air ► Press button 8 to activate the "MONO" booster fan. conditioning system. function; its status is displayed as "ON". The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in When the system is activated, the indicator lamp The function is automatically deactivated if the progressively as the speed of the fan is of the button comes on. passenger uses their temperature adjustment buttons (dual-zone function). increased. The air conditioning does not operate When the air flow is reduced to a minimum, when the air flow is deactivated. Ventilation with the ignition ventilation stops. To obtain cool air more quickly, use "OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. recirculation of the interior air for a few on moments. Then return to the intake of exterior When the ignition is switched on, you can use Air distribution adjustment air. the ventilation system to adjust the air flow 2 ► Press the buttons 3 to adjust the air flow Switching off the air conditioning may result in and air distribution 3 settings in the passenger distribution inside the passenger compartment. some discomfort (humidity, misting). compartment, for a period which depends on the Windscreen and side windows battery charge. This function does not allow the operation of the Central and side air vents Maximum air conditioning air conditioning system. This function automatically adjusts the Footwells temperature setting to the lowest possible, the Switching the system off air distribution towards the central and side air ► Press button 14. The lighting of the button indicates that air is vents, the air flow to maximum and activates Its indicator lamp comes on and all other being blown in the specified direction. interior air recirculation. indicator lamps for the system go off. It is possible to activate all three buttons ► Press button 6 to activate / deactivate the This action deactivates all functions of the air simultaneously, for uniform distribution function (the indicator lamp will come on/switch conditioning system. throughout the passenger compartment. off). The temperature is no longer regulated. A slight Once the function is deactivated, the system flow of air can still be felt, due to the forward Air conditioning on / off returns to the previous settings. movement of the vehicle. The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows Mono-zone / Dual-zone closed. The passenger temperature setting can be linked Interior air recirculation It is used to: to the driver's setting (mono-zone function). The intake of exterior air prevents the formation – lower the temperature in summer; of mist on the windscreen and side windows.
51 Ease of use and comfort
Recirculating the interior air isolates the With Stop & Start, when demisting has On/Off as reducing the consumption of electrical passenger compartment from outside odours been activated, STOP mode is not current reduces fuel consumption. and fumes and allows the desired passenger available. compartment temperature to be achieved more
rapidly. In wintry conditions, remove all snow or Additional heating/ ► Press this button to activate/deactivate ice on the windscreen near the camera the function (confirmed by the before moving off. ventilation system
illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). Otherwise, the operation of the equipment associated with the camera may be affected. The function is automatically activated
when the front screenwash is used or ► With the engine running, press this button to
reverse gear is engaged. activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an Heated windscreen indicator lamp). The function is activated when the exterior Front demisting temperature drops below 0°C. It is deactivated
- defrosting automatically when the engine is switched off. Heating Automatic Visibility Rear screen demisting/ This is an additional and separate system which defrosting heats the passenger compartment and improves programme defrosting performance. Demisting/defrosting only operates with the This mode allows the windscreen and side This indicator lamp is illuminated when windows to be demisted or defrosted as quickly engine running. In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of the system is programmed. as possible. Depending on version, this also applies to the the windscreen, as well as the area alongside This indicator lamp flashes while the heating is ► Press this button to activate/deactivate door mirrors. the left-hand windscreen pillar. in operation or when you carry out a remote start the mode (confirmed by the illumination/ ► Press this button to activate/deactivate Without changing the settings for the air via the remote control. extinction of the indicator lamp). the function (confirmed by the conditioning system, it allows faster release This indicator lamp goes off at the end of the The programme automatically manages the air illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). of the windscreen wiper blades when they are heating cycle or when the heating is stopped conditioning (depending on version), air flow Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically frozen to the windscreen and helps to prevent using the remote control. and air intake, and provides optimum distribution to prevent an excessive consumption of the accumulation of snow resulting from the towards the windscreen and side windows. electrical current. If the engine has not been started for operation of the windscreen wipers. more than 3 days, the remote control It is possible to manually change the air flow Switch off demisting/defrosting as soon starting of the system may not work. without deactivating the automatic Visibility as you no longer consider it necessary, programme.
52 Ease of use and comfort
as reducing the consumption of electrical Ventilation current reduces fuel consumption. 3 This system allows ventilation of the passenger compartment with exterior air to improve the temperature experienced on entering the vehicle Additional heating/ in summer. ventilation system
Programming You can programme the heating or ventilation to come on using the second page of the "Air
conditioning" menu of the touch screen.
In the Air conditioning > OPTIONS menu: Switching on ► Select AIR CON programming. ► Press and hold this button to start the heating immediately. ► Press the Status tab to activate/deactivate The indicator lamp in the remote control comes the system. on in green for about 2 seconds to confirm that Heating ► Press the Settings tab to select Heating the signal has been received by the vehicle. This is an additional and separate system which mode to heat the engine and passenger heats the passenger compartment and improves compartment or Ventilation mode to ventilate Switching off defrosting performance. the passenger compartment. ► Pressing and holding this button stops This indicator lamp is illuminated when ► Then programme/save the activation time for the heating immediately (confirmed by the the system is programmed. each selection. temporary illumination of the red indicator lamp). This indicator lamp flashes while the heating is ► Press OK to confirm. The indicator lamp in the remote control flashes in operation or when you carry out a remote start for about 2 seconds if the vehicle has not via the remote control. Long range remote control received the signal. This indicator lamp goes off at the end of the (Depending on version.) Then repeat the command after having changed heating cycle or when the heating is stopped This enables you to switch the heating in location. using the remote control. the passenger compartment on or off from a If the engine has not been started for distance. Changing the battery more than 3 days, the remote control The remote control has a range of about 0.6 The indicator lamp in the remote control will starting of the system may not work. miles (1 km) in open country. change to orange if the battery charge is low.
53 Ease of use and comfort
If the indicator lamp is not on, the battery is Thermal pre-conditioning You can define multiple programmings. discharged. Each one is saved in the system.
(Hybrid) To optimise battery life, we recommend The programmable heating is supplied by This function allows you to programme the programming with the vehicle plugged in. the vehicle fuel tank. Before use, make vehicle to adjust the passenger compartment This feature can be programmed using a sure that you have sufficient fuel. If the fuel temperature to a pre-defined, non-modifiable smartphone, via the tank is on reserve, you are strongly temperature (approx. 21°C) before you enter the MyPeugeot application. recommended not to program the heating. vehicle, on the days and times of your choice. With PEUGEOT Connect Radio, the The additional heating must always be programming can only be carried out using a
switched off while refuelling to avoid any risk Programming smartphone, via the application. of fire or explosion. (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav) ► Use a coin to unscrew the cap and replace For more information on Remotely operable In the Climate > OPTIONS menu: the battery. features, refer to the corresponding section. To avoid the risks of poisoning or Select Temperature conditioning. Do not throw remote control batteries asphyxia, the programmable heating away, as they contain metals that are Operating conditions must not be used, even for short periods, in a ► Press + to programme. harmful to the environment. Take them to an – The function is only activated when the closed environment such as a garage or ► Select the time of entry into the vehicle and approved disposal point. ignition is off and the vehicle locked. the desired days. Press OK. workshop which is not equipped with an – The function is not activated if the battery ► Press ON to activate this programming. exhaust gas extraction system. charge level is below 50%. The maximum heating period is about Pre-conditioning begins approximately 45 Do not park the vehicle on a flammable – If recurrent programming is activated (e.g. 45 minutes depending on the climatic minutes before the programmed time, and is surface (dry grass, dead leaves, paper, etc.) from Monday to Friday) and two pre-conditioning conditions. - Risk of fire! maintained for 10 minutes afterwards. sequences are performed without the vehicle being used, the programming will be deactivated. The ventilation is activated provided that Glazed surfaces such as the rear screen the battery is sufficiently charged. or windscreen can become very hot in The heating is activated provided that: places. – the battery charge and the fuel level are Never put objects on these surfaces; never sufficient, touch these surfaces - Risk of burns! – the engine has been started since the
previous heating cycle, – 60 minutes have elapsed between two This indicator lamp remains lit throughout the heating requests. pre-conditioning phase.
54 Ease of use and comfort
You can define multiple programmings. Front fittings Glove box
Each one is saved in the system. 3 ► To open the glove box, raise the handle. To optimise battery life, we recommend With the ignition on, the glove box is lit when programming with the vehicle plugged in. open. This feature can be programmed using a It contains an adjustable ventilation nozzle, smartphone, via the distributing the same conditioned air as the vents MyPeugeot application. in the passenger compartment. With PEUGEOT Connect Radio, the Never drive with the glove box open programming can only be carried out using a when a passenger is at the front. It may smartphone, via the application. cause injury during sharp deceleration! For more information on Remotely operable features, refer to the corresponding section. Cigarette lighter / 12 V Operating conditions accessory socket(s)
– The function is only activated when the ignition is off and the vehicle locked. 1. Sun visor – The function is not activated if the battery 2. Card holder 3. Illuminated glove box charge level is below 50%. – If recurrent programming is activated (e.g. 4. Door pockets from Monday to Friday) and two pre-conditioning 5. USB socket(s) / Front 12 V socket (120 W) sequences are performed without the vehicle Storage compartment or Wireless being used, the programming will be deactivated. smartphone charger
6. Cup holder 7. Front armrest with storage ► To use the cigarette lighter, press it in and 8. USB ports or Rear 12 V socket (120 W) wait a few seconds until it pops out automatically. ► To use a 12 V accessory (max. power: Sun visor 120 W), remove the cigarette lighter and connect ► With the ignition on, raise the concealing flap; a suitable adaptor. the mirror is illuminated automatically. You can use this socket to connect a telephone This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket charger, a bottle warmer, etc. holder. After use, put the cigarette lighter back into place straight away.
55 Ease of use and comfort
The connection of an electrical device For best results, use a cable made or approved ► Run the cable through the hole in the wall. – High fidelity woofer/mid-range speakers: not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a by the device manufacturer. ► Connect the cable to the USB socket Polyglass technology delivering balance and USB charger, may adversely affect the These applications can be managed using the intended for the exchange of data with the audio precise sound. operation of vehicle electrical systems, steering mounted controls or the audio system system. – TNF tweeters: Inverted dome aluminium causing faults such as poor radio reception or controls. technology giving optimum sound dispersion and ® interference with displays in the screens. FOCAL Premium Hi-Fi very detailed higher frequencies. When the USB port is used, the portable – 12-way active amplification - 515 Watts: device charges automatically. system
Hybrid Class AB/Class D technology providing A message is displayed if the power drawn USB socket breadth and finesse in the high frequency by the portable device exceeds the current signals, as well as real power in the bass. supplied by the vehicle. – Subwoofer: 200 mm triple coil Power FlowerTM For more information on how to use this
technology for defined and dynamic reproduction
equipment, refer to the Audio equipment of lower frequencies. and telematics section . Wireless smartphone Centre console storage compartment charger with automatic gearbox
Depending on the type of gearbox, the centre
console is fitted with one or two USB sockets.
You can connect a portable device or a USB Your vehicle is equipped with a high-fidelity memory stick. acoustic system designed by the French brand It plays the audio files which are sent to your FOCAL®, a specialist in acoustics for more than audio system and played via the vehicle's 35 years and recognised throughout the world speakers. for its patented innovations and its unique audio These files can be managed using the steering signature. mounted controls or those on the touch screen. 10 speakers incorporating exclusive FOCAL® It allows wireless charging of a portable device The USB port on the technologies offer the pleasure of pure and such as a smartphone, using the magnetic induction principle, in accordance with the Qi 1.1 left-hand side also allows a detailed sound inside the vehicle: TM standard. smartphone to be connected by MirrorLink , ► Press in the middle of the cover to access the – Central speaker/Satellite speakers: Polyglass ® ® The portable device to be charged must be Android Auto or CarPlay , enabling certain storage compartment. technology delivering sound immersion and compatible with the Qi standard, either by design smartphone applications to be used on the touch ► Put the device to be connected with its USB spatialisation. or by using a compatible holder or shell. screen. cable in the provided space. The charging area is identified by the Qi symbol.
56 Ease of use and comfort
– High fidelity woofer/mid-range speakers: The charger works with the engine running and Operating check Polyglass technology delivering balance and with the Stop & Start system in STOP mode. The state of the indicator lamp allows the 3 precise sound. Charging is managed by the smartphone. operation of the charger to be monitored. – TNF tweeters: Inverted dome aluminium With Keyless Entry and Starting, the charger’s technology giving optimum sound dispersion and operation may be briefly disrupted when a door State of the Meaning very detailed higher frequencies. is opened or the ignition is switched off. indicator lamp – 12-way active amplification - 515 Watts: Off Engine switched off. Hybrid Class AB/Class D technology providing Charging No compatible devices breadth and finesse in the high frequency ► With the charging area clear, place a device detected. signals, as well as real power in the bass. in its centre. Charging finished. – Subwoofer: 200 mm triple coil Power FlowerTM Fixed green Compatible device technology for defined and dynamic reproduction
detected. of lower frequencies. When the portable device is detected, the Charging. Wireless smartphone charger’s indicator lamp lights up green. It Flashing orange Foreign object detected in remains lit for the whole time that the battery is the charging zone. charger being charged. Device not well centred in The system is not designed to charge the charging zone. multiple devices simultaneously. Fixed orange Fault with the device's
battery meter. Device battery temperature too high.
Charger malfunction.
Do not leave any metal objects (coins,
keys, vehicle remote control, etc.) in the It allows wireless charging of a portable device charging area while a device is being such as a smartphone, using the magnetic If the indicator lamp is lit orange: charged, due to the risk of overheating or induction principle, in accordance with the Qi 1.1 – remove the device, then place it back in the interrupting the charging process. standard. centre of the charging zone. The portable device to be charged must be or compatible with the Qi standard, either by design – remove the device and try again in a quarter or by using a compatible holder or shell. of an hour. The charging area is identified by the Qi symbol.
57 Ease of use and comfort
If the problem persists, have the system checked Mats hinder the operation of the cruise control/ Front touch-sensitive by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. speed limiter. courtesy lamp Fitting The approved mats have two fasteners Front armrest located underneath the seat. It comes on gradually: It includes a storage space. – when the vehicle is unlocked. – when the ignition is switched off. Opening – when a door is opened.
Courtesy lamps – when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate the vehicle. It switches off: – when the vehicle is locked. – when the ignition is switched on. – 30 seconds after the last door is closed. The front and rear touch-sensitive reading lamps
come on and go off at the same time as the When fitting the mat for the first time, on the courtesy lamp.
driver's side use only the fasteners supplied in ► Press the lever beneath the cover. A long press on the courtesy lamp completely the enclosed sachet. The cover opens in two parts. deactivates it from coming on (confirmed by the The other mats are simply laid over the carpet. "OFF" symbol). Closing 1. Front touch-sensitive courtesy lamp Removing/refitting 2. Front touch-sensitive reading lamps Touch-sensitive reading ► To remove it on the driver's side, move the lamps seat backwards and unclip the fasteners. ► With the ignition on, press the corresponding ► To refit it, position the mat and secure it by reading lamp. pressing. ► Check that the mat is secured correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: Interior ambient lighting – Only use mats which are suitable for The dimmed passenger compartment lighting the fasteners already present in the vehicle; improves visibility in the vehicle when the light these fasteners must be used. is poor.
– Never fit one mat on top of another. At night, the ambient lighting comes on/goes off ► Replace the two parts of the cover. 3. Rear touch-sensitive reading lamps The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT automatically when the sidelamps are switched may interfere with access to the pedals and on/off.
58 Ease of use and comfort
Front touch-sensitive Activation / deactivation and adjustment USB sockets of the light intensity are set via the 3 courtesy lamp Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. It comes on gradually: – when the vehicle is unlocked. – when the ignition is switched off. Rear fittings – when a door is opened. – when the remote control locking button is 12 V accessory socket activated, in order to locate the vehicle. It switches off: – when the vehicle is locked. – when the ignition is switched on. Each USB socket is used only to power or – 30 seconds after the last door is closed. recharge the connected portable device. The front and rear touch-sensitive reading lamps come on and go off at the same time as the Rear armrest
courtesy lamp. A long press on the courtesy lamp completely
deactivates it from coming on (confirmed by the ► To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum "OFF" symbol). power: 120 W), lift the cover and plug in a Touch-sensitive reading suitable adaptor. The connection of an electrical device lamps not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a ► With the ignition on, press the corresponding USB charger, may adversely affect the reading lamp. operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor radio reception or Interior ambient lighting interference with displays in the screens. The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor. The armrest incorporates two cup holders. At night, the ambient lighting comes on/goes off automatically when the sidelamps are switched on/off.
59 Ease of use and comfort
Ski flap Boot fittings For information on installing the High
, refer to the Mechanism for storing and transporting long load retaining net (SW) corresponding section. objects. Opening ► Lower the rear armrest. Load space cover ► Pull the flap handle downwards. (Hatchback)
Hatchback 1. Load space cover SW 2. 12 V (120 W) socket 1. Load space cover 3. Boot lamp 2. Rear seat folding controls 4. Bag hook 3. Bag hooks 5. Storage net or Hi-Fi amplifier 4. 12 V (120 W) socket
6. Stowing rings 5. Boot lamps It consists of two parts: 7. Storage well / Tool box under the floor 6. Retaining straps
– a removable part A, fixed to the rear pillars of 7. Storage net or Hi-Fi amplifier the passenger compartment, ► Lower the flap. 8. Stowing rings – a removable part B, fixed to the frame of the ► Load the objects from inside the boot. 9. Storage well / Tool box under the floor rear screen.
The stowing rings are designed to secure luggage using different types of retaining nets. These retaining nets are available as an option or as an accessory. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
60 Ease of use and comfort
For information on installing the High When sharp deceleration occurs, objects load retaining net (SW), refer to the placed on the load space cover can turn 3 corresponding section. into projectiles.
Load space cover Load space cover (SW) (Hatchback) Access
To remove part A: ► Note the direction of fitting. ► Unclip the rear mounting 1 on each side. ► Unclip the front mounting 2 on each side. This shelf can only be fitted in one direction.
To refit it, proceed in the reverse order.
► Push the handle down, the load space cover automatically rises along the boot pillars. To reel in
It consists of two parts: – a removable part A, fixed to the rear pillars of the passenger compartment, – a removable part B, fixed to the frame of the rear screen.
To remove part B: ► Pull the handle towards you, the load space ► Unclip the two side mountings 3. cover will automatically roll up. ► Pull the load space cover forwards to extract The moving part A can be folded against the the two rear mountings 4 from the frame. backrests of the rear seats. To refit it, proceed in the reverse order.
61 Ease of use and comfort
Removal ► Position the left-hand end of the load space – behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear ► Check that the net is hooked and tightened
cover roller in its location 1 behind the rear left seats are folded, correctly. seat. – behind the rear seats (row 2) when the load Never reposition the rear seats while the ► Compress the roller control B and put the space cover is removed. net's roller is attached to the folded roller in place in its location 2 on the right. It protects the occupants in case of backrests. ► Release the control to secure the load space sudden braking. cover. ► Unroll it until it clips on the boot pillars. Row 2 Row 1
In the event of sudden deceleration, objects placed on the load space cover can turn into projectiles.
High load retaining net (SW) ► Compress the control B and lift the load space cover on the right then on the left to remove it. Installation
► Roll up then remove the load space cover. ► Fold down the rear seats. ► Fold down the rear seats. ► Remove the rear head restraints. ► Position the left-hand end of the net roller in ► Position the net's roller above the two rails side support 3 by reaching from the left-hand (located on the back of the folded rear seats). side of the passenger compartment. ► Slide the two rails B in the grooves A and ► Position the right-hand end of the net roller in push the roller from left to right to secure it. side support 4 by reaching from the right-hand
► Unroll the net without stretching it. side of the passenger compartment. Hooked onto the special upper and lower fixings, ► Position one of the ends of the net's metal ► Press each side to lock in the roller; the red this removable net allows the use of the entire bar in the corresponding upper fixing 1. indicators must not be visible.
loading volume up to the roof: ► Compress the net's metal bar, then pull it to ► Unroll the net from the boot. position the other end in the other upper fixing 1.
62 Ease of use and comfort
► Check that the net is hooked and tightened ► Position one of the ends of the net's metal Stowing rings correctly. bar in the corresponding upper fixing 2. 3 ► Compress the net's metal bar, then pull it to Never reposition the rear seats while the position the other end in the other upper fixing 2. net's roller is attached to the folded ► Check that the net is hooked and tightened backrests. correctly. ► Lift up and lock the rear seats. Row 2 12 V accessory socket ► To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum power: 120 W), lift the cover and plug in a suitable adaptor. ► Switch on the ignition. Hatchback The connection of an electrical device not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a USB charger, may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor radio reception or interference with displays in the screens.
► Roll up then remove the load space cover. ► Fold down the rear seats. ► Position the left-hand end of the net roller in side support 3 by reaching from the left-hand side of the passenger compartment. SW ► Position the right-hand end of the net roller in The boot has four stowing rings to secure side support 4 by reaching from the right-hand luggage using different types of retaining nets. side of the passenger compartment. For the SW, two of the rings are fixed and the ► Press each side to lock in the roller; the red other two are movable in tracks. indicators must not be visible. For more information on the various nets, ► Unroll the net from the boot. contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
63 Ease of use and comfort
Storage well Boot lamp It comes on automatically when the boot is opened and goes off automatically when the boot is closed. The lighting time varies according to the circumstances: – when the ignition is off, approximately 10
minutes. To move one of the movable rings: – in energy economy mode, approximately 30 ► While pressing the button, slide the ring in seconds. its track. – with the engine running, unlimited. ► Once in the desired position, release the
button to lock it. Hatchback To remove or refit one of the movable rings: ► Bring it to an oblong slot on the track. ► To observe the direction of installation, make sure the ring is positioned vertically and towards the outside of the vehicle.
Do not confuse the stowing rings with the bag hooks or the Top Tether fixings.
SW ► Fully raise the boot floor to access the storage well. Depending on version, it includes: – A temporary puncture repair kit with the tool kit. – A spare wheel with the tool kit. – The battery charging cable (Hybrid).
64 Lighting and visibility
Headlamp dipping Exterior lighting control 4 stalk
Main lighting ► Rotate the ring forwards to switch them on and backwards to switch them off. When the lamps are switched off automatically
("AUTO" position), the foglamps and the dipped
beam headlamps will remain on. ► Pull the stalk to switch between dipped and main beam headlamps. Switching on the foglamps is prohibited in clear weather or in rain, both day and In “AUTO” and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily night. In these situations, the power of their
(“headlamp flash”) by pulling the stalk. beams may dazzle other drivers. They must Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may running lamps Displays vary depending on country). Sidelamps only Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when they are no longer necessary. Dipped or main beam headlamps in the instrument panel confirms that the lighting selected is on. A fault with a lamp is signalled by the Switching off of the lamps when the "Highway function" permanent illumination of this warning ignition is switched off With "Full LED" technology headlamps, lamp, accompanied by the display of a message When the ignition is switched off, all of the the range of the dipped beam headlamps is and an audible signal. lamps turn off immediately, except for dipped automatically increased once the speed of the beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home vehicle is above 68 mph (110 km/h). Rear foglamps lighting is activated. They only work if the dipped or main "Peugeot Adaptive LED technology" beam headlamps are on. Switching on the lamps after With the Full LED 3D rear lamps, switching off the ignition brightness is adjusted automatically for To reactivate the lighting control, rotate the optimum visibility at all times, both at day and ring to the "AUTO" position, then to the night. desired position.
65 Lighting and visibility
If the driver's door is opened, a temporary Daytime running lamps / Three flashes Headlamp beam height audible signal warns the driver that the lamps ► Press briefly upwards or downwards, without are on. Sidelamps adjustment going beyond the point of resistance; the They will go off automatically after a period of These LED lamps at the front and rear of the direction indicators will flash 3 times. time that depends on the state of charge of vehicle light up automatically when the engine Manual adjustment of the the battery (entering energy economy mode). starts. They perform the following functions: Parking lamps halogen headlamps
– Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk Vehicle side marking by lighting the sidelamps In some weather conditions (e.g. low at position " with adequate ambient light). on the traffic side only. temperature or humidity), misting on the "AUTO – Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position ► Depending on version, within one minute internal surface of the glass of the headlamps " " with low ambient light or "Sidelamps of switching off the ignition, move the lighting and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear AUTO only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). control stalk up or down, depending which side after the lamps have been on for a few the traffic is on (for example, when parking on minutes. the left, moving the lighting control stalk upwards Direction indicators turns on the right-hand sidelamps).
Never look too closely at the luminous This is confirmed by an audible signal and the beam of Full LED headlamps: risk of lighting of the corresponding direction indicator To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, serious eye injury! lamp on the instrument panel. the height of these headlamp beams should be ► To switch off the parking lamps, return the adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. 0 (Initial setting) Travelling abroad lighting control stalk to the central position. Driver only or driver + front passenger Vehicles equipped with halogen 1 5 people headlamps: 2 5 people + load in the boot If planning to use your vehicle in a country 3 Driver only + load in the boot that drives on the other side of the road, the
4 5 6 Not used headlamp dipped beams must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming drivers. Contact a ► Left or right: lower or raise the lighting control PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. stalk, beyond the point of resistance. Automatic adjustment of If you forget to cancel the direction the Full LED technology indicators for more than 20 seconds, the volume of the audible signal will increase if headlamps the speed is above 50 mph (80 km/h). This system automatically adjusts the height of the headlamp beams according to the load in the vehicle.
66 Lighting and visibility
Headlamp beam height In the event of a malfunction, this warning the instrument panel, accompanied by an lamp comes on on the instrument panel, audible signal and/or the display of a message. 4 adjustment accompanied by the display of a message and Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified an audible signal. workshop. The system then places the headlamp beams in Manual adjustment of the Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor the lowest position. halogen headlamps located at the top centre of the
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT windscreen behind the interior rear view dealer or a qualified workshop. mirror; the associated functions would no Do not touch the "Full LED" technology longer be controlled.
headlamps - risk of electrocution! In fog or snow, the rain/sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case, Automatic illumination of the lighting will not come on automatically.
headlamps To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, When the ring is at the "AUTO" position and the height of these headlamp beams should be Guide-me-home and a low level of ambient light is detected by adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. the rain/sunshine sensor, the number plate welcome lighting 0 (Initial setting) lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps Driver only or driver + front passenger are switched on automatically, without any action 1 5 people Guide-me-home lighting on the part of the driver. They can also come on 2 5 people + load in the boot Automatic if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic 3 Driver only + load in the boot operation of the windscreen wipers. With the ring in the "AUTO" position, when the 4 5 6 Not used As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient light is poor, the dipped beam headlamps come level or after the windscreen wipers are switched on automatically when the ignition is switched Automatic adjustment of off, the lamps are switched off automatically. off. the Full LED technology You can activate/deactivate this function Malfunction and adjust the guide-me-home lighting headlamps In the event of a malfunction of the rain/ duration in the Driving / Vehicle touch screen This system automatically adjusts the height of sunshine sensor, the vehicle’s lighting menu. the headlamp beams according to the load in the comes on and this warning lamp is displayed in vehicle.
67 Lighting and visibility
Manual – when the vehicle is unlocked. traffic, and for observation of driving and This indicator lamp goes out when the
– when a door is opened. vehicle regulations. function is deactivated. – when a request to locate the vehicle is received from the remote control. The system becomes operational when Pause They also come on with the welcome lighting the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h). If the situation requires a change of headlamp and guide-me-home lighting functions. When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h), beam, the driver can take over at any time. They go off automatically after 30 seconds. the function is no longer operational. ► A "headlamp flash" pauses the function: • if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator Automatic headlamp lamps were on, the system changes to main Activation/Deactivation beam,
It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch ► With the ignition off, pull the lighting control dipping • if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator screen menu. stalk toward you ("headlamp flash") to activate/ When the ring is in the "AUTO” position, this lamps were on, the system changes to The state of the system stays in the memory deactivate the function. system automatically switches between dipped dipped beam. when switching off the ignition. Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off and main beam headlamps according to the To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps again. automatically after a period of time. lighting and traffic conditions, using a camera Operation located at the top of the windscreen. The system may suffer interference or If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the Welcome lighting not work correctly: traffic conditions do not allow the main beam When the vehicle is unlocked in low light – under conditions of poor visibility (snow, headlamps to be lit: conditions and the "Automatic illumination of heavy rain, etc.), – The dipped beam headlamps headlamps" function is activated, this system – if the windscreen in front of the camera is remain lit. These indicator lamps automatically switches on: dirty, misted or obscured (for example, by a come on on the instrument panel. – On the outside, sidelamps, dipped beam sticker, etc.), If the ambient light level is very low and traffic headlamps and door mirror spotlamps. – if the vehicle is facing highly reflective conditions permit: – Inside, courtesy lamps and footwell lighting. signs. – The main beam headlamps Activation / deactivation and adjustment When the system detects thick fog, it come on automatically. These of the duration of the welcome lighting are temporarily deactivates the function. indicator lamps come on on the instrument
set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. The system is not able to detect: panel. – road users that do not have their own This system is a driving aid. The function is deactivated if the fog lamps are Door mirror spotlamps lighting, such as pedestrians, The driver remains responsible for switched on or the system detects dense fog. These spotlamps facilitate access to the vehicle – vehicles whose lighting is obscured (for the vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the When the fog lamps are switched off or the by lighting the ground near the front doors. example: vehicles running behind a safety prevailing conditions of light, visibility and vehicle leaves the area of dense fog, the function The spotlamps come on automatically: barrier on a motorway), is automatically reactivated.
68 Lighting and visibility
This indicator lamp goes out when the – vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep The speed of the vehicle must be less than 56 function is deactivated. slope, on winding roads, on crossroads. mph (90 km/h). 4 This function is only available with the "Full LED" Pause Clean the windscreen regularly, technology headlamps. If the situation requires a change of headlamp particularly the area in front of the beam, the driver can take over at any time. camera. Activation / Deactivation ► A "headlamp flash" pauses the function: The internal surface of the windscreen can It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch • if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator also become misted around the camera. screen menu. lamps were on, the system changes to main In humid and cold weather, demist the beam, windscreen regularly. Switching on / off • if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator Do not allow snow to accumulate on the This system operates from a certain angle of lamps were on, the system changes to bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could rotation of the steering wheel. dipped beam. obstruct the detection camera. The system does not operate: To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps – below a certain angle of rotation of the again. steering wheel. – above 56 mph (90 km/h), The system may suffer interference or Static cornering lighting
– when reverse gear is engaged. not work correctly: – under conditions of poor visibility (snow, heavy rain, etc.), Night Vision – if the windscreen in front of the camera is In conditions of low exterior light, the system dirty, misted or obscured (for example, by a uses an infrared camera at the front of the sticker, etc.), vehicle to identy and signal the presence of – if the vehicle is facing highly reflective pedestrians and animals in the driver’s field of signs. vision. When the system detects thick fog, it To benefit from the permanent display of the temporarily deactivates the function. infrared camera image in the instrument panel, The system is not able to detect: select the "Night Vision" display mode by turning – road users that do not have their own With the dipped or main beam headlamps on, the knob on the left-hand side of the steering lighting, such as pedestrians, this function allows headlamps to illuminate wheel. When the conditions are met, an alert is – vehicles whose lighting is obscured (for the inside of a bend using light-emitting diodes triggered if there is a risk of collision. example: vehicles running behind a safety (LEDs). barrier on a motorway),
69 Lighting and visibility
The permanent display disappears upon Vision" mode selected) and the triggering of The image provided by the camera is displayed – after an impact which may have impaired the switching off the ignition or if the conditions are alerts are available. in shades of grey in the instrument panel; warm camera settings or damaged it, not met. If certain operating conditions (speed or objects appear brighter than cold objects. – after repainting of the grille outside of the temperature) are not met, the When pedestrians or animals are detected, they PEUGEOT network or a qualified workshop. Night Vision is a driving aid system that indicator lamp comes on in orange: only the appear in yellow frames. cannot, under any circumstances, display in the instrument panel is available (in When the system detects a risk of Maintenance replace the personal assessment of "Night Vision" mode). collision with pedestrians or night-time visibility and traffic conditions. recommendations Whilst the exterior light is too bright or the dipped animals, it triggers an alert: one of these symbols In some conditions, the contrasts in The infrared camera has a wash nozzle beam headlamps have not been switched on, is displayed in the instrument panel. The temperature are insufficient and the system connected to the vehicle’s front screenwash the alerts are not available. corresponding silhouette is framed in red.
may not detect all dangers or, conversely, system. If the "Night Vision" display mode has not been it may give false warnings (e.g. engines of This nozzle operates every 5th use of the selected, the alert is triggered in the form of a lorries parked on the edge of the road). screenwash. temporary window. Regularly check that the camera is clean. In the event of an alert, the driver may act by In bad weather, or in wintry conditions, ensure making an avoiding manoeuvre or by braking. Conditions for operation that the camera is not covered with mud, ice or – With the engine running and in Stop mode Activation/Deactivation snow. of Stop & Start. This function is set via the Driving / – Very low light conditions with dipped beam Vehicle touch screen menu. Malfunction headlamps on and in good working order. An orange warning lamp coming on whilst – Temperature between -30°C and +28°C. Operating limits all the operating conditions have been
– Speed below 99 mph (160 km/h).
The following situations may interfere with the met, accompanied by a message, indicates a – Detection of animals taller than 0.50 m. operation of the system or prevent it working: system malfunction. – poor visibility (falling snow, heavy rain, thick Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Operation fog), workshop. If the function is selected but the display – camera masked by snow, mud or dust, on the instrument panel and the alerts are – camera scratched after going through roller not available (in "Night Vision" mode), the car washes repeatedly, Wiper control stalk indicator lamp comes on in grey. – very high outside temperatures, In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or
If all operating conditions are met, the – at the top or bottom of a steep slope, frost present on the windscreen, around indicator lamp comes on in green: the The camera detection range is between 15 m – on a very winding road, the wiper arms and blades and on the display in the instrument panel (with "Night (for pedestrians) and 200 m, depending on – in a bend, windscreen seal, before operating the wipers. visibility conditions.
70 Lighting and visibility
– after an impact which may have impaired the Do not operate the wipers on a dry In position 1 or 2, the wiping frequency is camera settings or damaged it, windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold automatically reduced when the speed of 4 – after repainting of the grille outside of the conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are the vehicle drops below 3 mph (5 km/h). PEUGEOT network or a qualified workshop. not stuck to the windscreen before operating When the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h) the wipers. again, the wiping frequency returns to the Maintenance original frequency (fast or normal). recommendations Windscreen wipers The infrared camera has a wash nozzle After switching off the ignition, a slight connected to the vehicle’s front screenwash movement of the windscreen wipers to system. store them under the bonnet may occur.
This nozzle operates every 5th use of the screenwash. If the ignition has been switched off with Regularly check that the camera is clean. the windscreen wiper active, it is In bad weather, or in wintry conditions, ensure necessary to operate the control stalk to that the camera is not covered with mud, ice or reactivate the wiping when the ignition is snow. switched on (unless the ignition is off for less
than 1 minute). ► To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the Malfunction stalk to the desired position. An orange warning lamp coming on whilst Fast wiping (heavy rain) Single wipe all the operating conditions have been ► Pull the stalk briefly towards you. met, accompanied by a message, indicates a Normal wiping (moderate rain) system malfunction. Front screenwash Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Intermittent wiping (proportional to the ► Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and workshop. vehicle’s speed) hold. Off The screenwash and windscreen wipers operate Wiper control stalk for as long as the control stalk is pulled. Automatic wiping (proportional to the A final wiping cycle is performed when rainfall). In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or screenwashing ends. frost present on the windscreen, around Refer to the corresponding section. the wiper arms and blades and on the windscreen seal, before operating the wipers.
71 Lighting and visibility
The front screenwash jets are integrated Off useful, in winter (ice, snow), to release the wiper Changing a wiper blade in the tips of each arm. blades from the windscreen. Additional jets are installed below the Intermittent wipe To maintain the effectiveness of the flat Removing/refitting at the front midpoint of each arm. wiper blades, it is advisable to: The screenwash fluid is sprayed along the Wash-wipe – handle them with care. length of the wiper blade. This improves – clean them regularly using soapy water. visibility and decreases screenwash fluid – avoid using them to hold cardboard on the consumption. Reverse gear windscreen. When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper – replace them at the first signs of wear. With automatic air conditioning, any will come into operation automatically if the front windscreen wipers are operating. action on the screenwash control results Before removing a windscreen wiper blade This function is set via the in temporary closure of the air intake to avoid Driving / odours inside the passenger compartment. Vehicle touch screen menu.
In the event of accumulation of snow or To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do hard frost or if a bicycle carrier is fitted to ► Carry out these wiper blade replacement not operate the screenwash if the a towing system, deactivate the automatic operations from the driver's side. screenwash reservoir is empty. rear wiper via the touch screen’s Driving/ ► Starting with the wiper blade farthest from Only operate the screenwash if there is no Vehicle menu. you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen it as far as possible. and hindering visibility. During the winter period, use "very cold climate" rated products. Rear screenwash Take care not to hold the arms at the jet Never top up with water. ► Turn the ring all the way towards the ► Operating the wiper control stalk within one locations. dashboard and hold. minute after switching off the ignition will place Do not touch the wiper blades - risk of The screenwash and the wiper operate for as the wiper blades in a vertical position. irreversible distortion. Rear wiper (SW) long as the ring remains turned. ► Proceed with the desired operation or replace Do not release them while they are moving -
A final wiping cycle is performed when the wiper blades. risk of damaging the windscreen! screenwashing ends. After refitting a windscreen wiper blade ► Clean the windscreen using screenwash ► To return the wiper blades to their initial fluid. Special position of the position, switch on the ignition and operate the Do not apply "Rain X" type water- windscreen wipers wiper control stalk. repellent products. ► Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with This maintenance position is used while cleaning the marking. or replacing the wiper blades. It can also be
72 Lighting and visibility
Changing a wiper blade ► Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor. and remove it. When using an automatic car wash, 4 Removing/refitting at the front ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the switch off the automatic wipers and the
arm. ignition. ► Repeat the procedure for the other wiper In winter, wait until the windscreen is blade. completely clear of ice before activating the ► Starting with the wiper blade closest to you, automatic wipers. once again hold each arm by the rigid section and lower it carefully to the windscreen. Switching on Removing/refitting at the rear ► Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it as far as possible. ► Clean the rear screen using screenwash fluid. ► Carry out these wiper blade replacement ► Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it. operations from the driver's side. ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
► Starting with the wiper blade farthest from arm. ► Give a short downwards push to the control you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise ► Once again hold the arm by the rigid section, stalk. it as far as possible. then guide it carefully onto the rear screen. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has Take care not to hold the arms at the jet been accepted. locations. Automatic windscreen This indicator lamp comes on in the Do not touch the wiper blades - risk of instrument panel, accompanied by a irreversible distortion. wipers message. Do not release them while they are moving - In AUTO mode, the windscreen wipers operate risk of damaging the windscreen! automatically, without any action on the part of Switching off the driver. If rain is detected, the wiping adapts to ► Give the control stalk another brief push ► Clean the windscreen using screenwash the intensity of the rainfall automatically. downwards or place the control stalk in another fluid. Detection of rainfall is by means of a rain/ position (Int, 1 or 2). Do not apply "Rain X" type water- sunshine sensor at the top centre of the This indicator lamp goes off in the repellent products. windscreen, behind the rear view mirror. instrument panel, accompanied by a message.
73 Lighting and visibility
If the ignition has been off for more than one minute, the automatic wipers must be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards.
Malfunction If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
74 Safety
General safety PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops, Hazard warning lamps
equipped with the special tools required (risk 5 recommendations of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic systems that could cause breakdowns or Do not remove the labels attached in serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot different places on your vehicle. They be held responsible if this advice is not include safety warnings as well as followed. identification information for the vehicle. – Any modification or adaptation not intended
or authorised by PEUGEOT or carried out For all work on your vehicle, use a without meeting the technical requirements ► Pressing the red button causes all the qualified workshop that has the technical defined by the Manufacturer will result in the direction indicators to flash. information, skills and equipment required, all suspension of the commercial warranty. They can operate with the ignition off. of which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. Installation of accessory radio Automatic operation of communication transmitters hazard warning lamps Depending on country regulations, Before installing a radio communication When braking in an emergency, depending on certain safety equipment may be transmitter with an external aerial, you must the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning mandatory: high visibility safety vests, without fail contact a PEUGEOT dealer for lamps come on automatically. They switch off warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, the specification of transmitters which can automatically when you next accelerate. spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial They can be turned off by pressing the button flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. position, specific installation requirements), again. in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic Installing electrical accessories: Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC). – The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories not approved by PEUGEOT may Declarations of conformity for radio cause excessive current consumption and equipment faults and failures with the electrical system The relevant certificates are available on the of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/ for information on the range of approved website. accessories. – As a safety measure, access to the diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's electronic systems, is reserved strictly for
75 Safety
Horn Emergency or assistance If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, an emergency call is made call automatically, independently of the deployment of any airbags.
‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ is a service that
can be accessed free of charge.
System operation – Upon switching on the ignition, if the indicator
lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes
out: the system is operating correctly. ► Press the central part of the steering wheel. Peugeot Connect SOS – If the indicator lamp is fixed red: system (PE112) malfunction – If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the ► In an emergency, press button 1 for more Pedestrian horn (Hybrid) emergency battery. than 2 seconds. This system alerts pedestrians that the vehicle is In the latter two cases, emergency and The lighting of the indicator lamp and a voice approaching, when driving in ELECTRIC mode assistance call services may not work. message confirm that the call has been made to (100% electric driving). Contact a dealer or a qualified repairer as soon the emergency services*. The pedestrian horn operates once the vehicle as possible. ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ immediately locates is moving and at speeds of up to 19 mph your vehicle and puts you in contact with the The system fault does not prevent the (30 km/h), in forward or reverse gear. appropriate emergency services**. vehicle from being driven. Malfunction ► Pressing again immediately cancels the In the event of a malfunction, this warning request. Data processing lamp comes on on the instrument panel. The indicator lamp flashes when the vehicle All processing of personal information by Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified data is sent, and then remains lit when the "Peugeot Connect SOS" system (PE112) workshop to have the system checked. communication is established. complies with the framework for protection
* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. ** In areas covered by ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ and ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
76 Safety
of personal information established by a call is made. The system is not traceable Peugeot Connect Regulation 2016/679 (GDPR) and Directive and is not continuously monitored in its 5 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament normal operating mode. Assistance and the Council, and in particular, seeks to The data in the system's internal memory is ► If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2 protect the vital interests of the data subject, automatically and continuously erased. Only for more than 2 seconds to request assistance in accordance with Article 6.1, paragraph d) of the vehicle’s three most recent locations are (confirmed by a voice message*). Regulation 2016/679. stored. ► Pressing again immediately cancels the Personal information processing is strictly When an emergency call is triggered, the data request. limited to the management of the "Peugeot log is stored for no more than 13 hours. Privacy mode allows you to manage the Connect SOS" system used with the “112” level of sharing (data and/or position) European single emergency call number. Access to data between your vehicle and the PEUGEOT The "Peugeot Connect SOS" system is able You have the right to access the data brand. to collect and process only the following and, if necessary, submit a request to It can be configured in the Settings menu on data relating to the vehicle: chassis number, rectify, erase or restrict the processing of the touch screen. type (passenger vehicle or light commercial any personal information not processed in By default, depending on equipment, vehicle), fuel type or power source, most accordance with the provisions of Regulation deactivate/reactivate geolocation by recent three locations and direction of travel, 2016/679 (GDPR). Third parties to which data simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then and a timestamped log file recording the has been communicated shall be notified of press the "Peugeot Connect Assistance" automatic activation of the system. any rectification, erasure or restriction carried button to confirm. The recipients of the processed data are the out in accordance with the aforementioned emergency call handling centres designated Directive, unless doing so would be If you purchased your vehicle outside the by the relevant national authorities in the impossible or require a disproportionate effort. PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you territory in which they are located, enabling You also have the right to lodge a complaint to have a dealer check the configuration of priority reception and handling of calls to the with the relevant data protection authority. these services and, if desired, modify them to “112” emergency number. suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, configuration is possible in the official national Data storage language of your choice. Data contained in the system’s memory is not accessible from outside the system until
* According to the geographic coverage of ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’, ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’ and the official national language chosen by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
77 Safety
For technical reasons, in particular to Anti-lock braking system When changing wheels (tyres and rims), more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired improve the quality of telematic services ensure that these are approved for your path, within the limits of the laws of physics. for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the (ABS) and Electronic brake vehicle. These systems are activated automatically every right to carry out updates to the vehicle's force distribution (EBFD) time the vehicle is started. on-board telematic system at any time. These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability After an impact, have these systems They come into operation in the event of a grip and handling during braking, and enable greater checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a or trajectory problem. If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect control while cornering, particularly on poor or qualified workshop. This warning lamp on the instrument Packs offer with the SOS and Assistance slippery road surfaces. panel flashes to indicate that they are Pack included, there are additional services ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of operating. available to you in your personal space, via emergency braking. Emergency braking Deactivation / Reactivation the website for your country. EBFD manages the braking pressure wheel by assistance (EBA) In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle stuck For information about the SOS and wheel. In an emergency, this system enables you in mud, immobilised in snow, on soft ground, Assistance Pack, please refer to the general This warning lamp comes on fixed in the to reach the optimum braking pressure more etc.), it may be useful to deactivate the ASR conditions for these services. event of an ABS malfunction. quickly and therefore reduce the stopping system to freely spin the wheels and regain The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive distance. traction. carefully at a moderate speed. It is triggered in relation to the speed at which Reactivate the system as soon as the level of Electronic stability control Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a grip permits. workshop as soon as possible. reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an It is set via the touch (ESC) This warning lamp, when lit together with increase in braking efficiency. Driving / Vehicle The electronic stability control programme the STOP and ABS warning lamps, screen menu. includes the following systems: accompanied by a message and an audible Anti-slip regulation (ASR) Deactivation is confirmed by the illumination of this indicator lamp in the – Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction. / Dynamic stability control brake force distribution (EBFD). You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. instrument panel and the display of a message. – Emergency braking assistance (EBA). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (DSC) The ASR system is reactivated automatically – Anti-slip regulation (ASR). workshop. Anti-slip regulation optimises traction using every time the ignition is switched back on or – Dynamic stability control (DSC). engine braking and by applying the brakes on from 31 mph (50 km/h). The normal operation of the ABS may – Trailer stability assist (TSA). the driving wheels to avoid wheel spinning. It Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h). result in slight vibrations in the brake also enhances the vehicle's directional stability pedal. Malfunction while accelerating. If there is a difference between the vehicle’s In the event of a system malfunction, this When braking in an emergency, press trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the warning lamp comes on, accompanied by very firmly and maintain this pressure. dynamic stability control system automatically an onscreen message and audible signal. uses engine braking and the brakes on one or
78 Safety more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The electronic stability control system (ESC) path, within the limits of the laws of physics. workshop to have the systems checked. must not have any faults. 5 These systems are activated automatically every Between 37 and 99 mph (60 and 160 km/h), if ASR / DSC time the vehicle is started. the system detects oscillations (snaking) in the These systems enhance safety during They come into operation in the event of a grip movement of the trailer, it acts on the brakes to normal driving, but should not encourage or trajectory problem. stabilise the trailer and, if necessary, reduces the driver to take extra risks or drive at high This warning lamp on the instrument engine power to slow down the vehicle. speed. panel flashes to indicate that they are This warning lamp flashes in the It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow, operating. instrument panel and the brake lamps ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It light up to draw attention to this corrective action. is therefore important for your safety to keep Deactivation / Reactivation For information on towed loads and masses, these systems activated in all conditions, and In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle stuck refer to the Technical data section or your particularly in difficult conditions. in mud, immobilised in snow, on soft ground, vehicle’s registration certificate Correct operation of these systems depends etc.), it may be useful to deactivate the ASR To ensure complete safety while driving with on compliance with the manufacturer's system to freely spin the wheels and regain a Towing device, refer to the corresponding recommendations relating to the wheels traction. section. (tyres and rims), braking and electronic Reactivate the system as soon as the level of components, as well as the assembly and grip permits. Malfunction repair procedures used by PEUGEOT It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes dealers. screen menu. on in the instrument panel, accompanied The use of snow tyres is recommended, to Deactivation is confirmed by the by a message and an audible signal. ensure that these systems remain effective illumination of this indicator lamp in the If you wish to continue towing a trailer, reduce in winter conditions. All four wheels must be instrument panel and the display of a message. your speed and drive carefully! fitted with tyres approved for the vehicle. The ASR system is reactivated automatically Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified every time the ignition is switched back on or workshop to have the system checked. from 31 mph (50 km/h). Trailer stability assist (TSA) The trailer stability assist system offers Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h). When towing, this system reduces the risk of the enhanced safety in normal driving, vehicle or trailer snaking. Malfunction provided that the recommendations on towing a trailer are observed. It should not In the event of a system malfunction, this Operation encourage the driver to take risks, such as warning lamp comes on, accompanied by The system is activated automatically when the towing a trailer in adverse operating an onscreen message and audible signal. ignition is switched on. conditions (overloading, failure to observe the
79 Safety
trailer nose weight, worn or under-inflated This system reduces the pressure of the seat Rear seat belts Seat belt not fastened/ tyres, faulty braking system, etc.), or to drive belt on the chest of the occupant, thus improving at excessive speeds. their protection. unfastened alerts
In certain cases, the system may not detect In the event of an impact trailer snaking, particularly with a light trailer. Depending on the nature and
When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, the
seriousness of impacts, the pyrotechnic system may not be able to prevent sudden pretensioner device may trigger before trailer snaking. and independently of airbag deployment. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of Seat belts harmless smoke and a noise, due to the 1. Front left seat belt warning lamp Inertia reel activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge 2. Front right seat belt warning lamp The seat belts are equipped with an inertia reel incorporated in the system. Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat belt 3. Rear left seat belt warning lamp which allows the strap length to automatically In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes with inertia reel. 4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp adjust to your shape. The seat belt returns to its on. The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic 5. Rear right seat belt warning lamp storage automatically when it is not used. Following an impact, have the seat belt pretensioning and force limiting system. The inertia reels are fitted with a device which system checked, and if necessary replaced, When carrying heavy loads in the boot, the rear If the corresponding seat belt is not fastened automatically locks the strap in the event of a by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified seat belts should be fastened. or is unfastened, when the ignition is switched collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls workshop. on, the seat belts warning lamp comes on in the over. It can be released by pulling the strap firmly Fastening instrument panel and the corresponding warning and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. Front seat belts ► Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the lamp (1 to 5) comes on in red in the seat belt and Pyrotechnic pretensioning buckle. front passenger airbag warning lamps display. The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic This system improves safety in the event of a ► Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly pretensioning system and a force limiting If a rear seat belt is not fastened, the frontal or side impact. by pulling the strap. Depending on the severity of the impact, the system. corresponding warning lamp (3 to 5) pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly Unlocking comes on for around 30 seconds. tightens the seat belts against the body of the ► Press the red button on the buckle. From about 12 mph (20 km/h) and for 2 occupants. ► Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in. minutes, each warning lamp corresponding to The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are an occupied seat whose seat belt is unfastened enabled when the ignition is on. flashes, accompanied by an audible signal. After Force limiter these 2 minutes, the corresponding seat warning
80 Safety
Seat belt not fastened/ lamp remains on until the driver or the front/rear Recommendations for children passenger fasten their seat belt. Use a suitable child seat if the passenger 5 unfastened alerts is less than 12 years old or shorter than one
Advice and a half metres. Never use the same seat belt to secure more The driver must ensure that passengers
than one child.
use the seat belts correctly and that they Never carry a child on your lap. are all fastened before setting off. For more information on Child seats, refer to Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must the corresponding section. always fasten the seat belt, even for short journeys. Do not interchange the seat belt buckles, as Maintenance In accordance with current safety 1. Front left seat belt warning lamp they will not fulfil their role fully. regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's 2. Front right seat belt warning lamp Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with 3. Rear left seat belt warning lamp is reeled in correctly. the skills and equipment needed, which a 4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp After folding or moving a seat or rear bench PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. 5. Rear right seat belt warning lamp seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned Have the seat belts checked regularly by a If the corresponding seat belt is not fastened and reeled in correctly. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, or is unfastened, when the ignition is switched particularly if the straps show signs of on, the seat belts warning lamp comes on in the Installation damage. instrument panel and the corresponding warning The lower part of the strap must be Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or lamp (1 to 5) comes on in red in the seat belt and positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT front passenger airbag warning lamps display. The upper part must be positioned in the dealers. hollow of the shoulder. If a rear seat belt is not fastened, the In order to be effective, a seat belt: corresponding warning lamp (3 to 5) – must be tightened as close to the body as comes on for around 30 seconds. possible; Airbags From about 12 mph (20 km/h) and for 2 – must be pulled in front of you with a smooth minutes, each warning lamp corresponding to movement, ensuring that it is not twisted; General information an occupied seat whose seat belt is unfastened – must only be used to secure one person; System designed to help improve the safety flashes, accompanied by an audible signal. After – must not show signs of tearing or fraying; of the occupants sitting in the front seats and these 2 minutes, the corresponding seat warning – must not be changed or modified, in order the rear outer seats, in the event of a violent to avoid affecting its performance. collision. The airbags supplement the action
81 Safety
of the seat belts equipped with a force limiting Impact detection zones Front airbags The front airbag inflates between the thorax and system. head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the Electronic detectors record and analyse the steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, front and side impacts sustained in the impact passenger's side, to cushion their forward detection zones: movement. – In the event of violent impact, the airbags deploy instantly and help better protect the Lateral airbags occupants of the vehicle; immediately after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly in order not A. Front impact zone to hinder the visibility or the possible exit of the B. Side impact zone occupants. – In the event of a slight impact, a rear impact When one or more airbags are deployed, and under certain rollover conditions, the airbags the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge may not deploy; only the seat belt helps to incorporated in the system makes a noise and This system protects the driver and front protect you in these situations. releases a small quantity of smoke. passenger in the event of a serious front impact, The seriousness of the impact depends on the This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive in order to limit the risk of head and chest nature of the obstacle and the speed of the individuals may experience slight irritation. injuries. vehicle at the moment of collision. The detonation noise associated with the The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
deployment of one or more airbags may result steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is The airbags do not operate when the in a slight loss of hearing for a short time. fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. This system protects the driver and front ignition is switched off. passenger in the event of a serious side impact This equipment will only deploy once. If a The front airbags are adaptive. In to mitigate the risk of injury to the chest, between second impact occurs (during the same or a particular, they inflate less firmly in the the hip and the shoulder. subsequent accident), the airbag will not be presence of a smaller occupant, with the seat Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest deployed again. set in a forward longitudinal position. frame, door side.
Deployment Deployment They deploy, except the front passenger airbag They are deployed on one side in the event of a if it is deactivated*, in the event of a serious front serious side impact applied to all or part of the impact to all or part of the front impact zone A. side impact zone B. The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and shoulder of the vehicle's occupant and the * For more information on Deactivating the front passenger airbag, refer to the corresponding section. corresponding door trim panel.
82 Safety
The front airbag inflates between the thorax and Curtain airbags Advice head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the 5 System contributing towards greater protection steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, For the airbags to be fully effective, for the driver and passengers (with the exception passenger's side, to cushion their forward observe the safety recommendations of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a movement. below. serious side impact in order to limit the risk of Adopt a normal upright sitting position. injury to the side of the head. Lateral airbags Fasten the seat belt ensuring it is correctly
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and positioned and adjusted. the upper passenger compartment area. Do not leave anything between the occupants Deployment and the airbags (a child, pet, object, etc.), nor fix or attach anything close to or in the way of It deploys simultaneously with the corresponding the airbag release trajectory; this could cause lateral airbag in the event of a serious side injuries during their deployment. impact applied to all or part of the side impact Never modify the original definition of your zone B. vehicle, particularly in the area directly around The curtain airbag inflates between the front the airbags. and rear occupants of the vehicle and the After an accident or if the vehicle has been corresponding windows. stolen, have the airbag systems checked. Malfunction All work on the airbag systems must only This system protects the driver and front be performed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a If this warning lamp comes on in the passenger in the event of a serious side impact qualified workshop. instrument panel, you must contact a to mitigate the risk of injury to the chest, between Even if all of the precautions mentioned PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to the hip and the shoulder. are observed, a risk of injury or of minor have the system checked. Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest burns to the head, chest or arms cannot be The airbags may not be deployed in the event of frame, door side. ruled out when an airbag is deployed. The a serious impact. airbag inflates almost instantly (within a few Deployment In the event of a minor impact or bump at milliseconds) then deflates within the same They are deployed on one side in the event of a the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle time discharging the hot gas via openings serious side impact applied to all or part of the rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed. provided for this purpose. side impact zone B. In the event of a rear or front collision, none of The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and the lateral airbags are deployed. shoulder of the vehicle's occupant and the corresponding door trim panel.
83 Safety
Front airbags sensors - risk of malfunction of the lateral harmless smoke and a noise, due to the The active bonnet may not deploy in the event of Do not drive holding the steering wheel airbags! activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge an impact. by its spokes or resting your hands on the Such work must only be done by a PEUGEOT incorporated in the system. The airbag centre part of the wheel. dealer or a qualified workshop. warning lamp comes on. Passengers must not place their feet on the After triggering, do not try to open or close Child seats dashboard. the bonnet. Call a towing company or go to Curtain airbags The regulations on carrying children are Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags the nearest PEUGEOT dealer or qualified Do not fix or attach anything to the roof, specific to each country. Refer to the can cause burns or the risk of injury from a workshop, driving at a speed below 19 mph as this could cause head injuries when the legislation in force in your country. cigarette or pipe. curtain airbag is deployed. (30 km/h). Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or Do not remove the grab handles installed on Make sure that you adjust the height of the For maximum safety, please observe the hit it violently. the roof, as they play a part in securing the driver's seat - risk of hindrance to visibility! following recommendations: Do not fix or attach anything to the steering curtain airbags. – In accordance with European regulations, all wheel or dashboard, as this could cause This equipment will only trigger once. If a children under the age of 12 or less than 4 injuries when the airbags are deployed. second impact occurs (during the same ft 11” (150 cm) tall must travel in approved Active bonnet or a subsequent accident), the active bonnet child seats suited to their weight, on seats
Lateral airbags will not trigger. fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings. Use only approved covers on the seats, After an accident or if the vehicle has been – Statistically, the safest seats in your compatible with the deployment of the lateral stolen, have the system checked. vehicle for carrying children are the rear airbags. For information on the range of seat Do not tamper with the pyrotechnic systems seats. covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a under the bonnet, close to the struts - risk of – Children weighing less than 9 kg must PEUGEOT dealer. explosion! travel in the "rear facing" position, whether in Do not fix or attach anything to the seat All work on this system must be carried out the front or rear of the vehicle. backrests (clothes, etc.), as this could cause only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified It is recommended that children travel injuries to the thorax or arm when the lateral workshop. on the rear seats of the vehicle: airbag is deployed. – ‘rear facing’ up to the age of 3, Do not sit with the upper part of the body any – ‘forward facing’ over the age of 3. nearer to the door than necessary. Malfunction The vehicle's front door panels include side The active bonnet has been designed to If this warning lamp comes on in the Make sure that the seat belt is correctly impact sensors. optimise the safety of pedestrians in the event of instrument panel, accompanied by an positioned and tightened. A damaged door or any unauthorised or collision with the front of the vehicle. audible warning and the display of a message, For child seats with a support leg, ensure that incorrectly executed work (modification or you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a Deployment of the active bonnet is the support leg is in firm and steady contact repair) on the front doors or their interior trim qualified workshop to have the system checked. accompanied by a slight discharge of with the floor. could compromise the operation of these
84 Safety
The active bonnet may not deploy in the event of Advice Use a booster seat with backrest, equipped an impact. with a belt guide at shoulder level. 5 An incorrectly installed child seat Child seats compromises the child's safety in the Additional protections event of an accident. To prevent accidental opening of the Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt The regulations on carrying children are doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock". buckle under the child seat, as this could specific to each country. Refer to the Take care not to open the rear windows by destabilise it. legislation in force in your country. more than one third. Remember to fasten the seat belts or the To protect young children from the rays of the For maximum safety, please observe the harness of child seats, keeping the slack sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows. following recommendations: relative to the child's body to a minimum, As a safety precaution, do not leave: – In accordance with European regulations, all even for short journeys. – a child alone and unattended in a vehicle, children under the age of 12 or less than 4 When installing a child seat using the seat – a child or an animal in a vehicle which is ft 11” (150 cm) tall must travel in approved belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, child seats suited to their weight, on seats correctly on the child seat and that it secures – the keys within reach of children inside the fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings. the child seat firmly on the seat of the vehicle. vehicle. – Statistically, the safest seats in your If the passenger seat is adjustable, move it vehicle for carrying children are the rear forwards if necessary. seats. Remove the head restraint before Child seat at the rear – Children weighing less than 9 kg must installing a child seat with a backrest on a travel in the "rear facing" position, whether in passenger seat. "Forward facing" or "Rearward the front or rear of the vehicle. Ensure that the head restraint is stored or facing" attached securely to prevent it from being It is recommended that children travel thrown around the vehicle in the event of on the rear seats of the vehicle: sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once – ‘rear facing’ up to the age of 3, the child seat has been removed.
– ‘forward facing’ over the age of 3.
Installing a booster seat Make sure that the seat belt is correctly The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned and tightened. positioned on the child's shoulder without For child seats with a support leg, ensure that touching the neck.
the support leg is in firm and steady contact Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt with the floor. passes correctly over the child's thighs.
85 Safety
► Move the vehicle's front seat forward and Child seat at the front The front passenger airbag must be Deactivating the front straighten the backrest so that the legs of the deactivated before installing a rearward child in the "forward facing" child seat or the facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks passenger airbag
"rearward facing" child seat itself do not touch being seriously injured or killed if the the vehicle's front seat. airbag deploys.
► Verify that the backrest of the "forward facing"
child seat is as close as possible to the backrest of the vehicle's rear seat, and is ideally in contact ► Adjust the front passenger seat to the with it. highest and fully back longitudinal position, with the backrest straightened. Centre rear seat "Forward facing" Passenger airbag OFF For your child’s safety, the front passenger airbag MUST be deactivated
when a "rearward facing" child seat is Warning label - Front passenger airbag installed on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child would be exposed to the risk of death or serious injury in the event of airbag deployment.
You must leave the front passenger Vehicles not equipped with a
airbag active. deactivation/reactivation control The right lateral buckle must be stored in its Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited housing when installing a child seat on the "Rearward facing"
centre rear seat. You must comply with the following instruction, - risk of death or serious injury in the event of A child seat with a support leg must never be reminded by the warning label on both sides of airbag deployment! installed on the centre rear passenger seat. the passenger sun visor: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint Deactivating/Reactivating the front on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in passenger airbag front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the For vehicles on which it is fitted, the control is CHILD can occur. located on the side of the glove box.
86 Safety
Deactivating the front Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg 5 passenger airbag
L1 "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the "rearward facing" position. Passenger airbag OFF Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
For your child’s safety, the front passenger airbag MUST be deactivated With the ignition off: when a "rearward facing" child seat is ► To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the installed on the front passenger seat. switch to the "OFF" position. Otherwise, the child would be exposed to the ► To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON"
risk of death or serious injury in the event of position. airbag deployment. When the ignition is switched on: L5 This warning lamp comes on and remains "RÖMER KIDFIX XP" Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX Vehicles not equipped with a lit to signal the deactivation. mountings. deactivation/reactivation control Or The child is restrained by the seat belt. Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on This warning lamp comes on for about 1 Only suitable for installation on the side rear the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited minute to signal the activation. seats. - risk of death or serious injury in the event of The head restraint on the vehicle seat must airbag deployment! Recommended child seats Range of recommended child seats secured be removed. using a three-point seat belt. Deactivating/Reactivating the front passenger airbag For vehicles on which it is fitted, the control is located on the side of the glove box.
87 Safety
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L6 "GRACO Booster" The child is restrained by the seat belt. Only suitable for installation on the front
passenger seat or on the rear side seats.
Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing universally approved (a) child seats secured using the seat belt, based on the child’s weight and the seat position in the vehicle.
Weight of the child / indicative age Seat Front passenger Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg airbag (groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3) 0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to Up to about 1 years old years old 10 years old year old Row 1 (c) Passenger seat Deactivated : U U U U with height "OFF" adjustment (d)
Activated: X UF UF UF "ON"
Row 2 Rear seats (e) (f) (g) U U U U
88 Safety
U: Seat position suitable for the installation of (g) Before installing the child seat in the centre 5 a child seat secured using the seat belt and rear seat, store the right-hand side buckle in universally approved for "rearward facing" the space provided in the seat cushion. and/or "forward facing" use.
UF: Seat position suitable for the installation a child seat secured using the seat belt and “ISOFIX" mountings universally approved for "forward facing" The seats shown below are fitted with ISOFIX use. compliant mountings:
X: Seat position not suitable for the installation
of a child seat for the specified weight The 2 latches of ISOFIX child seats are secured group. to them. (a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be – One ring B, located behind the seat, called installed in all vehicles using the seat belt. the TOP TETHER, for fixing seats fitted with an upper strap. (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Carrycots and "car" infant carriers cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
(c) Refer to the current legislation in your country before placing a child in this seat * Depending on country of sale. position. The mountings comprise three rings for each seat, indicated by a marking: (d) Adjust the front passenger seat to the – Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat highest position. backrest and cushion.
(e) To install a "rearward facing" or "forward facing" child seat in a rear side seat, move Front seat the front seat forwards, then straighten the backrest to allow enough room for the child seat and the child's legs.
(f) Never install a child seat with a support leg on the centre rear seat.
89 Safety
An incorrectly installed child seat compromises the child's safety in the "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX event of an accident. base" (size category: ) Strictly observe the fitting instructions E provided in the user guide supplied with the Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
child seat.
For information about the options for fitting ISOFIX child seats in your vehicle, refer to the summary table.
Rear seats This system prevents the child seat from tipping Recommended ISOFIX child forward in the event of a front impact.
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, seats reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in the Also consult the user guide from the child Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX vehicle. seat’s manufacturer to find out how to base which is attached to rings A. To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: install and remove the seat. Installed only on the front passenger seat or ► Remove and stow the head restraint before on the rear side seats. installing the child seat on this seat (refit it once The base has a support leg, height- the child seat has been removed). adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor. ► Route the strap of the child seat behind the This child seat can also be secured with a Locations for ISOFIX child seats seat backrest, in-between the 2 head restraint seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX anchor points. and attached to the vehicle seat using the mountings. ► Secure the upper strap hook to ring B. three-point seat belt. ► Tighten the upper strap.
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the left-hand rear seat of the bench seat, before fitting the seat, first move the centre rear seat belt towards the middle of the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat interfering with the operation of the seat belt.
90 Safety
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" 5 (size category: B1) (size category: B1) Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Suitable for forward-facing installation only. Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as TOP TETHER, using an upper strap. Only suitable for installation on the front passenger seat or the rear side seats. The head restraint on the vehicle seat must be removed. Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying down. This child seat can also be used in seat positions not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be secured to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.
Locations for ISOFIX child seats In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
91 Safety
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, as determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child (c) Remove the head restraints. seat next to the i-Size logo. Weight of the child / indicative age i-Size child seats Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A. (group 0) Under 13 kg (group 1) These i-Size child seats also have: Up to about 6 (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old – either an upper strap that is attached to ring B. months old (group 0+) – or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position. Up to about 1 year old Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision. For more information on the , refer to the corresponding section. Type of ISOFIX child seat Cot "Rearward facing" "Rearward "Forward facing" ISOFIX mountings In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX facing" mountings approved for i-Size. ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 Seat Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system Seat Front Row 1 (a) Passenger seat (b) Deactivated: "OFF" i-U
passenger airbag Activated: "ON" i-UF Row 1 Passenger Deactivated: X IL IL IUF/IL (a) seat "OFF" with height Activated: X X X IUF/IL adjustment "ON" Row 2 Rear side seats i-U Row 2 Rear side seats IL IL (c) IL (c) IUF/IL (c) (b) Rear centre seat Not ISOFIX
IUF: Seat position suitable for the installation of an IsofixU niversal seat, "Forward facing", secured using the upper strap. IL: Seat position suitable for the installation of an IsofixS emi-Universal seat, either: Rear centre seat Not i-Size – "rearward facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. – forward-facing, fitted with a support leg.
– a carrycot fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. For securing the upper strap using the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section. X: Seat position not suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX seat or carrycot for the specified weight group. (a) Refer to the current legislation in your country before placing a child in this seat position. (b) The installation of a carrycot on this seat may prevent the use of one or more of the other seats in this row.
92 Safety (c) Remove the head restraints. 5 i-Size child seats i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A. These i-Size child seats also have: – either an upper strap that is attached to ring B. – or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position. Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision. For more information on the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section. In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings approved for i-Size.
Seat Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system Row 1 (a) Passenger seat (b) Deactivated: "OFF" i-U
Activated: "ON" i-UF
Row 2 Rear side seats i-U
Rear centre seat Not i-Size
93 Safety
i-U : Suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the Locking / Unlocking Do not confuse the child lock control, "Universal" category, "forward facing" and which is red, with the back-up locking "rearward facing". control, which is black.
i-UF: Only suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the "Universal" category which are "forward facing". Electric child lock (Depending on version) (a) Refer to the current legislation in your This control prevents the opening of the rear country before installing a child at this seat doors using their interior handles and the use of position. the rear electric windows. (b) Tilt the seat backrest to 45°, then install the child seat. Activation/Deactivation
Straighten the backrest until it is in contact ► To lock, turn the red control as far as it will go with the child seat's backrest. using the integral key: • To the right on the left-hand rear door. • To the left on the right-hand rear door. Manual child lock ► To unlock, turn it in the opposite direction. This system prevents opening of a rear door using its interior handle.
The control, red in colour, is located on the edge of each rear door (marked by a label). ► With the ignition on, press this button to activate/deactivate the child lock. When the indicator lamp is on, the child lock is activated.
With the child lock activated, it is still possible to open the doors from outside and to operate the rear electric windows from the driver's controls.
94 Safety
This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of 5 the central locking control. Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition. Always keep the electronic key with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is switched off automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers.
95 Driving
Driving recommendations Do not park the vehicle or leave the ► Check that the depth of water does not If the outside temperature is high, let the engine running on a flammable exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the ► Observe the driving regulations and remain surface (dry grass, dead leaves, etc.). The might be generated by other users. vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool. vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. exhaust system of your vehicle is very hot, ► Deactivate the Stop & Start function. ► Monitor your environment and keep your even several minutes after the engine stops. ► Drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In Before setting off hands on the wheel to be able to react to Risk of fire! all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h). anything that may happen any time. ► Do not stop and do not switch off the engine. Nose weight ► Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for Never leave a vehicle unattended with On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the braking and maintain a longer safety distance, the engine running. If you have to leave conditions allow, make several light brake heaviest items are as close as possible to the especially in bad weather. your vehicle with the engine running, apply applications to dry the brake discs and pads. axle and the nose weight (at the point where it ► Stop the vehicle to carry out operations that the parking brake and put the gearbox into If in doubt about the state of your vehicle, joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum require close attention (such as adjustments). neutral or position N or P (depending on the contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified permitted without exceeding it. ► During long trips, take a break every two type of gearbox). workshop. hours. Tyres Towing ► Check the tyre pressures of the towing Important! Never leave children inside the vehicle vehicle and of the trailer, observing the . unsupervised Driving with a trailer places greater recommended pressures. Never leave the engine running in a demands on the towing vehicle and Lighting closed space without sufficient particular care must be taken. ventilation. Internal combustion engines emit On flooded roads ► Check the electrical signalling on the trailer toxic exhaust gases such as carbon We strongly advise against driving on flooded and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. Do not exceed the maximum towable monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death! roads, as this could cause serious damage to weights. the internal combustion engine or electric motor, If a genuine PEUGEOT towing device is reduce the maximum load by the gearbox and the electrical systems of the At altitude: used, the rear parking sensors will be In severe wintry conditions (temperature 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower vehicle. deactivated automatically to avoid the audible below -23°C), let the engine run for 4 air density at high altitudes decreases engine signal. minutes before moving off, to ensure the performance. correct operation and durability of the mechanical components of your vehicle When driving New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until the (engine and gearbox). vehicle has driven at least 620 miles Cooling (1,000 kilometres). Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant Never drive with the parking brake temperature to increase. The maximum towable . Risk of overheating and applied load depends on the gradient and the exterior damage to the braking system! If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road:
96 Driving
If the outside temperature is high, let the temperature. The fan’s cooling capacity does not Starting/Switching off the engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the increase with engine speed. 6 vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool. ► Reduce speed and lower the engine speed to engine limit heating up. In all cases, pay attention to the coolant The electronic key must be present in the Before setting off temperature. passenger compartment. Nose weight If this warning lamp and the STOP If it is not detected, a message is displayed. Move the electronic key so that the engine ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the warning lamp come on, stop the can be started or switched off. heaviest items are as close as possible to the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key axle and the nose weight (at the point where it possible. not detected - Back-up starting or Back-up joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum Brakes switch-off" section. permitted without exceeding it. Braking distances are increased when towing a Tyres trailer. To avoid overheating the brakes, the use of engine braking is recommended. Starting
► Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the Side wind recommended pressures. Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more Lighting susceptible to wind when towing. ► Check the electrical signalling on the trailer and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. Anti-theft protection If a genuine PEUGEOT towing device is used, the rear parking sensors will be Electronic immobiliser deactivated automatically to avoid the audible The keys include an electronic engine
signal. immobiliser system, with a code that must be recognised in order for starting to be possible. ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever When driving If the system malfunctions, indicated by the in neutral and fully depress the clutch pedal. display of a message, the engine will not start. ► With an automatic gearbox, select mode P Cooling Contact a PEUGEOT dealer. or N and press the brake pedal. Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant ► Press the "START/STOP" button while temperature to increase. The maximum towable maintaining pressure on the pedal until the load depends on the gradient and the exterior engine starts.
97 Driving
For Diesel engines, when the temperature is activation of the hybrid system (confirmed by an If the vehicle is not immobilised, the Key not detected below zero and/or the engine is cold, starting will audible signal). engine will not switch off. only occur once the preheating warning lamp is By default, the system starts in ELECTRIC Back-up starting off. mode. With the engine off, the braking and A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column, If this warning lamp comes on after Depending on certain parameters (battery steering assistance systems are also cut to enable the engine to be started if the system pressing the " " button: charge level or exterior temperature), the system START/STOP off - risk of loss of control of the vehicle! fails to detect the key in the recognition zone, or ► Keep the pedal fully depressed and do not determines whether it is necessary to start the if the battery in the electronic key is discharged. press the " " button again until the petrol engine. START/STOP Never leave your vehicle with the engine is running. It is possible to change the driving mode at any electronic key still inside. If one of the starting conditions is not met, a time using the mode selector. message is displayed. When the vehicle starts in electric mode, In some circumstances, a message indicates it makes no noise. Switching on the ignition that it is necessary to turn the steering wheel Pay particular attention to pedestrians and without starting the engine
while pressing the "START/STOP" button to cyclists who may not hear the vehicle coming assist unlocking of the steering column.
despite the pedestrian horn. With petrol engines, after a cold start, ► Place and hold the remote control against the preheating the catalytic converter can reader. cause noticeable engine vibrations for Switching off ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with ► Immobilise the vehicle, with the engine at in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal. the engine running (accelerated idle speed). idle. ► With an automatic gearbox, select mode P, ► With a manual gearbox, ideally put the gear then fully depress the brake pedal. lever into neutral. If the engine stalls, release the clutch ► Press the "START/STOP" button. ► With an , ideally select pedal and fully depress it again, the automatic gearbox The engine starts. mode or . engine will restart automatically. P N ► Press the "START/STOP" button.. With the electronic key in the passenger ► For hybrid vehicles, before leaving the compartment, pressing the “START/STOP” Starting hybrid vehicles vehicle, check that the READY warning lamp is button, without pressing any of the pedals, allows the ignition to be switched on without ► Fully depress the brake pedal and press switched off. starting the engine. briefly on the START/STOP button. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn ► Press this button again to switch off the ► Keep you foot on the pedal until this the steering wheel to lock the steering column. ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. indicator lamp comes on, indicating the On certain versions with an automatic gearbox (EAT6 / EAT8), the steering column does not lock, but the gearbox locks in mode P.
98 Driving
Key not detected Back-up switch-off On certain versions with automatic gearbox (EAT6 / EAT8), the steering column does not 6 Back-up starting lock. A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column, to enable the engine to be started if the system Electric parking brake fails to detect the key in the recognition zone, or In automatic mode, this system applies the if the battery in the electronic key is discharged.
parking brake when the engine is switched off and releases it when the vehicle moves off.
If the electronic key is not detected or is no longer in the recognition zone, a message
appears in the instrument panel when closing a ► Place and hold the remote control against the door or trying to switch off the engine.
reader. ► To confirm the instruction to switch off the ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever engine, press the "START/STOP" button for At any time, with the engine running: in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal. approximately 5 seconds. ► to apply the parking brake, briefly pull the ► With an automatic gearbox, select mode P, In the event of a fault with the electronic key, control lever; then fully depress the brake pedal. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► to release it, brieflypush the control lever ► Press the "START/STOP" button. workshop. while pressing the brake pedal. The engine starts. Automatic mode is activated by default. Emergency switch-off In the event of an emergency only, the engine Indicator lamp can be switched off without conditions (even This indicator lamp comes on on the when driving). instrument panel and on the control lever ► Press the "START/STOP" button for about to confirm the application of the parking brake, 5 seconds. accompanied by the display of the message In this case, the steering column locks as soon "Parking brake applied". as the vehicle stops. The indicator lamp goes out to confirm the release of the parking brake, accompanied
99 Driving
by the display of the message "Parking brake Never leave a child alone inside the Automatic operation It is not applied automatically if the released". vehicle, as they could release the parking engine stalls or enters STOP mode The indicator lamp flashes in response to a brake. Automatic release of Stop & Start. manual request to apply or release the brake. Ensure first that the engine is running and the In the event of a battery failure, the When the vehicle is parked: on a driver's door is properly closed. With automatic operation, it is also electric parking brake will not operate. steep slope, heavily loaded or during The electric parking brake releases possible to manually apply or release the As a safety measure, with a manual gearbox, towing automatically and progressively when the parking brake using the control lever. if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise With a manual gearbox, turn the wheels vehicle moves off. the vehicle by engaging a gear. toward the pavement and engage a gear. With a manual gearbox Special cases As a safety measure, with an automatic With an automatic gearbox, turn the wheels ► Fully depress the clutch pedal, engage first toward the pavement and select mode P. gearbox, if the parking brake is not applied, gear or reverse. Immobilising the vehicle with the When towing, the vehicle is approved for ► Press the accelerator pedal and release the immobilise the vehicle by placing the supplied engine running chocks against one of the wheels. parking on slopes of up to 12%. clutch pedal. To immobilise the vehicle with the engine Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified With an automatic gearbox running, briefly pull the control lever. workshop. Manual operation ► Press the brake pedal. ► Select mode D, M or R. Parking the vehicle with the brake Manual release ► Release the brake pedal and press the accelerator pedal. released With the ignition on or engine running: ► Depress the brake pedal. With an automatic gearbox, if the brake In very cold conditions (ice), it is ► While maintaining pressure on the brake does not release automatically, check recommended that the parking brake not pedal, briefly push the control lever. that the front doors are correctly closed. be applied. To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or If you push the control lever without place the chocks against one of the wheels. When stationary with the engine running, pressing the brake pedal, the parking do not press the accelerator pedal Before leaving the vehicle, check that the brake is not released and a message is Immobilisation of the vehicle with the parking unnecessarily - risk of parking brake release. parking brake is applied: the indicator displayed. brake released lamps on the instrument panel and the control ► Switch off the engine. lever must be on fixed. Automatic application ► Switch on the ignition again, without starting If the parking brake is not applied, there is an Manual application the engine. With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake audible signal and a message is displayed on With the vehicle stationary: ► Release the parking brake manually by is automatically applied when the engine is opening the driver's door. ► Pull briefly on the control lever. pushing the control lever while keeping your foot switched off. The control lever indicator lamp flashes to on the brake pedal. confirm the application request.
100 Driving
It is not applied automatically if the ► Switch off the ignition. ► Use the control lever to apply the parking engine stalls or enters STOP mode brake, if it is released. 6 With an automatic gearbox, mode P is of Stop & Start. ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. automatically selected when the ignition ► Hold the control lever pressed in the release is switched off. The wheels are blocked. direction for between 10 and a maximum of 15 With automatic operation, it is also For further information on the Automatic seconds. possible to manually apply or release the gearbox, particularly in relation to leaving the ► Release the control lever. parking brake using the control lever. vehicle in free-wheeling mode, refer to the ► Depress and hold the brake pedal. corresponding section. ► Pull the control lever in the “Application” Special cases direction for 2 seconds. With an automatic gearbox, when mode This indicator lamp on the instrument Immobilising the vehicle with the N is engaged, an audible signal is panel comes on to confirm deactivation of engine running triggered if the driver's door is opened. It the automatic functions. stops when the driver's door closes again. To immobilise the vehicle with the engine ► Release the control lever and the brake running, briefly pull the control lever. pedal. Deactivating automatic From now on, the parking brake can only be Parking the vehicle with the brake applied and released manually using the control released operation lever. In some situations, for example when it is Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic In very cold conditions (ice), it is extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan, operation (confirmed by the indicator lamp on the recommended that the parking brake not breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate instrument panel going off). be applied. automatic operation of the system. To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or Emergency braking place the chocks against one of the wheels. In the event of a fault with the brake pedal or
Immobilisation of the vehicle with the parking in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill,
brake released driver under instruction), a continuous pull on the ► Switch off the engine. electric parking brake control lever will brake the ► Switch on the ignition again, without starting vehicle. Braking continues while the control lever the engine. is pulled, and ceases when the control lever is released.
► Release the parking brake manually by The ABS and DSC systems stabilise the vehicle pushing the control lever while keeping your foot ► Start the engine. on the brake pedal. during emergency braking.
101 Driving
If emergency braking malfunctions, the message Engaging reverse gear Gearbox selector positions Push selector "Parking brake control faulty" will be displayed P. Park on the instrument panel. For parking the vehicle: the front wheels are If the ABS and DSC systems blocked. malfunction, indicated by lighting R. Reverse gear one or both warning lamps on the instrument N. Neutral panel, the vehicle’s stability is no longer ensured. For moving the vehicle with the ignition off, or In this event, the driver must keep the vehicle to allow it to free-wheel. stable by successively pulling and releasing the For more information on Changing to free- control lever, repeating the operation until the wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. vehicle has stopped. ► Raise the ring under the knob and move the D. Driving in automatic mode gear selector to the left, then forwards. The gearbox manages gear changes according to the style of driving, the road 6-speed manual gearbox Only engage reverse gear when the profile and the vehicle load. vehicle is stationary with the engine at th th M. Driving in manual mode
Engaging 5 or 6 gear idle. The driver changes gear using the steering- ► Move the gear selector fully to the right to mounted controls. A. Button P engage 5th or 6th gear. As a safety precaution and to facilitate To put the gearbox into Park mode. Failure to follow this instruction could starting the engine: B. Unlock button cause permanent damage to the gearbox – Always select neutral. To unlock the gearbox and come out of P or (inadvertent engagement of 3rd or 4th gear). – Press the clutch pedal. to change to R, with the foot on the brake pedal. Press and hold this button before pushing the Automatic gearbox (EAT6 selector. C. Button M / EAT8) To change from mode D to permanent Automatic 6 or 8-speed gearbox with a push manual mode. selector. It also offers a manual mode with gear (Depending on version: with Full Park Assist, changes via control paddles located behind the the manual mode is accessed via the DRIVE steering wheel. MODE control) D. Gearbox state indicator lamps (R, N, D)
102 Driving
Push selector 6
► Pull the "+" or "-" paddle towards you and release to shift up or down a gear, respectively. ► Move the selector by pressing it forwards
(N or R) or rearwards (N or D) once or twice, Information displayed on A. Button P passing the point of resistance if necessary. To put the gearbox into Park mode. The push selector returns to its initial position the instrument panel B. Unlock button when released. When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox To unlock the gearbox and come out of P or For example, to change from P to R, while status is displayed on the instrument panel: to change to R, with the foot on the brake pressing Unlock, push forward twice without P : Park. pedal. crossing the point of resistance or push once R : Reverse. Press and hold this button before pushing the crossing the point of resistance: N : Neutral. selector. – In the first case, the gearbox goes from P to N, D1...D6/D8 : Automatic mode. C. Button M then from N to R. M1...M6/M8 : Manual mode. To change from mode D to permanent – In the second case, the gearbox goes directly - : Instruction not processed in manual mode. manual mode. from P to R. If the driver's door is opened with the ignition on, (Depending on version: with Full Park Assist, a message is displayed, prompting you to set the the manual mode is accessed via the DRIVE Steering-mounted controls gearbox to mode P. MODE control) In mode M or D, the steering-mounted control D. Gearbox state indicator lamps (R, N, D) paddles can be used to change gear manually. Operation
They cannot be used to select neutral or to With the engine running, if it is necessary to engage or disengage reverse gear. press the brake pedal and/or the Unlock button
103 Driving
in order to change mode, an alert message is ► Depress the brake pedal, then press the sound. It will stop when you close the driver's ► Start the engine. displayed in the instrument panel. Unlock button. door again. ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, Only appropriate attempted changes of mode ► While maintaining the presses, select push rearwards to select the automatic mode D, are accepted. mode R. or forwards, while pressing the Unlock button to Special aspects of automatic mode engage reverse R. With the engine running and the brakes Permanent manual mode The gearbox selects the gear that offers Then, from D or R: released, if R, D or M is selected, the Entering the mode: optimum performance, taking account of the ► Release the brake pedal. vehicle moves off, even without pressing the With EAT8 without Full Park Assist button and outside temperature, the road profile, the vehicle ► Accelerate gradually to automatically release accelerator pedal. EAT6: load and the driving style. the electric parking brake. ► With mode D initially selected. For maximum acceleration, press the accelerator The vehicle moves off immediately. Never press the accelerator and brake ► Press button M; the green indicator lamp in fully down (kick-down). The gearbox changes pedals at the same time - risk of damage the button comes on. down automatically or holds the selected gear With an automatic gearbox, never try to to the gearbox! With EAT8 and Full Park Assist button: until the maximum engine speed is reached. start the engine by pushing the vehicle. In the event of a battery failure, you must ► Press the DRIVE MODE control. Steering mounted controls allow the driver to ► Select "Manual" mode, which is displayed on place the chock supplied with the vehicle temporarily select a gear, if the vehicle speed Stopping the vehicle tools against one of the wheels to immobilise the instrument panel. and engine speed conditions permit. Whatever the state of the gearbox, when the the vehicle. Exiting the mode: ignition is switched off, mode is engaged ► Push forwards once to return to D. Special aspects of manual mode P automatically and immediately. Unlocking the gearbox or The gearbox only changes from one gear to However, in mode , mode will be engaged ► Press button M; the indicator lamp in the N P – From mode P: another if the vehicle speed and engine speed button goes off. after a delay of 5 seconds (allowing for the ► Fully depress the brake pedal. conditions permit. or process of putting the vehicle into free-wheeling ► Press the Unlock button. mode). ► Select another mode using the DRIVE MODE Starting the vehicle ► While continuing to press the brake pedal Check that mode P has been engaged and control. From mode P: and the Unlock button, select another mode. that the electric parking brake was applied ► Fully depress the brake pedal. – From neutral N, at a speed below 3 mph Switching off the ignition automatically; if not, apply it manually. ► Start the engine. (5 km/h): To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must be The corresponding indicator lamps in the ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, ► Fully depress the brake pedal. stationary. selector and the electric parking brake press the Unlock button. ► While continuing to depress the brake control lever must be on, as well as those in the Changing to free-wheeling ► Push once or twice rearwards to select pedal, select another mode. instrument panel. For more information on Changing to free- the automatic mode D, or forwards to engage Engaging reverse gear wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. reverse R. ► Slow down until you come to a stop. From neutral N: If you open the driver's door while mode ► Fully depress the brake pedal. N is engaged, an audible signal will
104 Driving
► Start the engine. Gearbox malfunction e-EAT8 electric automatic ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, 6 This warning lamp comes on, push rearwards to select the automatic mode , gearbox (Hybrid) D accompanied by an audible signal and the or forwards, while pressing the button to Unlock display of a message. Automatic 8-speed gearbox with a push selector engage reverse . R Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. and regenerative braking function. Then, from or : D R Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h), With the exception of manual mode and ► Release the brake pedal. keeping to the speed limit. regenerative braking, the operation is identical to ► Accelerate gradually to automatically release The gearbox switches to back-up mode: mode D that of other EAT8 gearboxes. the electric parking brake. is locked in third gear, the steering-mounted For more information on the Operation or the The vehicle moves off immediately. control paddles are inoperative, mode M is no Malfunctions of the EAT8 gearbox, refer to the With an automatic gearbox, never try to longer available. You may feel a significant jolt corresponding sections. start the engine by pushing the vehicle. on engaging reverse gear. This will not damage the gearbox. Gearbox selector positions P. Car park Stopping the vehicle Selector malfunction For parking the vehicle: the front wheels Whatever the state of the gearbox, when the are blocked. Minor malfunction ignition is switched off, mode P is engaged R. Reverse gear automatically and immediately. This warning lamp comes on, N. Neutral However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged accompanied by the display of a message For moving the vehicle with the ignition after a delay of 5 seconds (allowing for the and an audible signal. off: in certain car washing machines, process of putting the vehicle into free-wheeling Drive cautiously and visit a PEUGEOT dealer or when towing the vehicle, etc. mode). a qualified workshop. D/B. Automatic forward gear (D) or automatic Check that mode P has been engaged and In certain cases, the selector indicator lamps forward gear with regenerative braking that the electric parking brake was applied may no longer come on, but the gearbox state is (B) automatically; if not, apply it manually. still displayed on the instrument panel. The gearbox manages gear changes The corresponding indicator lamps in the Major malfunction according to the style of driving, the road selector and the electric parking brake This warning lamp comes on, profile and the vehicle load. With the control lever must be on, as well as those in the accompanied by the display of a regenerative braking function activated, instrument panel. message. the gearbox also controls braking when the accelerator pedal is released. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away from traffic, and call a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
105 Driving
Push selector N: neutral. Hill start assist Operation D1 to D8: automatic forward gear. B1 to B8: automatic forward gear with This system keeps your vehicle briefly stationary regenerative braking function activated. (for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill In all-electric driving, the gear engaged is not start, while you transfer your foot from the brake indicated. pedal to the accelerator pedal. The state of the gearbox remains displayed in This system is only active when: the instrument panel for a few seconds after – The vehicle is completely stationary, with your switching off the ignition. foot on the brake pedal. – Certain slope conditions are met.
Regenerative braking – The driver’s door is closed. The regenerative braking function emulates Do not leave the vehicle while it is being On an ascending slope, with the vehicle engine braking, slowing the vehicle with no held temporarily by hill start assist. stationary, the vehicle is held for a short time need to depress the brake pedal. The vehicle If someone needs to get out of the vehicle when you release the brake pedal: slows more quickly when the driver releases the with the engine running, apply the parking – provided you are in first gear or neutral with a
accelerator pedal. brake manually. After that, ensure that the manual gearbox. A. Button P When the accelerator pedal is released, parking brake indicator lamp and the indicator – provided you are in mode D or M with an To put the gearbox into Park mode. mechanical energy is recovered and used to lamp in the electric parking brake control automatic gearbox. P B. Unlock button partially recharge the battery. lever are on fixed. To unlock the gearbox and come out of P or ► While in mode D/B, pushing the pulse to change to R, with the foot on the brake selector backwards activates/deactivates the The hill start assist function cannot be pedal. function. deactivated. However, use of the parking Press and hold this button before pushing the The D on the instrument panel is replaced with brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its selector. a B. operation. C. Gearbox state indicator lamps (R, N, D/B) The state of the function is not saved when the ignition is switched off.
Displays in the instrument If the battery is almost fully charged, the panel braking effect when the accelerator pedal On a descending slope, with the vehicle is released may be limited. stationary and reverse gear engaged, the When the ignition is switched on, the status of vehicle is held for a short time when you the gearbox is displayed in the instrument panel: release the brake pedal. P: park. R: reverse.
106 Driving
Operation Malfunction 6 These warning lamps come on in the event of a malfunction.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. Active Suspension Control This suspension adapts itself to the following parameters: state and profile of the road, load
of the vehicle, driving style and selected driving On an ascending slope, with the vehicle mode. Pressing the control displays the modes on the stationary, the vehicle is held for a short time It is managed by a computer, which interprets instrument panel. when you release the brake pedal: the data transmitted by different sensors to When the message disappears, the selected – provided you are in first gear or neutral with a apply the optimal level of damping to each shock mode is activated and remains indicated on the manual gearbox. absorber. instrument panel (except NORMAL mode). – provided you are in mode or with an D M It offers three modes:Comfort , Normal and automatic gearbox. Sport. With petrol / Diesel engines The mode can be selected using the DRIVE Whenever the ignition is switched on, NORMAL MODE control on the central console. mode is selected by default. For more information on the Driving modes, ECO please refer to the corresponding section. This mode reduces fuel consumption, but restricts the performance of the heating and Driving modes air conditioning systems, without however The number and type of driving modes available deactivating them. depend on the vehicle’s engine and equipment. Free-wheeling in ECO mode: depending on
version, with the EAT8 gearbox, moving into On a descending slope, with the vehicle Driving modes are selected using the following "free-wheeling" is encouraged to slow the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the control: down without using engine braking. You can vehicle is held for a short time when you save fuel by anticipating the need to slow down release the brake pedal. and lifting your foot fully off the accelerator pedal.
107 Driving
COMFORT unavailable” is displayed in the instrument panel. In HYBRID mode, it is possible to drive in Operation The vehicle automatically changes to 100% electric mode if the battery charge level (with Active Suspension Control) HYBRID Depending on the driving situation and the mode. is sufficient and acceleration requirements are Allows more comfortable driving and softer vehicle's equipment, the system may advise The lighting of a blue LED under the interior moderate. suspension. skipping one or more gears. rear view mirror, visible from outside the vehicle, NORMAL When navigation is activated, the use Gear engagement recommendations are only confirms driving in mode. ELECTRIC optional. In fact, the configuration of the road, Restores the vehicle’s original settings. of HYBRID mode is advisable to optimise the traffic density and safety remain determining Together with Active Suspension Control, this The lighting of the LED can be electrical consumption. factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, mode offers the best compromise between deactivated by inserting the tip of a paper the driver remains responsible for deciding comfort and handling. clip type accessory into the hole under the SPORT mirror. whether or not to follow the system’s advice. SPORT Allows more dynamic driving to take advantage of the vehicle's maximum performance. This function cannot be deactivated. Conditions of activation Enables more dynamic driving, acting on the Electric power is used to supplement the petrol – Adequate battery charge level. Charging With an automatic gearbox, the system is power steering, accelerator and gear changes engine as long as there is energy left in the the vehicle after each drive is therefore only active in manual operation. with an automatic gearbox and the possibility of battery. recommended. The mode is displaying the vehicle’s dynamic settings on the ELECTRIC The information appears in the instrument available as long as there is power left in the COMFORT instrument panel. panel in the form of an arrow and the battery. MANUAL Depending on equipment. recommended gear. – Exterior temperature between 0°C and 45°C. Combines the HYBRID mode and Active Permanent "Manual" mode with an automatic Manually exiting the mode Suspension Control (controlled shock absorption The system adapts its gear shift gearbox and Full Park Assist. – Fully depress the accelerator pedal. option). recommendation according to the driving Enables manual gear changing using the – Select another mode. In COMFORT mode, the suspension favours soft conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the driver’s steering-mounted paddles. shock absorption to improve driving comfort on requirements (power, acceleration, braking, In case of non-use of the vehicle for a uneven surfaces. etc.). long period (several months), a restart of With hybrid engine The system never suggests: the petrol engine may occur even if the Each time the ignition is switched on, ELECTRIC For more information on Active – engaging first gear, battery is charged. mode is selected by default. Suspension Control, refer to the – engaging reverse. corresponding section. ELECTRIC HYBRID Allows 100% electric driving. The maximum Optimises the fuel consumption of the vehicle speed is approximately 84 mph (135 km/h). Stop & Start by managing the alternating or simultaneous Gear efficiency indicator When starting the vehicle, if the conditions do not operation of the two types of engine, The Stop & Start function puts the engine This system helps reduce fuel consumption by allow the activation or retention of ELECTRIC according to road conditions and driving style. temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during mode, the message “Electric mode currently recommending the most appropriate gear. phases when the vehicle is stopped (red lights,
108 Driving
Operation queues, etc.). The engine restarts automatically Function deactivated or malfunction. - START mode - as soon as the driver wishes to 6 Depending on the driving situation and the move off again. vehicle's equipment, the system may advise Opening the bonnet Primarily designed for urban use, the function skipping one or more gears. Before doing anything under the bonnet, is intended to reduce fuel consumption and Gear engagement recommendations are only deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid exhaust emissions as well as the noise level optional. In fact, the configuration of the road, any risk of injury caused by the engine when stationary. the traffic density and safety remain determining restarting automatically. The function does not affect the functionalities of factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the vehicle, in particular the braking. the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the system’s advice. Deactivation/Reactivation This function cannot be deactivated. The function is activated by default when the With an automatic gearbox, the system is ignition is switched on. Driving on flooded roads only active in manual operation. To deactivate/reactivate the function:
Before entering into a flooded area, it is The information appears in the instrument strongly recommended that you deactivate panel in the form of an arrow and the the Stop & Start system. recommended gear. For more information on Driving
recommendations, particularly on flooded The system adapts its gear shift roads, refer to the corresponding section. recommendation according to the driving conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the driver’s requirements (power, acceleration, braking, Operation etc.). ► Press the button. Main conditions for operation The system never suggests: A message in the instrument panel confirms the – engaging first gear, – The driver’s door must be closed. change of status. – engaging reverse. – The driver's seat belt must be fastened. When the function is deactivated, the orange – The state of charge of the battery must be indicator lamp is lit; if the engine was in standby, sufficient. Stop & Start it restarts immediately. – The temperature of the engine must be within Associated indicator lamps its nominal operating range. The Stop & Start function puts the engine – The outside temperature must be between Function activated. temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during 0°C and 35°C. phases when the vehicle is stopped (red lights,
109 Driving
Putting the engine into standby After the engine has restarted, STOP In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes (STOP mode) mode is not available until the vehicle for a few seconds, then goes off. The engine automatically goes into standby has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). as soon as the driver indicates the intention of Malfunctions stopping. During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode In the event of a malfunction, this warning – With a manual gearbox, at a speed below 2 is not available for a few seconds after lamp flashes for a few moments, then mph (3 km/h), when you place the gear lever in coming out of reverse gear or turning the remains on, accompanied by an onscreen neutral and release the clutch pedal. steering wheel. message. – With an automatic gearbox: Have the vehicle checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. • at a speed below 12 mph (20 km/h) for Engine restarting (START mode) BlueHDi versions, or below 0.6 mph (1 km/h) The vehicle stalls in STOP mode The engine automatically restarts as soon as the for PureTech 180 and 225 versions, when driver indicates the intention of moving off again. All of the instrument panel warning lamps come you brake hard with the gear selector in ► With a manual gearbox: with the clutch on if there is a fault. mode D, pedal fully depressed. ► Switch off the ignition then start the engine • with the vehicle stationary, when you place ► With an automatic gearbox: again with the "START/STOP" button. the gear selector in mode N. • With the selector in position D or M: with the The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V Time counter brake pedal released. battery of specific technology and A time counter adds up the time spent in standby • With the selector in position N and the brake specification. during a journey. It resets to zero every time the pedal released: with the selector at D or M. All work concerning the battery must be ignition is switched on. • With the selector in position P and the brake carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, Special cases: qualified workshop. D or M. The engine will not go into standby if all of the • Reverse gear engaged. conditions for operation are not met and in the Special cases following cases. Under-inflation detection – Steep slope (ascending or descending). The engine restarts automatically if all the This system automatically checks the pressures – Needed to maintain a comfortable temperature operating conditions are met again and in the of the tyres while driving. in the passenger compartment. following cases. It compares the information given by the wheel – Demisting active. – With a manual gearbox: vehicle speed speed sensors with reference values, which In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes exceeds 2.5 mph (4 km/h), must be reinitialised every time the tyre for a few seconds, then goes off. – With an automatic gearbox, in mode N, vehicle pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. speed exceeds 0.6 mph (1 km/h).
110 Driving
The system triggers an alert as soon as it Snow chains Reinitialisation detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or The system does not have to be 6 Reinitialise the system after adjusting one or more tyres. reinitialised after fitting or removing snow more tyre pressures and after changing one or chains. Under-inflation detection does not more wheels. replace the need for vigilance on the part Before reinitialising the system, make of the driver. Under-inflation alert sure that the pressures of the four tyres This system does not avoid the need to This is signalled by the fixed illumination are correct for the conditions of use of the regularly check the tyre pressures (including of this warning lamp, accompanied by an vehicle and conform to the values written on the spare wheel) as well as before a long audible signal and, depending on equipment, the the tyre pressure label. journey. display of a message. Check the pressures of the four tyres before Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly ► Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive performing the reinitialisation. in adverse conditions (heavy load, high steering movements and avoid sudden braking. The system does not advise if a pressure is speed, long journey): ► Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do incorrect at the time of reinitialisation. – worsens road-holding. so. – lengthens braking distances. With the vehicle stationary, the system is – causes premature wear of the tyres. The loss of pressure detected does not reinitialised via the Driving / – increases fuel consumption. always cause visible bulging of the tyre. Vehicle touch screen menu.. Do not rely on just a visual check.
The inflation pressures defined for the ► Using a compressor, such as the one in Malfunction vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure the temporary puncture repair kit, check the These warning lamps come on in label. pressures of the four tyres when cold. the event of a malfunction. For more information on the Identification ► If it is not possible to make this check A message appears, accompanied by an audible markings, refer to the corresponding section. immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed. signal. ► In the event of a puncture, use the In this case, the tyre under-inflation monitoring Checking tyre pressures temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel function is no longer performed. This check should be done when the (depending on equipment). Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or dealer or a qualified workshop. The alert is kept active until the system is after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at reinitialised. moderate speeds). Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures shown on the label.
111 Driving
Driving and manoeuvring the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, When reverse gear is engaged, an audible mirrors. reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors aids - General alternating shade and light) can also impair may be dirty. recommendations Radar detection performance. A front or rear impact to the vehicle can The operation of the radar as well as the In the event of a windscreen replacement, upset the sensors’ settings, which is not Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in associated functions may be impaired through contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified always detected by the system: distance any circumstances, replace the need for the accumulation of dirt (mud, frost, etc.), in workshop to recalibrate the camera; measurements may be distorted. vigilance on the part of the driver. certain difficult weather conditions (very heavy otherwise, the operation of the associated The sensors do not systematically detect The driver must comply with the Highway rain, snow) or if the bumper is damaged. driving aids may be disrupted. obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in If the front bumper is to be repainted, contact or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). all circumstances and must be able to retake a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop; Other cameras Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind control of it at all times. The driver must adapt certain types of paint could interfere with the The images from the camera(s) spots may not be detected or may no longer the speed to climactic conditions, traffic and operation of the radar. displayed on the touch screen or on the be detected during the manoeuvre. Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound
the state of the road. instrument panel may be distorted by the It is the driver's responsibility to constantly relief. waves: pedestrians may not be detected. check the traffic, to assess the relative In the presence of areas in shade, or in distances and speeds of other vehicles and to conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate Maintenance
anticipate their movements before indicating lighting, the image may be darkened and with Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and and changing lane. lower contrast. the field of vision of the cameras regularly. The systems cannot exceed the limits of the Driving aids camera Obstacles may appear further away than they When washing your vehicle at high pressure, laws of physics. This camera and its associated functions actually are. direct the spray from at least 30 cm away may be impaired or not work if the windscreen from the radar, sensors and cameras. area in front of the camera is dirty, misty, Driving aids Sensors frosty, covered with snow, damaged or You should hold the steering wheel The operation of the sensors as well as Mats masked by a sticker. with both hands, always use the interior and the associated functions may be disturbed The use of mats not approved by On versions with camera alone, this message exterior rear view mirrors, always keep the by sound interference such as that emitted PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of indicates to you that the camera is obstructed: feet close to the pedals and take a break by noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, the speed limiter or cruise control. "Driving aids camera: visibility limited, see every two hours. pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: user guide". snow or dead leaves on the road or in the ► ensure that the mat is secured correctly, In humid and cold weather, demist the event of damaged bumpers and mirrors. ► never fit one mat on top of another. Manoeuvring aids windscreen regularly. The driver must always check the Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, surroundings of the vehicle before and during heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle
112 Driving
When reverse gear is engaged, an audible Units of speed You should update your navigation signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors Ensure that the units of speed displayed mapping regularly in order to receive 6 may be dirty. on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are accurate speed limit information from the A front or rear impact to the vehicle can those for the country you are driving in. system. upset the sensors’ settings, which is not If this is not the case, when the vehicle is always detected by the system: distance stationary, set the display to the required – Signs indicating an intersection area detected measurements may be distorted. units of speed so that it complies with what is by the camera: The sensors do not systematically detect authorised locally. Sign detected Suggested speed obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) In case of doubt, contact a PEUGEOT dealer (calculated) or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). or a qualified workshop. Entry into an Without PEUGEOT Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind intersection area Connect Nav spots may not be detected or may no longer Example: 10 mph or 20 km/h be detected during the manoeuvre. Speed Limit Recognition (depending on Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound the units of the waves: pedestrians may not be detected. and Recommendation instrument panel) Refer to the General recommendations on the With PEUGEOT Maintenance use of driving and manoeuvring aids. Connect Nav Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and Display of the the field of vision of the cameras regularly. speed in force in the When washing your vehicle at high pressure, country in which you direct the spray from at least 30 cm away are driving. from the radar, sensors and cameras. – Certain qualifier plates are detected by the camera: Mats The use of mats not approved by
PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of This system displays the maximum authorised the speed limiter or cruise control. speed in the instrument panel, according to To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: the speed limits in the country in which you are ► ensure that the mat is secured correctly, driving, using: ► never fit one mat on top of another. – Speed limit signs detected by the camera. – Speed limit details from the navigation system mapping.
113 Driving
For the system to operate correctly when Information displayed on Qualifier plate Display of the Qualifier plate Display of the you change country, the units for speed in detected speed associated detected speed associated the instrument panel must be those for the the instrument panel
with the qualifier with the qualifier country you are driving in. plate plate
Speed limit in rain If the wiper control Speed limit for 56 mph (90 km/h) The automatic reading of road signs is a Examples: stalk is in the vehicles whose (for example) driving aid system and does not always
"intermittent wipe" gross vehicle display speed limits correctly. or "automatic wipe" weight or gross The speed limit signs present on the road
position (in order train weight is less always take priority over the display by the to activate the rain than 3.5 tonnes system.
sensor): The system is designed to detect signs that 1. Detected speed limit indication 68 mph (110 km/h) conform to the Vienna Convention on road or (for example) signs. End of speed limit indication Speed limit in snow If the exterior 2.
Speed limit if If an approved towing Example: temperature is below
towing device is fixed to the Specific speed limits, such as those for 3 °C: vehicle: heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. 19 mph (30 km/h)
56 mph (90 km/h) The display of the speed limit in the
(for example) (for example) instrument panel is updated as you pass with a "snowflake" a speed limit sign intended for cars (light Speed limit 43 mph (70 km/h) symbol The system is active but is not detecting speed vehicles). applicable over a (for example) limit information. Speed limit at 19 mph (30 km/h) certain distance certain times (for example) Example: Example: with a "clock" symbol Activation / Deactivation By default, the system is automatically activated
at every engine start.
It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch On detecting speed limit information, the system screen menu. The units for the speed limit (mph or displays the value.
km/h) depend on the country you are driving in. This should be taken into account so that you observe the speed limit.
114 Driving
Information displayed on Recommendation 6 the instrument panel
In the case of suggested maximum speeds, the first time the vehicle exceeds the suggested
speed by more than 3 mph (5 km/h) (e.g. 59 In addition to Speed Limit Recognition and mph (95 km/h)), the speed is displayed flashing Recommendation, the driver can select the for 10 seconds. speed displayed as a speed setting for the speed limiter or cruise control using the speed limiter or Operating limits
cruise control memorisation button. The system does not take account of reduced 1. Detected speed limit indication If rain is detected, the system will suggest to the speed limits, especially those imposed in the or driver a speed setting lower than the speed read/ following cases: 2. End of speed limit indication obtained from the map in order to adapt to the – Atmospheric pollution. weather conditions (example: on a motorway,
– Towing. the suggested speed will be 60 mph (97 km/h) – Driving with a space-saver type spare wheel instead of 70 mph (112 km/h). or snow chains fitted. – Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture For more information on the Speed repair kit. limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive The system is active but is not detecting speed – Young drivers. cruise control, refer to the corresponding limit information. sections.
The system may not display the speed limit if it does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset period and in the following situations: Steering mounted controls – Road signs that are obstructed, non-standard, damaged or bent.
– Obsolete or incorrect maps. On detecting speed limit information, the system displays the value.
1. Speed limiter/cruise control mode selection
115 Driving
2. Memorise the speed setting Depending on the road conditions, several The actual road signs always take priority Steering mounted control speeds may be displayed. over the display from the system. ► Press button 2once to save the suggested The signs must comply with the Vienna Information displayed on the speed value. Convention on road signs.
instrument panel A message is displayed to confirm the request.
► Press button 2again to confirm and save the Activation / Deactivation new speed setting. The display then reverts to its previous state. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. 3. Speed limit indication 4. Speed memorisation prompt Extended Traffic Sign 5. Current speed setting Recognition Speed limiter Refer to the General recommendations on the Refer to the General recommendations on the Memorising the speed use of driving and manoeuvring aids. use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
This system prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the
driver (speed setting). 1. ON (LIMIT position) / OFF The speed limiter is switched on manually. 2. Reduce the speed setting
The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h). This additional system recognises these road 3. Increase the speed setting ► Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. The speed setting remains in the system signs and displays them in the instrument panel 4. Pause / resume speed limiter with the speed memory when the ignition is switched off. The speed limiter/cruise control information is if the appropriate display mode is selected. setting previously stored displayed. One-way street: if you start driving the wrong 5. Depending on version: Upon detecting a sign suggesting a new speed way down a one-way street, an alert message, Display of speed thresholds recorded using setting, the system displays the value and including the sign's symbol, is displayed in the Memorising speeds "MEM" flashes for a few seconds, prompting you instrument panel (request to check the traffic or to save it as the new speed setting. direction). Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit If there is a difference of less than 6 mph Other signs: when approaching one of these Recognition and Recommendation (MEM (9 km/h) between the speed setting and signs, the sign’s symbol is displayed in the display) instrument panel. the speed displayed by the Speed Limit For more information on Memorising speeds Recognition and Recommendation, the or on the Speed Limit Recognition and "MEM" symbol is not displayed. Recommendation, refer to the corresponding sections.
116 Driving
Steering mounted control Information displayed on ► If the speed setting is suitable (last speed setting programmed in the system), press 6 the instrument panel button 4 to switch the speed limiter on.
► Pressing button 4 again temporarily interrupts the function (pause).
When the speed setting remains below the vehicle's speed for a prolonged period of time, an audible warning is emitted.
Adjusting the limit speed 6. Speed limiter on/pause 7. Speed limiter mode selected setting 8. Programmed speed value You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit order to set the speed. recognition and recommendation system To modify the limit speed setting based on the
(depending on version) vehicle’s current speed: 1. ON (LIMIT position) / OFF ► Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the 2. Reduce the speed setting value in steps of + or - 1 mph (1.6 km/h). 3. Increase the speed setting Switching on / pausing ► Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the 4. Pause / resume speed limiter with the speed value in steps of + or - 5 mph (8 km/h). setting previously stored To change the limit speed setting using 5. Depending on version: memorised speeds, via the touch screen: Display of speed thresholds recorded using ► Press button to display the memorised 5 Memorising speeds speed settings. or ► Turn knob 1 to the "LIMIT" position to select ► Press the touch screen button for the desired Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit speed limiter mode; the function is paused. speed setting. Recognition and Recommendation (MEM The selection screen closes after a few display) moments. For more information on Memorising speeds This setting becomes the new limit speed.
or on the Speed Limit Recognition and To modify the cruise speed setting based on the Recommendation, refer to the corresponding speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition sections.
117 Driving
and Recommendation, as shown on the conditions allow running at a constant speed – On slippery or flooded roads. instrument panel: and keeping an adequate safety distance. – In poor weather conditions. ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed Remain vigilant when the cruise control is – Driving on a speed circuit.
to confirm the memorisation request. activated. If you hold one of the speed setting – Driving on a rolling road. ► Press button 5 again to save the suggested Once the speed of the vehicle returns to the modification buttons, a very rapid change in – When using snow chains, non-slip covers speed. programmed setting, the speed limiter functions the speed of your vehicle may occur. or studded tyres. The speed is immediately shown on the again: the display of the speed setting becomes When descending a steep hill, the cruise instrument panel as the new speed setting. fixed again. control system cannot prevent the vehicle from exceeding the set speed. Brake if Programmable cruise Temporarily exceeding the necessary to control the speed of your Switching off control speed setting ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "OFF" position: vehicle. On steep climbs or when towing, the set Refer to the ► Press the accelerator pedal down fully. the display of information on the speed limiter General recommendations on the disappears. speed may not be reached or maintained. use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to Cruise control - particular recommendations. Malfunction Exceeding the programmed speed This system automatically keeps the setting vehicle’s speed at the cruise value
You can temporarily exceed the speed programmed by the driver (speed setting), The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and setting by pressing the accelerator pedal (the without using the accelerator pedal. the displayed speed setting flashes. programmed speed flashes). The cruise control is switched on manually.
► Release the accelerator pedal to return to To return to the speed setting, release the It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph below the programmed speed. The display of dashes (flashing then fixed) accelerator pedal (when the set speed is (40 km/h). When the limit speed is exceeded but this is not indicates a fault with the speed limiter. reached again, the displayed speed stops With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher must due to action by the driver (in case of a steep Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a flashing). be engaged. slope, for example), an audible signal triggers qualified workshop. With an automatic gearbox, mode D or second immediately. Operating limits gear or higher in mode M must be engaged. Never use the system in the following On a steep descent or in the event of Cruise control - particular The cruise control remains active after situations: sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will changing gear, regardless of the gearbox recommendations – In an urban area with the risk of not be able to prevent the vehicle from type, on engines fitted with Stop & Start. pedestrians crossing the road. exceeding the speed setting. For the safety of everyone, only use the – In heavy traffic (except versions with the Brake if necessary to control the speed of cruise control where the driving Switching off the ignition cancels any Stop & Go function). your vehicle. speed setting. – On winding or steep roads.
118 Driving
– On slippery or flooded roads. Steering mounted control Information displayed on – In poor weather conditions. 6 – Driving on a speed circuit. the instrument panel
– Driving on a rolling road.
– When using snow chains, non-slip covers or studded tyres.
Programmable cruise control 6. Cruise control pause/resume Refer to the General recommendations on the ON ( position) / OFF 1. CRUISE 7. Cruise control mode selection use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to Activation of cruise control at the current 2. 8. Speed setting value Cruise control - particular recommendations. speed / decrease speed setting 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit This system automatically keeps the 3. Activation of cruise control at the current recognition and recommendation system vehicle’s speed at the cruise value speed / increase speed setting (depending on version) programmed by the driver (speed setting), 4. Pausing / resumption of cruise control with without using the accelerator pedal. the speed setting previously stored The cruise control is switched on manually. 5. Depending on version: Switching on/pausing
It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph Display of speed thresholds recorded using (40 km/h). Memorising speeds With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher must or be engaged. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit With an automatic gearbox, mode D or second Recognition and Recommendation (MEM gear or higher in mode M must be engaged. display) ► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position to select cruise control mode; the function is The cruise control remains active after For more information on Memorising speeds paused. changing gear, regardless of the gearbox or on the Speed Limit Recognition and type, on engines fitted with Stop & Start. Recommendation, refer to the corresponding sections. Switching off the ignition cancels any
speed setting.
119 Driving
► Press button 2 or 3 to activate cruise control Pressing and holding button 2 or Switching off Changing a speed setting and save a speed setting when the vehicle has 3 results in a rapid change in the speed ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "OFF" position: Speed settings can be activated, reached the desired speed; the vehicle’s current of the vehicle. the cruise control information disappears from deactivated, selected and changed in the speed is saved as the speed setting. the screen. Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. ► Release the accelerator pedal. As a precaution, we recommend setting
a cruise speed fairly close to the current Malfunction "MEM" button speed of your vehicle, to avoid any sudden acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle.
To change the cruise speed setting using
► Pressing button 4 temporarily pauses the memorised speed settings and from the touch
function. screen: The display of dashes (flashing then fixed) ► Pressing button 4 again restores operation of ► Press button to display the memorised 5 indicates a malfunction with the cruise control the cruise control (ON). speed settings. system. ► Press the touch screen button for the desired Operation of the cruise control can also Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a speed setting. With this button, you can select a memorised be paused temporarily: qualified workshop. The selection screen closes after a few speed setting to use with the speed limiter or the – by pressing the brake pedal. moments. programmable cruise control. – automatically, if the electronic stability This setting becomes the new cruise speed. For more information on the Speed limiter control (ESC) system is triggered. Memorising speeds or Cruise control, refer to the corresponding To modify the cruise speed setting using the This function, used only for the speed limiter section. speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition and programmable cruise control, lets you Modifying the cruise speed and Recommendation shown on the instrument save speed settings that will subsequently be setting panel: proposed for the purpose of configuring these Drive Assist Plus ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed Cruise control must be active. two systems. to confirm the memorisation request. Only available on versions with automatic To modify the cruise speed setting, based on the You can memorise multiple speed settings for gearbox. ► Press button 5 again to save the suggested current speed of the vehicle: each of the two systems. speed. This system automatically adjusts the speed and ► Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the By default, some speed settings are already The speed is immediately shown on the corrects the trajectory, using the Adaptive Cruise value in steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h). memorised. instrument panel as the new speed setting. Control with Stop & Go function in conjunction ► Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the As a safety measure, the driver must only with the Lane Positioning Assist. value in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h). change speed settings when stationary. These two functions must be activated and in operation.
120 Driving
Changing a speed setting This system is especially suitable for driving on With the Stop & Go function, the system motorways and main roads. manages the braking until the vehicle comes to a 6 Speed settings can be activated, For more information on Adaptive Cruise complete stop and the restarting of the vehicle.
deactivated, selected and changed in the Control and Lane Positioning Assist, refer to Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. the corresponding sections. "MEM" button The system assists the driver by acting
on the steering, acceleration and braking, within the limits of the laws of physics and the To do so, it has a camera located at the top of capabilities of the vehicle. Certain road the windscreen and, depending on version, a
infrastructure elements or vehicles present on radar located in the front bumper. the road may not be properly seen or may be Primarily designed for driving on main poorly interpreted by the camera and radar, roads and motorways, this system only resulting in an unexpected change in works with moving vehicles driving in the
direction, a lack of steering correction and/or same direction as your vehicle. With this button, you can select a memorised inappropriate management of acceleration or speed setting to use with the speed limiter or the braking. If the driver operates a direction indicator programmable cruise control. to overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise For more information on the Speed limiter control allows the vehicle to temporarily or Cruise control, refer to the corresponding Adaptive Cruise Control approach the vehicle in front to assist the section. Refer to the General recommendations on the overtaking manoeuvre, without ever use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to exceeding the speed setting. Drive Assist Plus Cruise control - particular recommendations. This system automatically maintains the speed Only available on versions with automatic Some vehicles present on the road may of your vehicle at a value which you set (speed gearbox. not be properly seen or may be poorly setting), while keeping a safe distance from the This system automatically adjusts the speed and interpreted by the camera and/or radar (e.g. a vehicle in front (target vehicle), and which has corrects the trajectory, using the Adaptive Cruise lorry), which may lead to a poor assessment been set beforehand by the driver. The system Control with Stop & Go function in conjunction of the distances and lead to the vehicle automatically manages the acceleration and with the Lane Positioning Assist. inappropriately accelerating or braking. deceleration of the vehicle. These two functions must be activated and in With the Stop function, the system manages operation. the braking until the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
121 Driving
Steering mounted control Switching on cruise control and setting • when the speed of the engine goes below the speed 1100 rpm with a manual gearbox. With a manual gearbox, your speed must be • by triggering of the ESC system. between 19 and 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h). With an EAT6 gearbox, following braking that With an automatic EAT6 gearbox, your speed has brought the vehicle to a complete stop, must be between 1 and 112 mph (2 and the system holds the vehicle stationary; cruise 180 km/h). control is paused. The driver should depress With an automatic EAT8 gearbox, your speed the accelerator pedal to move off, then, when must be between 0 and 112 mph (0 and above 1 mph (2 km/h), reactivate the system by 180 km/h). pressing one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4. ► Press button 2 or 3: the current speed With an EAT8 gearbox, following braking that 1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF becomes the speed setting (minimum 19 mph has brought the vehicle to a complete stop, if the 2. Activation of cruise control at the current (30 km/h)) and cruise control is immediately traffic conditions do not allow the vehicle to begin speed / decrease speed setting activated (green display). moving again within 3 seconds of stopping, 3. Activation of cruise control at the current ► Press 3 to increase or 2 to decrease the press button 4 or the accelerator pedal to move speed / increase speed setting speed setting (steps of 5 mph (km/h) if held off. 4. Pause / resume cruise control with the speed pressed). If the driver takes no action after the vehicle setting previously saved has been stopped, the electric parking brake is Confirmation of the restarting of the vehicle Pressing and holding button 2 or applied automatically after about 5 minutes. after automatic stop (versions with Stop & Go 3 results in a rapid change in the speed function) of the vehicle. Cruise control remains active after 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit changing gear, regardless of the gearbox Recognition and Recommendation (MEM Pausing / resumption of cruise control type. display) ► Press 4 or depress the brake pedal. To 6. Display and adjustment of the distance pause cruise control, it is also possible to: When the driver attempts to reactivate cruise control, after the function has been setting to the vehicle in front • shift from mode D to N; • depress the clutch pedal for more than 10 paused, the message "Activation not possible, Use seconds; unsuitable conditions" is briefly displayed if • press the electric parking brake control. reactivation is not possible (safety conditions Activating the system (pause) not met). ► Press 4 to restart cruise control. Cruise ► With the engine running, turn the thumbwheel control may have been paused automatically: 1 downwards to the CRUISE position. Cruise • when the speed of the vehicle goes below 19 control is ready to operate (grey display). mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox.
122 Driving
Changing the programmed speed setting Information displayed on Messages and alerts with the Speed Limit Recognition and 6 the instrument panel To benefit from the following information on the Recommendation function instrument panel, select the " " display The following information can be seen on the DRIVING ► Press 5 to accept the speed suggested by mode. instrument panel in "DRIVING" display mode. the function on the instrument panel, then press The display of these messages or alerts again to confirm. is not sequential. To prevent sudden acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle, select a "Cruise control paused" or "Cruise control speed setting relatively close to the vehicle's suspended" following a brief acceleration current speed. by the driver. "Cruise control active", no vehicle Changing the inter-vehicle distance detected. "Cruise control paused", vehicle detected. ► Press to display the distance setting 6 7. Vehicle detected by the system (full symbol) thresholds ("Distant", "Normal" or "Close"), then 8. Cruise control active (colour not grey) "Cruise control active", vehicle detected. press again to select a threshold. 9. Speed setting value After a few seconds, the option is accepted and 10. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit "Take back control" (orange). will be memorised when the ignition is switched Recognition and Recommendation off. 11. Vehicle held stationary (versions with ► Brake or accelerate, depending on the Temporarily exceeding the speed setting automatic gearbox) context.
► Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Distance "Take back control" (red). monitoring and cruise control are deactivated while acceleration is maintained. "Cruise control ► Take back control of the vehicle suspended" is displayed. immediately: the system cannot manage the Deactivating the system current driving situation. 12. Inter-vehicle distance setting "Activation not possible, conditions ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 upwards to the OFF 13. Position of the vehicle detected by the unsuitable". The system refuses to position. system activate cruise control, as the necessary conditions are not fulfilled. Stop function "Cruise control paused" (for a few seconds).
123 Driving
The system has brought the vehicle to a – Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. – Excessively sharp deceleration by the vehicle Active Lane Keeping complete stop and is holding it immobilised: – Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, in front of you. cruise control is paused. etc.). Assist
The driver must accelerate to move off again, Refer to the General recommendations on the then reactivate cruise control. use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Stop & Go function "To move off again, press the accelerator pedal or press
– When a vehicle cuts in sharply between your the II button” (button 4). The system has brought the vehicle to a – Vehicles crossing your lane. vehicle and the one in front.
– Vehicles driving in the opposite direction. complete stop. Pay particular attention: Situations in which the driver must pause the Within 3 seconds, the vehicle gradually and – When motorcycles are present and Using a camera located at the top of the cruise control system: windscreen, the system identifies lane markings automatically begins moving again. when there are vehicles staggered across the After 3 seconds, the driver must accelerate or traffic lane. and steers the vehicle inside this lane to keep it press button 4 to move off again. – When entering a tunnel or crossing a in the lateral position chosen by the driver. bridge. This function is primarily suitable for driving on While the vehicle is immobilised, the motorways and main roads. following recommendations apply: – Do not open doors. If any of the following malfunctions Conditions for operation – Do not drop off or pick up passengers. occurs, do not use the system: – Adaptive Cruise Control active. – Do not engage reverse gear. – Following an impact on the windscreen – Traffic lane marked out by lines on both sides. – Vehicles in a tight bend. close to the camera or on the front bumper – ESC system operational. – When approaching a roundabout. (versions with radar). When moving off again, watch out for – ASR system activated. – Brake lamps not working. cyclists, pedestrians and animals, as – No trailer detected. they may not be detected properly. – No 'space-saver' spare wheel in use. If the vehicle has undergone any of the – Vehicle not subject to strong lateral g-forces. following modifications, do not use the – Direction indicators not activated. Operating limits system:
Cruise control operates by day and night, in fog – Carrying long objects on roof bars. or moderate rainfall. – When following a narrow vehicle. – Towing. Certain situations cannot be managed by the Reactivate cruise control when conditions permit. – Front end of the vehicle modified (for system and require driver intervention. Situations in which the driver is prompted to example by adding long-range headlamps or Elements not detected by the system: immediately resume control: painting the front bumper).
124 Driving
Active Lane Keeping Activation/Deactivation The system status is saved when the ignition is switched off. 6 Assist Refer to the General recommendations on the Cruise control
use of driving and manoeuvring aids. The driver must hold the steering wheel properly. When cruise control is activated, the symbol is displayed in green: by small steering actions, the system directs the vehicle and keeps it in the position chosen by the driver, in the traffic lane.
► With the Adaptive Cruise Control with Stop & This position is not necessarily the centre of the lane. Using a camera located at the top of the Go function activated, press this button. The driver can feel movements in the steering windscreen, the system identifies lane markings The action is confirmed by: wheel. and steers the vehicle inside this lane to keep it – The indicator lamp in the button lighting up The driver can change the position of the vehicle in the lateral position chosen by the driver. green. at any time, by turning the steering wheel, which This function is primarily suitable for driving on – The following symbol being displayed on the suspends the function. The driver positions the motorways and main roads. instrument panel. The colour of the symbol on the instrument panel vehicle where they wish to in the lane. When Conditions for operation depends on the operating status of the system: the driver feels that the vehicle’s position is (grey colour) appropriate, they maintain it until the function – Adaptive Cruise Control active. One or more operating conditions is not is reactivated. The system regains control by – Traffic lane marked out by lines on both sides. met; the system is paused. regulating on the new defined position. – ESC system operational. (green colour) – ASR system activated. All operating conditions are met; the Pausing/Suspending the – No trailer detected. system is active. – No 'space-saver' spare wheel in use. system (orange colour) – Vehicle not subject to strong lateral g-forces. System malfunction. The driver must act promptly if they – Direction indicators not activated. If the driver no longer wishes to use the system believe that the traffic conditions or the for a while, they can deactivate it by pressing the state of the road surface require their button again. intervention, by moving the steering wheel to The indicator lamp in the button goes off and the temporarily suspend system operation. Any symbol disappears from the instrument panel. action on the brake pedal that results in cruise
125 Driving
control being paused will also cause the the steering wheel, you must reactivate it by In response to action by the driver: system to be paused. pressing the button again. suspension – Activation of the direction indicators. If the system detects that the driver is not Automatic pause – Travelling outside the lane limits. holding the wheel firmly enough, it – Triggering of the ESC. – Too tight a grip on the steering wheel or triggers a series of gradual alerts and then – Prolonged failure to detect one of the lane limit dynamic action on the steering wheel. deactivates itself if there is no response from markings. In this case, the active lane departure – Action on the brake pedal (resulting in a pause the driver. warning function can take over, and the system until cruise control is reactivated) or accelerator will reactivate itself once the operating conditions pedal (suspension for as long as the pedal is If the function is suspended due to the are again met. depressed). prolonged release of the force holding – Pausing of the cruise control. – Deactivation of the ASR. Driving situations and related alerts The tables below describe the displays associated with the main driving situations. The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments thumbwheel
Off CRUISE Cruise control paused; lane positioning assist not active.
(grey) (grey)
Off CRUISE Cruise control active; lane positioning assist not active.
(green) (grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus active, operates normally (correction is executed at the steering
wheel). (green) (green)
126 Driving
Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments 6 thumbwheel
Green CRUISE 70 Drive Assist Plus paused.
(grey) (grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus active; not all conditions required for lane positioning assist have
been met. (green)/(grey) (grey)
Green OFF or LIMIT Cruise control not active; not all conditions required for lane positioning assist have
been met. (grey) (grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus suspended: cruise control and lane positioning assist are suspended.
(green)/(grey) (grey)
Messages Driving situations "Activate cruise control to use the lane positioning assist system" Activation of lane positioning assist while cruise control is not active. "Unsuitable conditions, Activation on stand-by" Activation of lane positioning assist while not all conditions are met. "Keep your hands on the steering wheel" Prolonged driving without holding the steering wheel, holding it improperly or without applying any force. "Hold the steering wheel" Actual or imminent loss of lane positioning assist. "Retake control" Simultaneous loss of cruise control and lane positioning assist.
127 Driving
Operating limits – Driving on racing circuits. below 0.5 m tall and objects on the road are This may cause a slight noise and a slight – Driving on a rolling road. not necessarily detected. sensation of deceleration. The Lane Keeping Assist system may issue an alert when the vehicle is This system is comprised of three functions: travelling in a long straight lane on a smooth Malfunction – Distance Alert. Deactivation / Activation road surface even if the driver is holding the A system malfunction is indicated – Intelligent emergency braking assistance. By default, the system is automatically activated steering wheel properly. by the Service warning lamp – Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency at every engine start. coming on and this (orange) symbol, braking). It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch
The system may fail to operate or may produce accompanied by an alert message and an screen menu. unsuitable corrections to the steering in the audible signal. Deactivation of the system is signalled by following situations: the illumination of this warning lamp, – Poor visibility (insufficient road lighting, accompanied by the display of a message. snowfall, rain, fog). Active Safety Brake – Dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, with Distance Alert and Operating conditions and low sun, reflections on a wet road surface, leaving a tunnel, alternating light and shade). Intelligent emergency limits – Windscreen area in front of the camera being ESC system in working order. braking assistance ASR system activated. dirty, misted up, frost-covered, snow-covered, Refer to the General recommendations on the Seat belts fastened for all passengers. damaged or masked by a sticker. The vehicle has a multifunctional camera located use of driving and manoeuvring aids. Stabilised speed on unwinding roads. – Lane markings eroded, partially hidden (snow, at the top of the windscreen and, depending on In the following cases, deactivating the system mud) or multiple (roadworks, surface joints). version, a radar located in the front bumper. – Travelling in a tight bend. via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: This system does not avoid the need for – Winding roads. – Towing a trailer. vigilance on the part of the driver. – Presence of a tarmac joint on the road. – Carrying long objects on roof bars. This system: This system is designed to assist the driver – Vehicles with snow chains fitted. The system must not be activated in the – warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of and improve road safety. – Before using an automatic car wash, with the following situations: collision with the vehicle in front, a pedestrian or, It is the driver's responsibility to continuously engine running. – Driving with a "space-saver" type spare depending on version, a cyclist. monitor the state of the traffic, observing the – Before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in wheel. – reduces the vehicle's speed to avoid a driving regulations. a workshop. – When towing, especially with an collision or limit its severity. – Towed vehicle, engine running. unconnected or unapproved trailer. The system also takes motorcyclists and As soon as the system detects a – Following impact to the windscreen close to – Poor weather conditions. animals into account; however, animals potential obstacle, it prepares the braking the detection camera. – Driving on slippery road surfaces (risk of circuit in case automatic braking is needed. aquaplaning, snow, ice).
128 Driving
This may cause a slight noise and a slight The system is automatically deactivated The last threshold selected is memorised when sensation of deceleration. after the use of certain "space-saver" the ignition is switched off. 6 type spare wheels is detected (smaller diameter). Operation Deactivation / Activation The system is automatically deactivated Depending on the degree of risk of collision By default, the system is automatically activated after detection of a fault with the brake pedal detected by the system and the alert trigger at every engine start. switch or with at least two brake lamps. threshold chosen by the driver, several different It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch levels of alert may be triggered and displayed in screen menu. It is possible that warnings are not given, the instrument panel. Deactivation of the system is signalled by are given too late or seem unjustified. The system takes account of the vehicle the illumination of this warning lamp, The driver must always stay in control of the dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the one accompanied by the display of a message. vehicle and be prepared to react at any time in front, the environmental conditions and the to avoid an accident. operation of the vehicle (actions on the pedals, Operating conditions and the steering wheel, etc.) to trigger the alert at the best moment. limits After an impact, the function : visual alert only, ESC system in working order. automatically stops operating. Contact a Level 1 (orange) indicating that the vehicle in front is very ASR system activated. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to close. Seat belts fastened for all passengers. have the system checked. Stabilised speed on unwinding roads. The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. In the following cases, deactivating the system Level 2 (red): visual and audible alert, via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: Distance Alert indicating that a collision is imminent. – Towing a trailer. This function warns the driver that their vehicle is The message "Brake!" is displayed. – Carrying long objects on roof bars. at risk of a collision with the vehicle in front, or a Level 3: in some cases, a vibration alert in the – Vehicles with snow chains fitted. pedestrian or cyclist present in their traffic lane. form of micro-braking can be given, confirming – Before using an automatic car wash, with the the risk of collision. Modifying the alert trigger threshold engine running. Where the speed of your vehicle is too – Before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in This trigger threshold determines the sensitivity high approaching another vehicle, the a workshop. with which the function warns of the risk of first level of alert may not be displayed: the – Towed vehicle, engine running. collision. level 2 alert may be displayed directly. – Following impact to the windscreen close to The threshold is set via the Driving / Important: the level 1 alert is not displayed the detection camera. Vehicle touch screen menu. when there is a stationary obstacle or when ► Select one of the three pre-defined thresholds: "Far", "Normal" or "Close".
129 Driving
the "Close" trigger threshold has been driver does not react quickly enough and does steering wheel and/or sharply pressing the These systems are in no way designed selected. not operate the vehicle's brakes. accelerator pedal. to keep the driver awake or to prevent It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. Intelligent emergency collision where the driver fails to react. Operation of the function may be felt by It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling slight vibration in the brake pedal. tired. braking assistance Operation If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid a The system operates under the following automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 Activation / Deactivation collision, this system will supplement the braking, conditions: seconds. It is set via the / touch within the limits of the laws of physics. – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 37 mph Driving Vehicle screen menu. This assistance will only be provided if the driver (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected. The state of the system stays in the memory presses the brake pedal. – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 50 mph Malfunction (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle or a cyclist In the event of a fault with the system, you when the ignition is switched off. Active Safety Brake is detected. are alerted by the fixed illumination of this – The vehicle's speed must be above 6 mph warning lamp, accompanied by the display of a Driver Attention Alert (10 km/h) (versions with camera and radar) or message and an audible signal. The system triggers an alert as soon as it between 6 mph and 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified detects that the driver has not taken a km/h) (versions with camera alone) when a workshop to have the system checked. break after two hours of driving at a speed above moving vehicle is detected. If these warning lamps come on 40 mph (65 km/h). This warning lamp flashes (for after the engine has been switched This alert is issued via the display of a message approximately 10 seconds) as soon as off and then restarted, contact a PEUGEOT encouraging the driver to take a break, the function acts on the vehicle’s braking. dealer or a qualified workshop to have the accompanied by an audible signal. With an automatic gearbox, in the event of system checked. If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert automatic emergency braking until the vehicle is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped. comes to a complete stop, keep the brake The system resets itself if one of the following pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from Distraction detection conditions is met: starting off again. Refer to the General recommendations on the – With the engine running, the vehicle has been With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic use of driving and manoeuvring aids. stationary for more than 15 minutes. emergency braking until the vehicle comes to a Take a break in case of feeling tired or at least – The ignition has been switched off for a few complete stop, the engine may stall. every 2 hours. minutes. The function comprises the "Driver Attention – The driver's seat belt is unfastened and their This function, also called automatic emergency The driver can maintain control of the Alert" system combined with the "Driver Attention door is opened. braking, intervenes following the alerts if the vehicle at any time by sharply turning the Alert by camera" system.
130 Driving
These systems are in no way designed As soon as the speed of the vehicle driving: take a break", accompanied by a more to keep the driver awake or to prevent drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the pronounced audible signal. 6 the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. system goes into standby. In certain driving conditions (poor road It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling The driving time is counted again once the surface or strong winds), the system may tired. speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h). give alerts independent of the driver's level of vigilance. Activation / Deactivation Driver Attention Alert by It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch camera The following situations may interfere screen menu. with the operation of the system or The state of the system stays in the memory prevent it from working: when the ignition is switched off. – lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks); Driver Attention Alert – close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings The system triggers an alert as soon as it not detected); detects that the driver has not taken a – roads that are narrow, winding, etc. break after two hours of driving at a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). This alert is issued via the display of a message Active Lane Keeping encouraging the driver to take a break, accompanied by an audible signal. Assistance Using a camera placed at the top of the If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert Refer to the General recommendations on the windscreen, the system assesses the is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. driver's level of vigilance, fatigue or distraction by The system resets itself if one of the following Using a camera located at the top of the identifying variations in trajectory compared to conditions is met: windscreen to identify lane markings on the road the lane markings. – With the engine running, the vehicle has been and at the edges of the road (depending on This system is particularly suited to fast roads stationary for more than 15 minutes. version), the system corrects the trajectory of the (speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)). – The ignition has been switched off for a few vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects a risk At a first-level alert, the driver is warned by the minutes. of unintentionally crossing a line or hard shoulder “ ” message, accompanied by an – The driver's seat belt is unfastened and their Take care! (depending on version). audible signal. door is opened. This system is particularly useful on motorways After three first-level alerts, the system triggers and main roads. a further alert with the message "Dangerous
131 Driving
Operation While the direction indicators are on and for a few seconds after switching them off, the Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle system considers that any change of trajectory is involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings intentional and no correction is triggered during detected or a lane limit (e.g. grass border), it this period. makes the necessary trajectory correction to However, with the Blind Spot Monitoring System Conditions for operation return the vehicle to its initial path. system activated, if the driver starts changing – Vehicle speed between 40 and 112 mph (65 The driver will notice a turning movement of the lanes and another vehicle is detected in the and 180 km/h). steering wheel. vehicle's blind spot, the system will correct the – Road marked with a central dividing line. This warning lamp flashes during trajectory even though the direction indicators – Steering wheel held in both hands. trajectory correction. are on. – Direction indicators not activated. The driver can prevent the correction by For more information on the Blind Spot – ESC system activated and operational. keeping a firm grip on the wheel (during Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding The system helps the driver only if there an avoiding manoeuvre, for example). section. is a risk of the vehicle unintentionally The correction is interrupted immediately if If the system detects that the driver is not wandering from the lane it is being driven in. It the direction indicators are operated. holding the wheel firmly enough during
does not manage the safe driving distance, an automatic correction of trajectory, it vehicle speed or brakes. interrupts the correction. An alert is triggered The driver must hold the steering wheel with to encourage the driver to take back control of both hands in a way that allows control to the vehicle. be maintained in circumstances where the system is not able to intervene (for example, if the central dividing line disappears).
Driving situations and related alerts To receive all the necessary information on the instrument panel, first select the "DRIVING" display mode. The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations. These alerts are not displayed sequentially.
132 Driving
Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments 6 message
OFF Function deactivated.
(grey)
ON System active, conditions not met: – speed below 43 mph (70 km/h),
– no lane marking recognised, (grey) – ASR/DSC systems deactivated or operation of ESC system triggered, – "sport" driving.
ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the function (for example, due to detection of a trailer or use of the "space-
saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle). (grey)
ON Lane marking detection. Speed above 43 mph (70 km/h).
(green)
ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of unintentional crossing is detected (orange line).
(orange)/(green)
133 Driving
Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments Deactivation / Activation
message
ON – If, while correcting the trajectory, the system detects that the driver has not held the steering wheel for a few
seconds, it interrupts the correction and returns control to (orange)/(green) the driver.
"Take control of the – If, while correcting the trajectory, the system determines vehicle." that the correction will not be enough and that a solid line
will be crossed (orange line): the driver is warned that they must provide additional trajectory adjustment. ► Press this button to deactivate / reactivate the The duration of audible warnings will increase if multiple system at any time. corrections are performed in quick succession. The Deactivation is signalled by the lighting of warning will become continuous, persisting until the driver the indicator lamp in the button and this responds. warning lamp in the instrument panel. This message may also be displayed if you have your The system is automatically reactivated every hands on the steering wheel. time the ignition is switched on.
Operating limits – Crossing the inside line on a bend. Risk of undesirable operation Malfunction – Driving in a tight corner. In the event of a system The system goes into standby automatically in We recommend deactivating the system in the – Inactivity by the driver detected during malfunction, these warning lamps the following cases: following driving situations: correction. come on on the instrument panel, accompanied – ESC deactivated or operation triggered. – Driving on damaged, unstable or very slippery by an onscreen message and an audible signal. – Speed below 43 mph (70 km/h) or greater The following situations may interfere (ice) road surfaces, Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT than 112 mph (180 km/h), with the operation of the system or – Poor weather conditions. dealer or a qualified workshop. – Electrical connection of a trailer. prevent it from working: – Driving on a speed circuit. – Use of a"space-saver" spare wheel detected – Insufficient contrast between the road – Driving on a rolling road. (as detection is not immediate, deactivation of surface and the side of the road (e.g. shade). Active Blind Spot the system is recommended). – Lane markings worn, hidden (snow, mud) – Dynamic driving style detected, pressure on or multiple (roadworks, etc.), Monitoring System the brake or accelerator pedal. – Running close to the vehicle in front (the Refer to the General recommendations on the – Driving where there are no lane markings. lane markings may not be detected). use of driving and manoeuvring aids. – Activation of the direction indicators. – Roads that are narrow, winding.
134 Driving
Deactivation / Activation Activation / Deactivation 6 It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. When starting the vehicle, the warning lamp
comes on in each mirror to indicate that the system is activated. The state of the system stays in the memory when switching off the ignition.
This system includes sensors, placed on the
The system is automatically deactivated sides of the bumpers, and warns the driver of ► Press this button to deactivate / reactivate the when towing with a towing device the potentially dangerous presence of another system at any time. approved by PEUGEOT. vehicle (car, truck, motorcycle) in the blind spot Deactivation is signalled by the lighting of areas of their vehicle (areas hidden from the the indicator lamp in the button and this driver's field of vision). Conditions for operation
warning lamp in the instrument panel. – All vehicles are moving in the same direction The system is automatically reactivated every and in adjacent lanes. time the ignition is switched on. – The speed of the vehicle must be between 7 Malfunction and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h) for the alert and between 40 and 87 mph (65 and 140 km/h) for a In the event of a system correction of trajectory. malfunction, these warning lamps – The system must be activated to trigger a come on on the instrument panel, accompanied change of trajectory. by an onscreen message and an audible signal. The warning is given by a fixed warning lamp – When you overtake a vehicle with a speed Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT that appears in the door mirror on the side in difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h). dealer or a qualified workshop. question: – When another vehicle overtakes you with a – immediately, when being overtaken; speed difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h). – after a delay of about one second, when – Traffic is flowing normally. Active Blind Spot overtaking a vehicle slowly. – Overtaking a vehicle over a certain period of In addition to this alert, a correction of trajectory Monitoring System time and the vehicle being overtaken remains in will be felt if you attempt to cross a line with the Refer to the General recommendations on the the blind spot. direction indicator activated, to help you avoid a use of driving and manoeuvring aids. – You are driving on a straight or slightly curved collision. road.
135 Driving
– Your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan, Malfunction etc. If the event of a malfunction, this warning Operating limits lamp comes on in the instrument panel,
accompanied by the display of a message. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.
The system may suffer temporary Using sensors located in the bumper, this interference in certain weather conditions system signals the proximity of obstacles (rain, hail, etc.). (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) present in In particular, driving on a wet surface or their field of detection. moving from a dry area to a wet area can cause false alerts (for example, the presence Rear parking sensors
of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot The system is switched on by engaging reverse No alert will be given and no correction will be angle is interpreted as a vehicle). gear, which is confirmed by an audible signal. made in the following situations: In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the The system is switched off when disengaging – In the presence of non-moving objects (parked sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow. reverse gear. vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs, etc.). Take care not to cover the warning zone in
– Oncoming traffic. the door mirrors or the detection zones on the Audible assistance
– Driving on a winding road or a sharp corner. front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels – When overtaking or being overtaken by a or other objects; they may hamper correct very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) which is both operation of the system. detected in the rear blind spot and present in the driver’s front field of vision. – When overtaking quickly. Parking sensors – In very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in Refer to the General recommendations on the front and behind are confused with a lorry or a use of driving and manoeuvring aids. The system signals the presence of obstacles stationary object. which are both within the sensors’ detection zone – If the Park Assist or Full Park Assist function and in the vehicle path defined by the direction of is activated. the steering wheel.
136 Driving
Visual assistance 6
Using sensors located in the bumper, this Depending on version, in the example shown,
system signals the proximity of obstacles only the obstacles present in the shaded area (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) present in will be signalled by the audible assistance. This supplements the audible signal, without their field of detection. The proximity information is given by an taking account of the vehicle's trajectory, by intermittent audible signal, the frequency of displaying bars on the screen that represent the Rear parking sensors which increases as the vehicle approaches the distance between the obstacle and the vehicle The system is switched on by engaging reverse obstacle. (white: more distant, orange: close, red: very gear, which is confirmed by an audible signal. When the distance between the vehicle and close). The system is switched off when disengaging the obstacle becomes less than about thirty When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" reverse gear. centimetres, the audible signal becomes symbol is displayed on the screen. continuous. Audible assistance The sound emitted by the speaker (right or Front parking sensors left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is Supplementing the rear parking sensors, the located. front parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the Adjusting the audible signal vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). With PEUGEOT Connect Radio or Front parking sensor operation is suspended if PEUGEOT Connect Nav, pressing the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in this button opens the window for adjusting the forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer detected volume of the audible signal. or the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). The system signals the presence of obstacles which are both within the sensors’ detection zone The sound emitted by the speaker (front and in the vehicle path defined by the direction of or rear) locates the obstacle relative to the steering wheel. the vehicle, whether in front of or behind it on its path.
137 Driving
Side parking sensors Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – 180° view. workshop to have the system checked. – Zoom view. AUTO mode is activated by default. In this mode, the system chooses to display the Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 best view (standard or zoom). Refer to the General recommendations on the You can change the type of view at any time
use of driving and manoeuvring aids. during a manoeuvre. With the engine running, these systems allow ► Press the button in the bottom left-hand The rear parking sensors system will be
views of your vehicle’s close surroundings to corner of the touch screen. deactivated automatically if a trailer or Using four additional sensors located on the be displayed on the touch screen using one ► Select the type of view: bicycle carrier is connected to a towing device sides of the bumpers, the system records the camera for the Visiopark 1 and two cameras for • " ". installed in accordance with the Standard view position of obstacles during the manoeuvre and Visiopark 2. • "180° view". manufacturer's recommendations. indicates them when they are located alongside • " ". In this case, the outline of a trailer is displayed Zoom view the vehicle. • " ". at the rear of the image of the vehicle. AUTO view The display is immediately updated with the type Only fixed obstacles are indicated The parking sensors are deactivated while the of view selected. correctly. Moving obstacles detected at Park Assist and Full Park Assist functions are The state of the function is not saved when the the beginning of the manoeuvre may be measuring a space. ignition is switched off. indicated mistakenly, while moving obstacles For more information on the Park Assist or the that appear alongside the vehicle but were Full Park Assist, refer to the corresponding Principle of operation
not previously recorded will not be indicated. section. Objects memorised during the Operating limits manoeuvre will no longer be stored after If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt, switching off the ignition. affecting distance measurements.
Malfunction The screen is divided into two parts with a Deactivation / Activation contextual view and a view from above the In the event of a malfunction when shifting It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch vehicle in its close surroundings. to reverse, this warning lamp comes on screen menu. The parking sensors supplement the information on the instrument panel, accompanied by the Using one or two cameras, the close The state of the system stays in the memory on the view from above the vehicle. display of a message and an audible signal surroundings of the vehicle are recorded whilst when the ignition is switched off. Various contextual views may be displayed: (short beep). manoeuvring at low speed. – Standard view.
138 Driving
– 180° view. An image from above your vehicle in its close To activate the camera, located near the number – Zoom view. surroundings is reconstructed (represented plate lamps, engage reverse and keep the speed 6 AUTO mode is activated by default. between the brackets) in real time and as the of the vehicle below 6 mph (10 km/h). In this mode, the system chooses to display the manoeuvre progresses. The system is deactivated: best view (standard or zoom). It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when – Automatically, at speeds above approximately You can change the type of view at any time parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle 6 mph (10 km/h), during a manoeuvre. to be seen. It is automatically deleted if the – Automatically, if the tailgate is opened. ► Press the button in the bottom left-hand vehicle remains stationary for too long. – Upon changing out of reverse gear (the image corner of the touch screen. With Visiopark 2, the image is created using remains displayed for 7 seconds). ► Select the type of view: both cameras, when going forward and when – By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left • "Standard view". reversing. corner of the touch screen. • "180° view". When the function is activated, it is possible • "Zoom view". that the view from above is not displayed. If Standard view
• "AUTO view". the system is activated when the vehicle has The display is immediately updated with the type already moved, the view from above can be fully of view selected. displayed. The state of the function is not saved when the ignition is switched off. Visiopark 1 Principle of operation Rear vision
The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the screen. The blue lines 1 represent the width of your vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction
changes according to the position of the steering Using one or two cameras, the close
wheel. surroundings of the vehicle are recorded whilst manoeuvring at low speed.
139 Driving
The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm AUTO mode 180° view offering views from the rear of the vehicle (rear from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4 vision) when reverse gear is engaged and views represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. from the front of the vehicle (front vision) when This view is available with AUTO mode or in the the gearbox is in neutral or a gear is engaged. view selection menu. Rear vision Zoom view
This mode is activated by default. Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic view changes from the rear view (standard) to the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is
approached at the level of the red line (less than 30 cm) during a manoeuvre. The system activates automatically when
The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a reverse gear is engaged. The camera records the vehicle's surroundings parking space, making it possible to see the The system is deactivated: during the manoeuvre in order to create a approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. – automatically above about 6 mph (10 km/h). view from above the rear of the vehicle in its This view is not recommended for carrying out a – when shifting out of reverse (the rear view near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be complete manoeuvre. image is replaced by the front view image after manoeuvred around nearby obstacles. It features 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C. 7 seconds). This view is available with AUTO mode or in the This view is only available via the view selection – by pressing the white arrow in the upper-left view selection menu. menu. corner of the touch screen. Obstacles may appear further away than Visiopark 2 If a trailer or a bicycle carrier is fitted to they actually are. the towball, the area behind the vehicle The vehicle has a camera at the front, fitted in It is important to monitor the sides of the on the view from above goes dark. the grille, and a camera at the rear, located close vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the The surroundings are reconstructed by the to the number plate lamps. mirrors. front camera only. Using these cameras, the system displays the Parking sensors also provide additional vehicle's near surroundings on the touch screen, information about the area around the vehicle.
140 Driving offering views from the rear of the vehicle (rear The rear vision views are similar to those for the Standard view vision) when reverse gear is engaged and views Visiopark 1. 6 from the front of the vehicle (front vision) when For more information on the Visiopark 1, refer to the gearbox is in neutral or a gear is engaged. the corresponding section.
Rear vision Front and rear vision
The area in front of your vehicle is displayed on the screen. The orange lines 1 represent the width of your
vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction The system activates automatically when With the engine running and the speed changes according to the position of the steering reverse gear is engaged. below 12 mph (20 km/h), the system is wheel. The system is deactivated: activated via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm – automatically above about 6 mph (10 km/h). menu: from the front bumper; the two orange lines 3 – when shifting out of reverse (the rear view ► Select "Panoramic visual aid". and 4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. image is replaced by the front view image after AUTO mode is displayed by default, with front This view is available with AUTO mode or in the 7 seconds). vision, if the gearbox is in neutral or with a view selection menu. – by pressing the white arrow in the upper-left gear engaged, or with rear vision, if reverse is corner of the touch screen. engaged. The system is deactivated: If a trailer or a bicycle carrier is fitted to – Automatically above about 19 mph (30 km/h) the towball, the area behind the vehicle (the image disappears temporarily from 12 mph on the view from above goes dark. (20 km/h)). The surroundings are reconstructed by the – By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left front camera only. corner of the touch screen.
141 Driving
Zoom view AUTO mode see the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre. It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C. This view is available only from the view
selection menu. This mode is activated by default. The system assists with the following Using sensors in the front bumper, the automatic manoeuvres: view changes from the front view (standard) to Park Assist A. Entering a "parallel" parking space the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is Refer to the General recommendations on the B. Leaving a "parallel" parking space approached during a manoeuvre. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. C. Entering a "bay" parking space The camera records the vehicle's surroundings This system provides active parking assistance during the manoeuvre in order to create a 180° view for vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox: it Operation view from above the front of the vehicle in its detects a parking space and then steers in ► When approaching a parking area, reduce near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be the appropriate direction to park in this space the speed of your vehicle to 19 mph (30 km/h) manoeuvred around obstacles nearby. while the driver controls the driving direction, or less. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the engagement of gears, acceleration and braking. view selection menu. To assist the driver in monitoring the correct Activating the function Obstacles may appear further away than manoeuvring operation, the system automatically The function is activated in the Vehicle / they actually are. triggers the display of Visiopark 1 or Visiopark 2 Driving touch screen menu. It is important to check the sides of the and the activation of the parking sensors. Select "Park Assist". vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the The system performs the measurements of mirrors. available parking spaces and calculations of Activating the function deactivates the The parking sensors also supplement the distances to obstacles using ultrasonic sensors Blind Spot Monitoring System. information on the vehicle's surroundings. built into the front and rear bumpers of the vehicle. You can deactivate the function at any
time until the parking space entry or exit manoeuvre begins, by pressing the arrow
located in the top left-hand corner of the The 180° view assists with exiting from a parking display page. space in forward gear, making it possible to
142 Driving
Selecting the type of The parking space search stops over this limit. The function automatically deactivates once the 6 manoeuvre vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h).
For ''parallel'' parking, the space must at a minimum be equal to the length of your vehicle plus 0.60 m.
For ''bay'' parking, the width of the space The system assists with the following must be equal to the width of your vehicle manoeuvres: plus 0.70 m. A. Entering a "parallel" parking space B. Leaving a "parallel" parking space If the parking sensors function has been C. Entering a "bay" parking space deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle menu of the touch screen, it will be automatically
reactivated when the system is activated. Operation A manoeuvre selection page is displayed on the
► When approaching a parking area, reduce touch screen: by default, the "Entry" page if the the speed of your vehicle to 19 mph (30 km/h) vehicle has been running since the ignition was or less. switched on, otherwise, the "Exit" page. ► Select the type and side of the manoeuvre to Activating the function activate the parking space search. The function is activated in the Vehicle / The selected manoeuvre can be changed at Driving touch screen menu. any time, even while searching for an available Select "Park Assist". space. This indicator lamp comes on to confirm Activating the function deactivates the the selection. Blind Spot Monitoring System. Parking space search When the system finds an available space, "OK" You can deactivate the function at any ► You should drive at a distance of between is displayed on the parking view, accompanied time until the parking space entry or exit 0.50 m and 1.50 m from the row of parked by an audible signal. manoeuvre begins, by pressing the arrow vehicles, without ever exceeding 19 mph located in the top left-hand corner of the (30 km/h), until the system finds an available display page. space.
143 Driving
Preparing for the The manoeuvring status is indicated by these The manoeuvre can be permanently interrupted End of the parking space symbols: at any time, either by the driver or automatically manoeuvre Manoeuvre in progress (green). by the system. entry or exit manoeuvre ► Move very slowly until the request to stop Interruption by the driver: The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is the vehicle is displayed: "Stop the vehicle“, Manoeuvre cancelled or finished (red) – taking over control of the steering. completed. accompanied by the “STOP” sign and an audible (the arrows indicate that the driver must – activating the direction indicator lamps on the The manoeuvring symbol is displayed in red signal. resume control of the vehicle). opposite side to that of the manoeuvre. accompanied by the message “Manoeuvre Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions The maximum speeds during manoeuvres are – unfastening the driver's seat belt. completed” on the touch screen. page is displayed on the screen. indicated by these symbols: – switching off the ignition. Deactivation of the function is confirmed ► To prepare for the manoeuvre, follow the 5 mph or 7 km/h, for parking space entry. Interruption by the system: by this indicator lamp going off, instructions. 7 – vehicle exceeding the speed limit of accompanied by an audible signal. The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by the 3 mph or 5 km/h, for parking space exit. 5 mph (7 km/h) during parking space entry If entering a parking space, the driver may be "Manoeuvre under way" onscreen message 5 manoeuvres, or 3 mph (5 km/h) during parking required to complete the manoeuvre. and an accompanying audible signal. space exit manoeuvres. During manoeuvring phases, the steering Reversing is indicated by this message: – activation of anti-slip regulation on a slippery Operating limits wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold “Release the steering wheel, reverse”. road. – The system may suggest an inappropriate the steering wheel or put your hands between The Visiopark 1 or Visiopark 2 and the parking – opening of a door or the boot. parking space (parking prohibited, work in the spokes of the steering wheel. Watch out sensors are automatically activated to help you – engine stall. progress with damaged road surface, location for any objects that could interfere with the monitor the area immediately surrounding your – system malfunction. alongside a ditch, etc.). manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarf, tie, etc.). vehicle during the manoeuvre. – after 10 manoeuvres to enter or exit a parallel – The system may indicate that a space has Risk of injury! parking space and after 7 manoeuvres to enter a been found but will not offer it because of a fixed It is the driver's responsibility to constantly During the manoeuvre parking bay. obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, monitor the traffic, especially vehicles coming The system controls the vehicle’s steering. It Interrupting the manoeuvre automatically which would not allow the vehicle to follow a towards you. gives instructions on the manoeuvring direction deactivates the function. trajectory required for parking. The driver should check that no objects or when starting "parallel" entry and exit parking The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red, – The system may indicate that a space has people are obstructing the vehicle’s path. manoeuvres, and for all "bay" entry manoeuvres. accompanied by the "Manoeuvre cancelled" been found but the manoeuvre will not be There instructions are displayed as a symbol message on the touch screen. triggered, because the width of the lane is accompanied by a message: The images from the camera(s) A message prompts the driver to take back insufficient. "Reverse". displayed on the touch screen may be control of the vehicle. – The system is not designed for performing the distorted by the terrain. The function is deactivated after a few parking manoeuvre on a sharp bend. “Go forwards". In shady areas, or in inadequate sunlight seconds; this warning lamp goes off and – The system does not detect spaces that or lighting conditions, the image may be the function returns to the initial display. are much larger than the vehicle itself or that darkened and with lower contrast are delimited by obstacles that are too low
144 Driving
End of the parking space (pavements, studs, etc.) or too thin (trees, posts, – If the sensors have been repainted other wire fences, etc.). than by the PEUGEOT dealer network. 6 entry or exit manoeuvre – If the boot is heavily loaded, the tilt of the – With sensors not approved for the vehicle. The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is vehicle towards the rear may interfere with the completed. distance measurements. The manoeuvring symbol is displayed in red Malfunctions accompanied by the message “Manoeuvre Do not use the function under the When the function is not activated, the completed” on the touch screen. following exterior conditions: temporary flashing of this indicator lamp Deactivation of the function is confirmed – Alongside a soft shoulder (e.g. ditch) or and an audible signal indicate a system by this indicator lamp going off, quay or on the edge of a drop. malfunction. accompanied by an audible signal. – When the road surface is slippery (e.g. ice). If the malfunction occurs while the system is in If entering a parking space, the driver may be use, the indicator lamp goes off. required to complete the manoeuvre. If any of the following malfunctions If the parking sensor malfunction occurs occurs, do not use the system: during use, indicated by this warning lamp Operating limits – If a tyre is under-inflated. coming on, it causes the function to deactivate. – The system may suggest an inappropriate – If one of the bumpers is damaged. In the event of a malfunction, have the system parking space (parking prohibited, work in – If one of the cameras is faulty. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified progress with damaged road surface, location workshop. alongside a ditch, etc.). If the vehicle has undergone any of the In the event of a power steering – The system may indicate that a space has following modifications, do not use the malfunction, this warning lamp is been found but will not offer it because of a fixed function: displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, – When carrying an object extending beyond by a warning message. which would not allow the vehicle to follow a the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. trajectory required for parking. roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – The system may indicate that a space has – With a non-approved towball in place. workshop. been found but the manoeuvre will not be – With snow chains fitted. triggered, because the width of the lane is – When driving on a small-diameter or Full Park Assist insufficient. "space-saver" type spare wheel. – The system is not designed for performing the – When the wheels fitted are a different size Refer to the General recommendations on the parking manoeuvre on a sharp bend. from the original ones. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. – The system does not detect spaces that – After modifying one or both bumpers This system provides active parking assistance are much larger than the vehicle itself or that (added protection). for vehicles fitted with the EAT8 automatic are delimited by obstacles that are too low gearbox: it detects a free "parallel" or "bay"
145 Driving
parking space and then operates the vehicle, to the performance limits inherent to the For "parallel" parking, the space must at parking it with no need for driver intervention. It system. least equal to the length of your vehicle also allows you to drive out of a "parallel parking" The manoeuvre remains the responsibility plus 1 m. space automatically. of the driver, who must not leave the driving For "bay" parking, the space must at least The system controls the steering, direction, position and must never try to lock the system equal to the width of your vehicle plus 0.70 m. acceleration and braking. The system measures control button. the available parking spaces and calculates The driver's seat belt must remain fastened the distances to obstacles using 12 ultrasonic during the manoeuvre. Preparing for the sensors built into the front and rear bumpers of manoeuvre the vehicle. ► Press the button on the gear selector or, on Choice of the type of ► Move very slowly until the request to stop To help the driver monitor the successful the touch screen, select Driving / Vehicle > Full the vehicle and the "STOP" sign are displayed, completion of the manoeuvre, the system Park Assist. manoeuvre and search for accompanied by an audible signal. automatically displays the Visiopark 1 or Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions Activating the system deactivates Blind space Visiopark 2 and activates the parking sensors. page is displayed on the screen. Spot Monitoring System. Depending on whether the vehicle has been ► To prepare for the manoeuvre, you must fulfil driven or not since the ignition was switched on, all of these instructions. Sequence the function proposes the entry to or exit from a This symbol will be displayed parking space on the touch screen. Once the system is activated, the following steps automatically when the instruction has ► Select the type and side of the manoeuvre to will be performed successively: been applied. activate the parking space search. – Select the type of manoeuvre via the touch When all instructions have been validated, a Illumination of this lamp confirms screen. new screen is displayed, indicating that you can activation. – Search for an available space. undertake the manoeuvre. It is possible to change the type of manoeuvre – Prepare for the manoeuvre. ► To undertake the manoeuvre, press at any time, including during the available space – Perform the manoeuvre. this button. search phase. – Finalise the manoeuvre. ► While holding down the button, gradually ► Drive at a distance of 0.50 to 1.50 m from the release the brake pedal. To initiate parking assistance when It is possible to deactivate the system at row of parked vehicles, not exceeding 19 mph approaching a parking area: any time until the start of the manoeuvre, (30 km/h), until the system finds an available The button must be held down ► Reduce the speed of the vehicle to a by pressing the red arrow in the upper left space (indicated by OK on the display and an throughout the manoeuvre. maximum of 19 mph (30 km/h). corner of the screen. audible signal). The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by Full Park Assist is not always able to the display of a screen with the message react automatically and appropriately due
146 Driving
For "parallel" parking, the space must at "Manoeuvre under way", accompanied by an Throughout the whole manoeuvre, least equal to the length of your vehicle audible signal. indicated by the green "AUTO" symbol, 6 plus 1 m. Visiopark 1 or Visiopark 2 and the parking the driver must hold the selector button down. For "bay" parking, the space must at least sensors are automatically activated to help equal to the width of your vehicle plus 0.70 m. you monitor the close surrounding area of your During manoeuvring phases, the steering vehicle throughout the manoeuvre. wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold Preparing for the the steering wheel or put your hands between Performing the manoeuvre the spokes of the steering wheel. Watch out manoeuvre As soon as the driver releases the brake for any objects that could interfere with the ► Move very slowly until the request to stop pedal, the system automatically takes control manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarf, tie, etc.). the vehicle and the "STOP" sign are displayed, of choosing the travel direction, forwards or Risk of injury! accompanied by an audible signal. reverse, acceleration, braking and the steering Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions direction. If the vehicle slows down significantly, page is displayed on the screen. The manoeuvring status is indicated by these the brake lamps may come on. ► To prepare for the manoeuvre, you must fulfil symbols: all of these instructions. Manoeuvre in progress. Pausing/resuming the manoeuvre This symbol will be displayed The manoeuvre can be interrupted temporarily automatically when the instruction has Manoeuvre interrupted. at any time, either automatically by the system if been applied. an obstacle is detected, or by driver action. If the When all instructions have been validated, a Manoeuvre completed or abandoned driver notices a hazard, they may also interrupt new screen is displayed, indicating that you can (white arrows indicate that the driver must the manoeuvre permanently. undertake the manoeuvre. take back control of their vehicle). To suspend the manoeuvre, the driver can: ► To undertake the manoeuvre, press The direction of the manoeuvre is indicated by – Release the function control button. this button. these symbols: – Depress the brake pedal. ► While holding down the button, gradually Forward gear. – Resume control of the steering. release the brake pedal. – Change the gearbox status (except changing Reverse gear. The button must be held down to P). The vehicle is immediately immobilised if the throughout the manoeuvre. The central arrow is green whilst the vehicle manoeuvre is suspended. is moving, or white to indicate the next The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by This is confirmed by the display of this manoeuvring direction. the display of a screen with the message symbol, accompanied by the message "Manoeuvre suspended".
147 Driving
Resuming the manoeuvre after resolving the – System malfunction during the manoeuvre. The gearbox automatically changes to mode Do not use the function under the conditions for suspending it: Abandoning the manoeuvre immediately P if no action is taken by the driver within 30 following exterior conditions: ► Release all controls (brake pedal, function triggers the vehicle’s brakes and automatically secondss. – Alongside a soft shoulder (ditch) or quay or control button, steering wheel, etc.). deactivates the function. on the edge of a drop. ► Press the function control button again. This symbol is displayed, accompanied by Operating limits – When the road surface is slippery (ice). Permanent interruption after suspending the the message "Manoeuvre abandoned" – The system may suggest an inappropriate manoeuvre: on the touch screen. parking space (parking prohibited, work in Do not use the function in the presence ► Depress the brake pedal and engage a gear. A message prompts the driver to take back progress with damaged road surface, location of one of the following malfunctions: Abandoning the manoeuvre control of the vehicle. alongside a ditch, etc.). – If a tyre is under-inflated. The function is deactivated after a few – The system may indicate that a space has The manoeuvre is abandoned in the following – If one of the bumpers is damaged. seconds; this indicator lamp goes off and been found but will not offer it because of a fixed situations: – If one of the cameras is faulty. the initial display is resumed. obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, – No action by the driver within 30 seconds of – If the brake lamps are not working. The system automatically engages gearbox which does not allow the vehicle to follow the the manoeuvre being suspended. mode P after 4 seconds. trajectory required for parking. – Intentional application of the parking brake. Do not use the function if the vehicle has – The system may indicate that a space has – Gearbox mode P engaged by the driver. been subject to one of the following End of manoeuvre been found but the manoeuvre will not be – Driver's seat belt unfastened. modifications: The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is triggered because the width of the lane is – Opening of a door or the boot. – When carrying an object extending beyond completed. insufficient. – Activation of the direction indicator lamps on the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the This symbol is displayed, accompanied by – The system is not designed to perform parking the opposite side to that of the manoeuvre. roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). the message "Manoeuvre completed" on manoeuvres on a steep slope or on a sharp – In certain cases, when a wheel of the vehicle – With a non-approved towball in place. the touch screen. curve. hits a pavement or a low obstacle. – With snow chains fitted. When the function is deactivated, this – The system does not detect spaces that – Triggering of anti-slip regulation on a slippery – When driving on a small-diameter or indicator lamp goes off and the original are much larger than the vehicle itself or that road. "space-saver" type spare wheel. display is restored. are delimited by obstacles that are too low – Engine stalling. – When the wheels fitted are a different size – If entering a parking space, the driver may (pavements, studs, etc.) or too thin (trees, posts, – Sudden appearance in the field of the from the original ones. be required to complete the manoeuvre. wire fences, etc.). manoeuvre of an obstacle not detected by the – After modifying one or both bumpers The gearbox changes to P 4 seconds after – The system may be impaired by incorrect system before the manoeuvre was started, (added protection). completion of the manoeuvre. inflation of the vehicle’s tyres. with the obstacle remaining for more than 30 – If the sensors have been repainted outside – When exiting a parking space, the gearbox – The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is heavily seconds. the PEUGEOT dealer network. changes to N when the manoeuvre is complete. loaded can affect the distance measurements. – After 10 manoeuvres to enter or exit a – With sensors not approved for the vehicle. A message and symbols prompt the driver to "parallel" parking space and after 7 manoeuvres take back control of the vehicle. to enter a "bay" parking space,
148 Driving
Do not use the function under the Malfunctions following exterior conditions: 6 When the function is not activated, the – Alongside a soft shoulder (ditch) or quay or temporary flashing of this warning lamp on the edge of a drop. and an audible signal indicate a Full Park Assist – When the road surface is slippery (ice). malfunction. If the malfunction occurs while the system is in Do not use the function in the presence use, the warning lamp goes off. of one of the following malfunctions: If a parking sensor malfunction, indicated – If a tyre is under-inflated. by this warning lamp coming on, occurs – If one of the bumpers is damaged. during Full Park Assist use, the function is – If one of the cameras is faulty. deactivated. – If the brake lamps are not working. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Do not use the function if the vehicle has In the event of a power steering been subject to one of the following malfunction, this warning lamp is modifications: displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied – When carrying an object extending beyond by a message. the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – With a non-approved towball in place. workshop. – With snow chains fitted. – When driving on a small-diameter or "space-saver" type spare wheel. – When the wheels fitted are a different size from the original ones. – After modifying one or both bumpers (added protection). – If the sensors have been repainted outside the PEUGEOT dealer network. – With sensors not approved for the vehicle.
149
Compatibility of fuels
Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol respectively.
PEUGEOT & TOTAL
PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE! Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 and EN16709 standards and containing up to 7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester For over 20 years, the PEUGEOT TOTAL partnership has set new performance respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even standards in achieving success in the toughest conditions, with victories in the Le Mans 24 Hours, the World Rally Championship and the Dakar Rally. occasionally, imposes special maintenance To obtain these exceptional results, the Peugeot Sport teams chose TOTAL conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions".
QUARTZ, a high-tech lubricant that protects the engine in the most extreme conditions. TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 standard. effects of time. The use of any other type of (bio) fuel TOTAL QUARTZ INEO FIRST is a very high-performance lubricant developed jointly by the Peugeot and Total R&D teams. Specially formulated for the (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, engines in Peugeot vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited (risk CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean. of damage to the engine and fuel system).
The only fuel additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715001 (petrol) or B715000 (Diesel) standards.
Diesel at low temperature At temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F), the formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel
Practical information
Compatibility of fuels fuels could prevent the engine from operating and audible signal are repeated with increasing correctly. In these temperature conditions, use frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0. 7 winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid more than 50 % full. running out of fuel. Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard At temperatures below -15 °C (+5 °F) to avoid For more information on Running out of fuel containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section. respectively. under shelter (heated garage). Stop & Start Travelling abroad Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition. Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 Certain fuels could damage your vehicle’s and EN16709 standards and containing up to engine. 7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester In certain countries, the use of a particular Refuelling respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even fuel may be required (specific octane rating, Additions of fuel must be of at least 10 litres, in occasionally, imposes special maintenance specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct order to be registered by the fuel gauge. conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". operation of the engine. Opening the filler flap may create a noise caused For all additional information, consult a dealer. by an inrush of air. This vacuum is entirely normal, resulting from the sealing of the fuel Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 Refuelling system. standard. To refuel in complete safety: Fuel tank capacity: approximately 62 litres ► You must switch off the engine. The use of any other type of (bio) fuel (petrol), 55 litres (Diesel) or 42 litres (Hybrid). (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, Reserve level: approximately 6 litres. domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system). Low fuel level When the low fuel level is reached, this The only fuel additives authorised for use warning lamp comes on on the instrument are those that meet the B715001 (petrol) panel, accompanied by an onscreen message or B715000 (Diesel) standards. and an audible signal. When it first comes on, about 6 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp Diesel at low temperature appears every time the ignition is switched on, At temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F), the accompanied by an onscreen message and formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel an audible signal. When driving, this message
151 Practical information
The filler neck is narrower, allowing only It remains possible to use a fuel jerrycan serious burns or electrical shock that can lead unleaded petrol nozzles to be introduced. to fill the tank. to death. In the event of a problem, always contact a If you have put in the wrong fuel for PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. the vehicle, you must have the fuel Travelling abroad tank drained and filled with the correct fuel As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be before starting the engine. different in other countries, the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible. Misfuel prevention (Diesel) Before travelling abroad, it is advisable to
(Depending on country of sale.) check with a PEUGEOT dealer if the vehicle This mechanical device prevents filling the tank is suitable for the distribution equipment of the This label is intended solely for use by of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. countries visited. firefighters responding to an incident Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention involving the vehicle and for maintenance device appears when the filler cap is removed. technicians. ► With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear Hybrid system edge of the filler flap to open it (the filler cap is Operation In the event of an accident or impact built in). Electrical system ► Take care to select the pump that delivers the The electrical system or the battery The electrical system of the hybrid system is correct fuel type for the vehicle's engine (see a may be seriously damaged in the event of identified by orange cables and its elements are reminder label on the inside of the filler flap). an accident or impact involving the vehicle marked with this symbol: underbody. ► Introduce the filler nozzle and push it in as
far as possible before starting to refuel (risk of Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch blowback). off the ignition. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► Fill the tank. The hybrid engine uses a voltage of rd workshop without delay. Do not continue past the 3 cut-off of the between 240 V and 400 V. This system nozzle; as this may cause malfunctions. may be hot during and after switching off the
► Push the filler flap to close it. ignition. Observe the warning messages on In the event of exposure to a fire When a petrol filler nozzle is inserted into the Immediately exit and evacuate all The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, a the labels in the vehicle, especially in the flap. fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes into passengers from the vehicle. Never attempt device which helps to reduce the level of harmful Any work on or modification to the vehicle's contact with the flap. The system remains closed to fight the fire yourself - risk of electrocution! emissions in the exhaust gases. electrical system (battery, connectors, orange and prevents filling. You must immediately contact the emergency For petrol engines, you must use unleaded cables and components visible from inside or Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type services, informing them that the incident fuel. outside) is strictly prohibited due to the risk of filler nozzle. involves a hybrid vehicle.
152 Practical information serious burns or electrical shock that can lead When washing Battery ageing depends on several to death. Before washing the vehicle, always parameters, such as climatic conditions, 7 In the event of a problem, always contact a check that the charging flap is closed mileage or charging frequency. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. correctly.
Never wash the vehicle while the battery is In case of damage of the battery on charge. It is strictly forbidden to carry out repairs on the vehicle yourself. High-pressure washing Do not touch liquids coming from the battery To avoid damaging electrical and, in the event of skin contact with these
components, it is expressly prohibited to use products, wash abundantly with water and high-pressure washing to clean the front contact a doctor as soon as possible. This label is intended solely for use by compartment or the vehicle underbody. firefighters responding to an incident Do not use a pressure greater than 80 bar involving the vehicle and for maintenance when washing the bodywork. Charging flap technicians. The charging flap is located on the rear left-hand side of the vehicle.
Never allow water or dust to enter the In the event of an accident or impact connector or charging nozzle - risk of The electrical system or the battery electrocution or fire! may be seriously damaged in the event of Never connect / disconnect the charging an accident or impact involving the vehicle nozzle or cable with wet hands - risk of underbody. electrocution! Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off the ignition. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Traction battery workshop without delay. The Li-ion (Lithium-ion) traction battery stores the electrical energy of the vehicle. It is located In the event of exposure to a fire under the rear seats.
Immediately exit and evacuate all The range of the battery varies depending passengers from the vehicle. Never attempt on the type of driving, the route, the use of 1. Deferred charge activation button to fight the fire yourself - risk of electrocution! thermal comfort equipment and the ageing of its 2. Nozzle locking indicator lamp You must immediately contact the emergency components. Red: nozzle positioned correctly and locked services, informing them that the incident in the connector. involves a hybrid vehicle.
153 Practical information
Charging connector 3. Status of light Meaning Charging cable Light guides 4. guides The battery can be charged using several types of cables. Flashing green Charging. The charging cable supplied with the vehicle is Fixed green Charging finished. compatible with the electrical installations of the country of sale. If you are travelling abroad, refer Fixed red Malfunction. to the following table to check the compatibility
of local electrical installations with the charging In case of impact, even light, against the cable. Status of light Meaning charging flap, do not use it. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified guides Do not remove or modify the charging workshop to obtain the appropriate charging connector - risk of fire! Fixed white Welcome lighting when flap cable(s). is opened. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Fixed blue Deferred charge.
Cable type Compatibility Specifications Mode 2 charging cable with integrated control Conventional electrical socket. Vehicle can be recharged overnight (6.5 hours to
unit 7 hours). Charge limited to a maximum of 8 A.
“Green Up” type socket. Vehicle can be recharged in half a day (3.5 hours to 4 hours). Charge limited to a maximum of 14 A.
154 Practical information
Cable type Compatibility Specifications 7 Mode 3 charging cable Wallbox accelerated charging unit Vehicle can be recharged in 1.5 hours to 1.75 hours (with 6.6 kW charger). Charge limited to a maximum of 32 A.
Charging times are given for Refer to the charging unit user manual for the Fixed green: charging complete. information purposes only; they may operating instructions. FAULT vary according to different factors such as the Red: anomaly; charging not permitted exterior temperature or the quality of the or must be stopped immediately. Check that electrical network. If the exterior temperature Control unit everything is connected correctly and that the
is below -10°C, it is recommended to connect electrical system is not faulty. the vehicle as soon as possible as the If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact a charging time may increase significantly. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Upon plugging the charging cable into a Mode 2 charging cable with integrated domestic socket, all of the indicator lamps come control unit on briefly. It is essential to avoid damaging the cable If no indicator lamps come on, check the and to keep it intact. domestic socket's circuit-breaker. In the event of damage, do not use it and – If the circuit breaker has tripped, contact a contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified professional to check that your electrical system workshop to replace it. is suitable and carry out any necessary repairs. POWER – If the circuit-breaker has not tripped, avoid using the charging cable and contact a Wallbox accelerated charging unit Green: electrical connection established; PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. (mode 3) charging can begin. Do not disassemble or modify the charging CHARGE Recommendations on the control unit label unit - risk of electrocution and/or fire! Flashing green: charging in progress or temperature pre-conditioning activated.
155 Practical information
10. Do not unplug the plug from the wall as a put into standby mode, this information can ► Have a professional check that the means of stopping charging. be displayed again by unlocking the vehicle or electrical system to be used complies with 11. Do not force the connector if it is locked into opening a door. applicable standards and is compatible with the vehicle. the vehicle. The charging progress can also be ► Have a professional electrician install 12. Immediately stop charging, by locking and monitored using the MyPeugeot a dedicated domestic power socket or then unlocking the vehicle using the remote application. accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) control key, if the charging cable or wall For more information on Remote features, compatible with the vehicle. socket feel burning hot to the touch. please refer to the corresponding section. 13. This charging cable includes components Use the charging cable supplied with the 1. Refer to the handbook before use. liable to cause electrical arcing or sparks. vehicle. 2. Incorrect use of this charging cable may Do not expose to flammable vapours. result in fire, property damage and serious Precautions 14. Only use this charging cable with PEUGEOT (During charging) injury or death by electrocution! Hybrid vehicles have been developed in vehicles. accordance with the recommendations for Never work under the bonnet: 3. Always use a correctly earthed power 15. Never plug the cable into the wall socket (or – Some areas remain very hot, even an hour socket, protected by a 30 mA residual maximum electromagnetic field limits established unplug it) with wet hands. after charging ends - risk of burns! current device. by the ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection - 1998 – The fan may start at any time - risk of cuts 4. Always use an electrical socket protected or strangulation! by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the Guidelines). electrical circuit’s current rating. Charging the traction If you have a pacemaker or equivalent, check with a doctor about the precautions 5. The weight of the control unit must not be battery (Hybrid) After charging borne by the electrical socket, plug and to be taken and respected or with the Check that the charging flap is closed. For a full charge, follow the charging procedure cables. manufacturer of the implanted electro-medical Do not leave the cable connected to the without interrupting it, until it stops automatically. device that its operation is guaranteed in an 6. Never use this charging cable if it is domestic power socket - risk of short-circuit Charging can be immediate or deferred. defective or in any way damaged. environment that complies with the ICNIRP or electrocution in the event of contact with or The deferred charge is set via the touch recommendations. 7. Never attempt to repair or open this immersion in water! screen or the MyPeugeot application. charging cable. It contains no repairable If in doubt parts - replace the charging cable if it is For safety reasons, the engine will not During charging, do not remain inside or Charging procedure damaged. start if the charging cable is connected to near the vehicle, near the charging cable or 8. Never immerse this charging cable in water. the vehicle connector. A warning is displayed the charging unit, even for a short time. Connection 9. Never use this charging cable with an in the instrument panel. ► Before charging, check that the gear selector extension cable, a multi-plug socket, a Before charging is in mode P and the ignition is off, otherwise conversion adaptor or on a damaged Charging progress is visible in the instrument Depending on the context: charging is impossible. electrical socket. panel. After the instrument panel has been
156 Practical information
► Have a professional check that the ► Open the charging flap by pressing the push If this is not the case, charging has not electrical system to be used complies with button and make sure that there are no foreign started; restart the procedure ensuring that all 7 applicable standards and is compatible with bodies on the charging connector. connections are made properly. the vehicle. The light guides in the flap light up in white. The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to ► Have a professional electrician install Domestic charging (mode 2) indicate that the nozzle is locked.
a dedicated domestic power socket or Accelerated charging (mode 3)
accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) compatible with the vehicle. Use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
(During charging)
Never work under the bonnet: – Some areas remain very hot, even an hour ► Follow the instructions for use of the after charging ends - risk of burns! accelerated charging unit (Wallbox). – The fan may start at any time - risk of cuts ► Remove the protective cover from the or strangulation! charging nozzle.
► Insert the nozzle in the charging connector. After charging ► First, connect the charging cable from the The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing Check that the charging flap is closed. control unit to the domestic socket. of the green light guides in the flap. Do not leave the cable connected to the When the connection is made, all of the indicator If this is not the case, charging has not domestic power socket - risk of short-circuit lamps on the control unit light up, then only the started; restart the procedure ensuring that all or electrocution in the event of contact with or POWER indicator lamp remains on in green. connections are made properly. immersion in water! ► Remove the protective cover from the The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to charging nozzle. indicate that the nozzle is locked. ► Insert the nozzle in the charging connector. Charging procedure The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing Disconnection
of the green light guides in the flap and the Connection flashing of the CHARGE indicator lamp in green ► Before charging, check that the gear selector on the control unit. is in mode P and the ignition is off, otherwise charging is impossible.
157 Practical information
Before disconnecting the nozzle from the Settings fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – Deactivate this function in advance in your charging connector: ► In the Hybrid touch screen menu, workshop. vehicle's configuration menu. ► If the vehicle is unlocked, lock it and then select the Charge tab. If not fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer, they must – Or remove the electronic key from the unlock it. ► Set the charging start time. still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle recognition zone, with the tailgate closed. ► If the vehicle is locked, unlock it. ► Press OK. manufacturer's instructions. The red indicator lamp in the flap goes out to The setting is saved in the system. Important: with a hands-free tailgate, if a confirm that the charging nozzle is unlocked. You can also programme the deferred towing device is fitted outside the PEUGEOT Towing device with ► Within 30 seconds, remove the charging charging function using a smartphone, via dealer network, it is essential to visit a retractable ball joint nozzle. the MyPeugeot application. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop Domestic charging (mode 2) For more information on Remotely operable to recalibrate the detection system. Risk of When this towing device is not in use, it is folded malfunction of the hands-free function! away underneath the rear bumper. The end of charging is confirmed by the fixed features, refer to the corresponding section. Certain driving or manoeuvring aid functions No tools are required to install or stow it. lighting of the green CHARGE indicator lamp on Activation are automatically deactivated while an the control unit and by the fixed lighting of the Before any operation, the vehicle must ► Connect the vehicle to the desired charging approved towing system is in use. green light guides in the flap. equipment. be stationary with the parking brake ► After disconnection, remove the protective applied. ► Press this button in the flap within one Comply with the maximum authorised cover from the nozzle and close the charging The area close to the exhaust pipe may reach minute to activate the system (confirmed towable weight, as indicated on your flap. by the light guides coming on in blue). a high temperature: risk of burns! ► Disconnect the control unit's charging cable vehicle's registration certificate, on the manufacturer's label and in the Technical from the domestic socket. Vehicle equipped with motorised data section of this guide. Accelerated charging (mode 3) Towing device tailgate with hands-free function Complying with the maximum authorised Load distribution To avoid unintentional opening of the tailgate, The end of charging is confirmed by the nose weight (towball weight) also includes ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the follow the recommendations on the Towing accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) and by the the use of accessories (bicycle carriers, heaviest items are as close as possible to the device by referring to the corresponding fixed lighting of the green light guides in the flap. tow boxes, etc.). ► After disconnection, replace the nozzle on the axle, and the nose weight approaches the section. charging unit and close the charging flap. maximum permitted without exceeding it. Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing Observe the legislation in force in the Deferred charging engine performance. The maximum towable load country where you are driving. Unlocking handle must be reduced by 10% per 1,000 metres of The towball is locked in either the storage By default, charging begins when the nozzle altitude. Vehicle equipped with motorised position or the usage position. is connected. Deferred charging can be tailgate with hands-free function The unlocking handle is behind the rear bumper, programmed. Use genuine towing devices and their To avoid unintentionally opening the tailgate protected by a storage case. wiring harnesses approved by while operating the towing device: To reach the handle: PEUGEOT. We recommend having them
158 Practical information
– Deactivate this function in advance in your The towball hangs, hooked onto its shaft. vehicle's configuration menu. As soon as you release the handle, it is engaged 7 – Or remove the electronic key from the automatically in its storage case. recognition zone, with the tailgate closed. Usage position Towball unlocked: Towing device with retractable ball joint When this towing device is not in use, it is folded away underneath the rear bumper. No tools are required to install or stow it.
Before any operation, the vehicle must be stationary with the parking brake applied. ► Grasp the towball and rotate it while raising it The area close to the exhaust pipe may reach until it locks into place, in the vertical position. a high temperature: risk of burns! ► Pass your hand flat under the rear bumper with the palm facing upwards. The towball must be folded away when Vehicle equipped with motorised ► Insert your hand into the storage case and using a high-pressure washer. tailgate with hands-free function grasp the handle. Do not direct the jet from less than 30 cm To avoid unintentional opening of the tailgate, To unlock the towball: from the towing system.
follow the recommendations on the Towing ► Pull the handle firmly downwards to release device by referring to the corresponding it. section.
Unlocking handle The towball is locked in either the storage position or the usage position. The unlocking handle is behind the rear bumper, protected by a storage case. To reach the handle:
159 Practical information
► Raise the electrical socket cover and connect Roof bars Fitting on longitudinal bars the plug for the trailer or carrying device. ► Attach the trailer’s safety cable to the ring in (SW) As a safety measure and to avoid the towball elbow. damaging the roof, it is essential to use the transverse bars approved for the vehicle. Storage position You must see a PEUGEOT dealer to obtain these roof bars and their specific fixings. When the towing system is not in use, it Observe the instructions on fitting and use is recommended to fold the towball away. contained in the guide supplied with the roof In the event of a rear-end collision, damage bars. to the vehicle could be worse with the towball in place. Fitting directly to the roof Towball unlocked and socket disconnected: At the rear
(Hatchback) The transverse bars must only be attached to The transverse bars must be fixed at the the four anchor points located on the roof frame. engraved markings on the longitudinal bars. These points are hidden by the door seals; lift up the seal to access the anchor point. Maximum load distributed over the The roof bar fixings include a lug to be fitted in transverse roof bars, for a loading height the pin of each fixing point. not exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle carrier): 80 kg. As this value may change, please verify the maximum load quoted in the guide supplied ► Grasp the towball and rotate it until it locks with the roof bars. into place, in the horizontal position. If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified of the vehicle to the profile of the road to workshop for any work on the towing system. avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings
on the vehicle. At the front Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects that are longer than the vehicle.
160 Practical information
Fitting on longitudinal bars Recommendations Bicycle / accessory carrier Distribute the load uniformly, taking care 7 (SW) to avoid overloading one of the sides. Do not attach an accessory carrier to the Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close tailgate. as possible to the roof. Secure the load securely. Drive gently: the vehicle will be more Snow chains susceptible to the effects of side winds and its stability may be affected. In wintry conditions, snow chains improve Regularly check the security and tight traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle fastening of the roof bars, at least before each when braking. trip. The snow chains must be fitted only to Remove the roof bars once they are no longer the front wheels. They must never be
needed. fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels. The transverse bars must be fixed at the engraved markings on the longitudinal bars. Roof box Take account of the legislation specific to Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or a Maximum load distributed over the each country on the use of snow chains qualified workshop to obtain the compatible transverse roof bars, for a loading height and the maximum authorised speed. fasteners. not exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle carrier):
Use only chains designed to be fitted to the type 80 kg. of wheel fitted to the vehicle: As this value may change, please verify the maximum load quoted in the guide supplied Original tyre size Maximum link size with the roof bars. 215/60R16 9 mm If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to 215/55 R17 9 mm avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings 235/45 R18 Not suitable for on the vehicle. chains
Be sure to refer to national legislation in order (with standard to comply with the regulations for transporting chains) objects that are longer than the vehicle. Sunroof Do not operate the sunroof when using roof bars - risk of major damage!
161 Practical information
Hybrid vehicles – For more than 10 minutes, to use the risk of injury resulting from an automatic Original tyre size Maximum link size The use of snow chains is only equipment for approximately 30 minutes. change to START mode. 235/40 R19 Not suitable for authorised on the front wheels. Let the engine run for the specified duration to chains ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. (with standard To recharge the battery, avoid repeatedly or chains) Energy economy mode continuously restarting the engine. For more information on snow chains, contact a A flat battery prevents the engine from This system manages the duration of use of Hybrid vehicles PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. starting. certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient Before any work is carried out under the For more information on the , level of charge in the battery with the ignition off. 12 V battery bonnet, it is essential to switch off the ignition refer to the corresponding section. Installation tips After switching off the engine, you can still and check that the READY indicator lamp is ► To fit the chains during a journey, stop the use functions such as the audio and telematic off in the instrument panel - risk of serious vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road. system, the wipers and the dipped beam injury! ► Apply the parking brake and position any headlamps or courtesy lamps, for a combined Load reduction mode wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent duration of approximately 40 minutes. This system manages the use of certain The location of the interior bonnet movement of the vehicle. functions according to the level of charge release lever prevents the bonnet being ► Fit the chains following the instructions Selecting the mode remaining in the battery. opened when the left-hand front door is provided by the manufacturer. A confirmation message is displayed when When the vehicle is being driven, the load closed. ► Move off gently and drive for a few moments, energy economy mode is entered, and the active reduction function temporarily deactivates certain without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h). functions are placed on standby. functions, such as the air conditioning and the ► Stop the vehicle and check that the snow When the engine is hot, handle the If a telephone call is in progress at the heated rear screen. chains are correctly tightened. exterior safety catch with care (risk of time, it will be maintained for around 10 The deactivated functions are reactivated burns), using the protected area. It is strongly recommended that before minutes via the audio system’s hands-free automatically as soon as conditions permit. When the bonnet is open, take care not to you leave, you practise fitting the snow system. damage the safety catch. chains on a level and dry surface. Bonnet Do not open the bonnet under very windy conditions. Avoid driving with snow chains on roads Exiting the mode For more information about the Active bonnet, These functions are automatically reactivated the refer to the corresponding section. that have been cleared of snow to avoid Cooling of the engine when stopped next time the vehicle is used. damaging the vehicle's tyres and the road Stop & Start The engine cooling fan may start after To restore the use of these functions surface. If the vehicle is fitted with alloy Before doing anything under the bonnet, the engine has been switched off. immediately, start the engine and let it run: wheels, check that no part of the chain or its you must switch off the ignition to avoid any Take care with objects or clothing that – For less than 10 minutes, to use the fixings is in contact with the wheel rim. could be caught in the blades of the fan! equipment for approximately 5 minutes.
162 Practical information risk of injury resulting from an automatic Opening Because of the presence of electrical change to START mode. equipment under the bonnet, it is strongly 7 recommended that exposure to water (rain, washing, etc.) be limited.
Engine compartment Hybrid vehicles Before any work is carried out under the The engine shown here is an example for bonnet, it is essential to switch off the ignition illustrative purposes only. and check that the READY indicator lamp is The locations of the following elements may off in the instrument panel - risk of serious vary:
injury! – Air filter. ► From inside: pull the control lever, located – Engine oil dipstick. on the left below the dashboard, towards you.
– Engine oil filler cap. The location of the interior bonnet – Priming pump. release lever prevents the bonnet being – Degassing screw. opened when the left-hand front door is closed. Petrol engine
When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch with care (risk of burns), using the protected area. ► From the outside: lift the safety catch and When the bonnet is open, take care not to raise the bonnet. damage the safety catch. Two bonnet struts open the bonnet and hold it Do not open the bonnet under very windy open. conditions. Closing Cooling of the engine when stopped ► Lower the bonnet and release it near the end The engine cooling fan may start after of its travel. the engine has been switched off. ► Check the locking. Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the fan!
163 Practical information
Diesel engine Checking levels Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground. Check all of the following levels regularly in Empty used oil into the containers reserved accordance with the manufacturer's service for this purpose at a PEUGEOT dealer or a schedule. Top them up if required, unless qualified workshop. otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly, have the
corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT Engine oil ► Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down,
dealer or a qualified workshop. The level is checked, with the engine then pull it out again to visually check the oil having been switched off for at least 30 1. Screenwash fluid reservoir The fluids must comply with the level: the correct level is between marks A (max) minutes and on level ground, either using the oil 2. Engine coolant reservoir manufacturer's requirements and with and B (min). level indicator in the instrument panel when the 3. Brake fluid reservoir the vehicle's engine. Do not start the engine if the level is: 4. Battery / Fuses ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped – above mark A: contact a PEUGEOT dealer or 5. Remote earth point (-) with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick. Take care when working under the a qualified workshop. 6. Fusebox It is normal to top up the oil level between two bonnet, as certain areas of the engine – below mark B: top up the engine oil 7. Air filter services (or oil changes). It is recommended may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the immediately. 8. Engine oil filler cap that you check the level, and top up if necessary, cooling fan could start at any time (even with 9. Engine oil dipstick every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). Oil grade the ignition off). Priming pump* Before topping up or changing the engine 10. In order to maintain the reliability of the 11. Degassing screw* oil, check that the oil is suitable for the engine engine and emissions control system, and complies with the recommendations in Used products never use additives in the engine oil. The Diesel fuel system operates under the service schedule supplied with the vehicle very high pressure. Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or (or available from your PEUGEOT dealer and All work on this circuit must be carried out fluids with the skin. Checking using the dipstick qualified workshops). Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Most of these fluids are harmful to health and For the location of the dipstick, please refer the contractual warranty in the event of workshop. very corrosive. to the illustration of the corresponding engine engine failure. compartment. ► Grasp the dipstick by its coloured grip and pull it out completely. Topping up the engine oil level ► Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean, For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please lint-free cloth. refer to the corresponding under-bonnet engine compartment illustration. * Depending on engine.
164 Practical information
► Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills The level of this fluid should be close to the on engine components (risk of fire). "MAX" mark but should never exceed it. 7 ► Wait a few minutes before checking the level If the level is close to or below the "MIN” mark, it again using the dipstick. is essential to top up. ► Top up the level if necessary. When the engine is hot, the temperature of this ► After checking the level, carefully screw the fluid is regulated by the fan.
oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in As the cooling system is pressurised, wait at ► Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down, its tube. least one hour after switching off the engine then pull it out again to visually check the oil before carrying out any work. Within 30 minutes of adding oil, the oil level: the correct level is between marks (max) In order to avoid the risk of scalding if you need A level indication in the instrument panel and to top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around B (min). when the ignition is switched on is not valid. Do not start the engine if the level is: the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to – above mark A: contact a PEUGEOT dealer or allow the pressure to drop. a qualified workshop. Brake fluid Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap – below mark B: top up the engine oil The level of this fluid should be close to and top up to the required level. immediately. the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake Screenwash fluid Oil grade pad wear. Top up to the required level when Before topping up or changing the engine To know how often the brake fluid should be necessary. oil, check that the oil is suitable for the engine replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing schedule. and complies with the recommendations in Fluid specification the service schedule supplied with the vehicle Clean the cap before removing it to refill. The fluid must be topped up with a ready-to-use (or available from your PEUGEOT dealer and Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed mixture. qualified workshops). container. In winter (temperatures below zero), a liquid Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate containing an agent to prevent freezing must the contractual warranty in the event of be used which is appropriate for the prevailing engine failure. Engine coolant conditions, in order to protect the elements of the It is normal to top up this fluid between system (pump, tank, ducts, jets, etc.). two services. Topping up the engine oil level The check and top-up must only be done with Filling with pure water is prohibited under For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please the engine cold. all circumstances (risk of freezing, refer to the corresponding under-bonnet engine A low level presents a risk of serious damage to limestone deposits, etc.). compartment illustration. the engine.
165 Practical information
Diesel fuel additive (Diesel Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT Passenger compartment If the warning lamp stays on, this dealer or a qualified workshop. indicates a low Diesel additive level. with particle filter) filter For more information on Checking levels, Only use products recommended by On reaching the minimum level in the Depending on the environment and the refer to the corresponding section. particle filter additive tank, this warning PEUGEOT or products of equivalent use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, lamp comes on fixed, accompanied by an quality and specification. city driving), change it twice as often, if Following prolonged operation of the audible warning and a message warning that the In order to optimise the operation of . necessary vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you additive level is too low. components as important as those in the braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers A clogged passenger compartment filter may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the Topping up very specific products. can adversely affect air conditioning emission of water vapour at the exhaust on system performance and generate acceleration. This does not affect the This additive must be topped up without delay by undesirable odours. behaviour of the vehicle or the environment. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 12 V battery AdBlue (BlueHDi) The battery does not require any New vehicle maintenance. Air filter The first particle filter regeneration An alert is triggered when the reserve level is However, check regularly that the terminals Depending on the environment and the operations may be accompanied by a reached. are correctly tightened (versions without quick use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, "burning" smell, which is perfectly normal. For more information on and in Indicators release terminals) and that the connections are city driving), change it twice as often, if particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to clean. necessary. the corresponding section. Manual gearbox For more information on the precautions To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in Oil filter The gearbox does not require any to take before any work on the accordance with regulations, you must top up the 12 V Change the oil filter each time the engine maintenance (no oil change). , refer to the corresponding section. AdBlue tank. battery oil is changed. For more information on AdBlue® (BlueHDi), Automatic gearbox and in particular on the supply of AdBlue, refer to Versions equipped with Stop & Start are Particle filter (Diesel) The gearbox does not require any the corresponding section. fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of The start of saturation of the particle filter maintenance (no oil change). specific technology and specification. is signalled by the temporary illumination Checks Its replacement should be carried out only by of this warning lamp, accompanied by a Electric parking brake a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. message warning of the risk of the filter clogging This system does not require any routine Unless otherwise indicated, check these up. servicing. However, in the event of a components in accordance with the As soon as the traffic conditions permit, problem, do not hesitate to have the system manufacturer's service schedule and according regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified to your engine. least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp workshop. goes off.
166 Practical information
If the warning lamp stays on, this For more information on the Electric (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add indicates a low Diesel additive level. parking brake, refer to the 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the 7 For more information on Checking levels, corresponding section. label. refer to the corresponding section. Under-inflation increases fuel Brake pads consumption. Non-compliant tyre Following prolonged operation of the Brake wear depends on the style of pressure causes premature wear on tyres and vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you driving, particularly in the case of vehicles has an adverse effect on the vehicle's road may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the used in town, over short distances. It may be holding - risk of an accident! emission of water vapour at the exhaust on necessary to have the condition of the brakes acceleration. This does not affect the Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the checked, even between vehicle services. behaviour of the vehicle or the environment. braking and road holding performance of the Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the vehicle. It is recommended to regularly check the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads condition of the tyres (tread and sidewalls) and New vehicle are worn. The first particle filter regeneration wheel rims as well as the presence of the valves. operations may be accompanied by a After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in When the wear indicators no longer appear set "burning" smell, which is perfectly normal. wintry conditions, ice can form on the back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may less than 1.6 mm; it is imperative to replace the be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and tyres. Manual gearbox defrost them. Using different size wheels and tyres from those The gearbox does not require any specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel maintenance (no oil change). rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer Brake disc wear reading and have an adverse effect on road Automatic gearbox For information on checking brake disc holding. The gearbox does not require any wear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles maintenance (no oil change). qualified workshop. can cause the ESC to mistime. Electric parking brake Wheels and tyres Shock absorbers This system does not require any routine The inflation pressure of all tyres, It is not easy for drivers to detect when servicing. However, in the event of a including the spare wheel, must be shock absorbers are worn. Nevertheless, problem, do not hesitate to have the system checked on "cold” tyres. the shock absorbers have a major impact on checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure road-holding and braking performance. workshop. label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles
167 Practical information
For your safety and driving comfort, it is Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel Particle Filter In the event of a confirmed SCR system You can also visit a service station important to have them regularly checked by a (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. malfunction, it is essential to visit a equipped with AdBlue® pumps specially PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. designed for passenger vehicles. SCR System After 680 miles (1,100 km), a device is Timing and accessory kits Using a liquid called AdBlue® that contains automatically activated to prevent the engine Storage recommendations Timing and accessory kits are used from urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of from starting. AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates the time the engine is started until it is the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and In both cases, a range indicator indicates above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a switched off. It is normal for them to wear over water, which are harmless to health and the the distance that can be travelled before the cool area and protected from direct sunlight. time. environment. vehicle is stopped. Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for A faulty timing or accessory kit can damage The AdBlue® is contained in a special at least a year. the engine, rendering it unusable. Observe the tank holding about 17 litres. Freezing of the AdBlue® If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has recommended replacement frequency, stated in Its capacity allows a driving range of AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below completely thawed out in the ambient air. distance travelled or time elapsed, whichever is approximately 5,600 miles (9,000 km), which around -11°C. reached first. may vary considerably depending on your The SCR system includes a heater for the Never store AdBlue® containers in your driving style. AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving vehicle. ® An alert system is triggered once the reserve in very cold conditions. AdBlue (BlueHDi) level is reached: it is then possible to drive for a
further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is Precautions for use ® ® empty and the vehicle blocked. Supply of AdBlue AdBlue is a urea-based solution. This fluid is It is recommended that the AdBlue® be topped non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when For more information on the Warning up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating kept in a cool place). and the associated and indicator lamps that the reserve level has been reached. In the event of contact with the skin, wash the alerts, or the Indicators, please refer to the affected area with soap and running water. In the In order to ensure that the SCR system corresponding sections. event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse operates correctly: the eyes with large amounts of water or with an ® ® – Use only AdBlue fluid that meets the ISO Once the AdBlue tank is empty, a eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek 22241 standard.
system required by legislation prevents medical attention if you feel a persistent burning – Never transfer AdBlue® to another To respect the environment and ensure starting of the engine. sensation or irritation. container: it would lose its purity. compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without If the SCR system is faulty, the level of If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth – Never dilute AdBlue® with water. adversely affecting the performance or fuel emissions from the vehicle will no longer meet with clean water and then drink plenty of water. the Euro 6 standard: the vehicle becomes consumption of its Diesel engines, PEUGEOT AdBlue® can be obtained from a PEUGEOT In certain conditions (high temperature, for polluting. has taken the decision to equip its vehicles dealer or a qualified workshop. example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot with a system that associates SCR (Selective be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia
168 Practical information
You can also visit a service station vapours have an irritant effect on mucous electronic key into the passenger equipped with AdBlue® pumps specially membranes (eyes, nose and throat). compartment. 7 designed for passenger vehicles. Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10 Store AdBlue® out of the reach of seconds before starting the engine. children, in its original container. Storage recommendations ► Press the "START/STOP" button to switch off AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates the engine.
Procedure above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that cool area and protected from direct sunlight. the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface. Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature at least a year. of the vehicle is above -11 °C. Otherwise the If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has AdBlue® may be frozen and so cannot be poured completely thawed out in the ambient air. into its tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area ® Never store AdBlue containers in your for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried vehicle. out. ► Turn the blue cap of the AdBlue® tank a 6th of a turn anti-clockwise and remove it. Never put the AdBlue® into the Diesel ► With a container of AdBlue®: after checking fuel tank. Precautions for use the expiry date, read the instructions on the ® AdBlue is a urea-based solution. This fluid is label carefully before pouring the contents of the ® non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when If any AdBlue is splashed, or if there are container into the vehicle's AdBlue tank. kept in a cool place). any spillages on the bodywork, rinse ► With an AdBlue® pump: introduce the nozzle In the event of contact with the skin, wash the immediately with cold water or wipe with a and fill the tank until the nozzle automatically affected area with soap and running water. In the damp cloth. cuts out. event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a ® the eyes with large amounts of water or with an sponge and hot water. In order not to overfill the AdBlue tank: eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek – Add between 10 and 13 litres using AdBlue® containers. medical attention if you feel a persistent burning Important: in the event of a top-up after – Stop after the nozzle’s first automatic cut- sensation or irritation. an AdBlue breakdown, you must wait out, if you are refilling at a service station. If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth about 5 minutes before switching on the The system only registers AdBlue® top-ups of with clean water and then drink plenty of water. ignition, without opening the driver's door, 5 litres or more. In certain conditions (high temperature, for unlocking the vehicle or bringing the example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia
169 Practical information
If the AdBlue® tank is completely empty Reverting to normal operation the engine will start, requiring you to restart – which is confirmed by the message ► While depressing the brake pedal, start the the procedure. "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible" – it is engine. essential to add at least 5 litres. With an automatic gearbox Advice on care and and electric parking brake maintenance Free-wheeling
/ In certain situations, you must allow the vehicle General recommendations to free-wheel (while being towed, on a rolling Observe the following recommendations to avoid road, in an automatic car wash, or being Release procedure damaging your vehicle. transported by rail or sea freight, etc.). ► With the vehicle stationary and the engine The procedure varies according to the type of running, select mode N and switch off the Exterior gearbox and parking brake. ignition. Within 5 seconds: Never use a high-pressure jet wash in With a manual gearbox and ► Switch on the ignition again. the engine compartment, due to the risk ► While depressing the brake pedal, move the of damaging electrical components. electric parking brake Do not wash the vehicle in strong sunshine or push selector forwards or backwards to confirm / mode N. extremely cold conditions. ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the Release procedure control lever to release the parking brake. When washing the vehicle at an automatic roller-brush car wash, be sure ► With the engine running and while depressing ► Release the brake pedal, switch off the to lock the doors and, depending on version, the brake pedal, move the gear selector to the ignition. remove the electronic key and deactivate the neutral position. If the 5-second time limit is exceeded, the “hands-free” function (“Hands-Free Tailgate ► While depressing the brake pedal, switch off gearbox engages mode P; it is then necessary to Access”). the ignition. restart the procedure. When using a pressure washer, hold the ► Release the brake pedal, then switch on the Reverting to normal operation lance at least 30 cm from the vehicle ignition again. ► While depressing the brake pedal, restart the (particularly when cleaning areas containing ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the engine. chipped paint, sensors or seals). control lever to release the parking brake. Promptly clean up any stains containing ► Release the brake pedal, then switch off the Keyless Entry and Starting chemicals liable to damage the vehicle's paint ignition. You must not depress the brake pedal while switching the ignition on or off. If you do,
170 Practical information
(including tree resin, bird droppings, insect Bodywork Leather secretions, pollen and tar). 7 Leather is a natural product. Appropriate regular If justified by the environment, clean the High-gloss paint care is essential for its durability. vehicle more frequently to remove salty Do not use abrasive products or It must be protected and nourished using a deposits (in coastal areas), soot (in industrial solvents, petrol or oil to clean the specific leather product, to keep it supple and estates) and mud (in wet or cold areas). bodywork. preserve its original appearance. These substances can be highly corrosive. Never use an abrasive sponge to clean Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Do not clean leather using unsuitable stubborn stains. Risk of scratching the workshop if you require advice on removing cleaning agents such as solvents, paintwork! stubborn stains requiring special products detergents, petrol or pure alcohol. Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to (such as tar or insect removers). When cleaning items partly made from plastic or rubber parts. Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed leather, take care not to damage the other by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified materials with the specific leather product. workshop. Use a soft sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product. Before cleaning greasy stains or liquids, Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean Interior quickly mop up any surplus. microfibre cloth. Before cleaning, wipe off any residues liable Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry. When washing the vehicle, never use a to scuff the leather, using a cloth that has Comply with the instructions for use stated on water hose or high-pressure washer to been dampened with demineralised water the product. clean the interior. and thoroughly wrung out. Liquids carried in cups or other open Clean leather using a soft cloth moistened Decals containers can spill, presenting a risk of with soapy water or a pH-neutral product. damage if they come into contact with the (Depending on version) Dry with a soft, dry cloth. controls in the dashboard and centre console. Take care! Do not use a high pressure washer to clean the vehicle. Risk of damaging or detaching the decals!
Use a high-flow hose at a temperature between 25°C and 40°C. Sweep the jet of water across the surface to be cleaned, perpendicular to it. Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water.
171 In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle Assembling and placing the For more information on Refuelling and on Misfuel prevention (Diesel), please As a safety precaution, before leaving your triangle refer to the corresponding section. vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on your For non-BlueHDi versions, the fuel system high visibility vest. components are located in the engine compartment, possibly under the removable Storage compartment cover.
For more information on the Engine compartment, in particular the location of these components under the bonnet, please refer to the corresponding section.
1.5 BlueHDi engines
For versions supplied with a triangle as original ► Switch on the ignition (without starting the There is a compartment in the interior trim of the equipment, refer to the illustration above. engine). tailgate to store a warning triangle. For other versions, refer to the assembly ► Wait around 1 minute and switch off the ► After opening the tailgate, release the cover instructions provided with the triangle. ignition. by turning the screw a quarter turn to the left. ► Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle, ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine. as required by local legislation. If the engine does not start at the first attempt, do not keep trying, but restart the procedure. Running out of fuel 2.0 BlueHDi engines ► Switch on the ignition (without starting the (Diesel) engine). With Diesel engines, the fuel system must be ► Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the primed if you run out of fuel. ignition. Before starting to prime the system, it is ► Repeat the operation 10 times. essential to put at least 5 litres of Diesel into the ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine. fuel tank. If the engine does not start at the first attempt, do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.
172 In the event of a breakdown Non-BlueHDi engines ► Attach the floor hook to the upper boot seal. 8 ► Open the bonnet and then, if necessary, With temporary puncture repair kit
unclip the cover to access the priming pump. ► Loosen the degassing bolt. ► Operate the priming pump until fuel appears in the transparent tube. ► Retighten the degassing bolt. ► Operate the starter motor until the engine starts (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying
again). Hatchback ► If the engine does not start after a few To access it: attempts, operate the priming pump again, then ► Open the boot. the starter motor. ► Lift up the floor and fold it back on itself. ► Put the cover back in place and clip it in, then close the bonnet. With spare wheel
Tool kit Set of tools supplied with the vehicle. Its content depends on your vehicle's equipment: – Temporary puncture repair kit. – Spare wheel. Accessing the tools The tool kit is stored in the boot, under the floor.
These tools are specific to the vehicle SW and may vary according to the level of To access it: equipment. ► Open the boot. Do not use them for any other purpose. ► Lift up the floor.
173 In the event of a breakdown
The jack must only be used to change a For more information on Towing the vehicle With spare wheel wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. and using the removable towing eye, refer to the Do not use any jack other than the one corresponding section. supplied with the vehicle. If the vehicle does not have its original jack, With temporary puncture repair kit contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain the one that was intended by the manufacturer. The jack meets European standards, as defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/ CE. The jack does not require any maintenance.
4. 12 V compressor with a cartridge of sealant List of tools 5. Wheelbrace
and a speed limit sticker For removing the wheel trim and the wheel For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust bolts. the tyre pressure. 6. Jack with integrated handle For more information about the Temporary To raise the vehicle. puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding 7. Wheel bolt cap remover (depending on section. equipment) For removing the wheel bolt head finishers on alloy wheels.
1. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (depending For more information on the Spare wheel, refer on equipment) to the corresponding section. 2. Socket for the wheel security bolts (located in the glove box) (depending on equipment) For adapting the wheelbrace to the special Temporary puncture ‘security’ bolts. repair kit 3. Removable towing eye Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view explanatory videos.
174 In the event of a breakdown
Made up of a compressor and a sealant cartridge, it allows you to carry out a temporary 8 repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage. It is designed to repair most punctures located on the tyre tread.
The vehicle's electric system allows the connection of the compressor to the 2 V power supply for long enough to repair a tyre
after a puncture. ► Connect the pipe from the compressor to the ► Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant For more information on the Tool kit, bottle of sealant. to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten
refer to the corresponding section. firmly. ► Check that the compressor switch is in position "O". Repair procedure ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under the compressor. Do not remove any foreign bodies (e.g. ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the nail, screw) which have penetrated into vehicle's 12 V socket. the tyre. Only the 12 V sockets located at the ► Park the vehicle without obstructing traffic front of the vehicle and in the boot can and apply the parking brake. be used to power the compressor.
► Follow the safety instructions (hazard The 12 V socket located at the back of the warning lamps, warning triangle, high visibility ► Turn the bottle of sealant over and secure it centre console is not suitable for this purpose. vest, etc.) according to the legislation in force in in the notch provided on the compressor. the country of driving. ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be ► Affix the speed limit sticker. ► Switch off the ignition. repaired, and place it in a clean area. ► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.
The speed limit sticker must be secured to the interior of the vehicle in the area
175 In the event of a breakdown
close to the driver, to remind the driver that a ► Remove the kit. (80 km/h) and do not drive more than wheel is in temporary use. ► Remove and store the bottle of sealant. 125 miles (200 km). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The sealant product is harmful if workshop to have the tyre changed. The tyre inflation pressures are given on swallowed and causes irritation to the this label. eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of children. Checking / adjusting tyre The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the bottle. pressures After use, do not discard the bottle in The compressor can be used, without ► Switch on the ignition. injecting sealant, to check and, if necessary, standard waste, take it to a PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised waste disposal site. adjust the tyre pressures. Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep sealant, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or it in a clean place. a qualified workshop. ► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. ► Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten firmly.
► Switch on the compressor by moving the ► Check that the compressor switch is in position " ". switch to position "I" until the tyre pressure O reaches 2 bar. The sealant product is injected ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under under pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect the compressor. the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the of blowback). vehicle's 12 V socket. ► Switch on the ignition.
If after approximately 7 minutes, the Only the 12 V sockets located at the pressure of 2 bar is not reached, this ► Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles front of the vehicle and in the boot can indicates that the tyre is not repairable; (5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between be used to power the compressor. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)) to plug the The 12V socket located at the back of the workshop for assistance. puncture. centre console is not suitable for this purpose. ► Stop to check the repair and the tyre ► Move the switch to position "O". pressure using the kit. ► Disconnect the compressor's electric plug The tyre inflation pressures are given on from the vehicle's 12 V socket. With a tyre repaired using this type of kit, this label. ► Refit the cap on the valve. do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
176 In the event of a breakdown
Access to the spare wheel The spare wheel is a ‘space-saver’ wheel. 8
► Start the compressor by placing the switch at position "I" and adjust the pressure to the value Removing the spare wheel shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To deflate: press the black button located on the compressor pipe, near the valve connection.
If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bar is not reached, the tyre is damaged; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.
► Once the correct pressure is reached, put the Hatchback switch in position "O". ► Remove the kit and stow it.
Should the pressure of one or more tyres ► Slacken the central nut. be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise ► Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt). the under-inflation detection system. ► Lift the spare wheel towards the back of the For more information on Tyre under-inflation boot. detection, refer to the corresponding section. ► Take the wheel out of the boot. Putting the spare wheel back in place
Spare wheel The punctured wheel cannot be placed in the boot under the floor. Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view
explanatory videos. SW The spare wheel is stored in the boot, under the floor. For more information on the Tool kit, refer to the corresponding section. If you need access to the spare wheel, first refer to the Tool kit section.
177 In the event of a breakdown
The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe. If necessary, place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed. Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack; use an axle stand.
Wheel with wheel trim When removing the wheel, first remove the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture
using the wheelbrace.
► Put the spare wheel back in place in its When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel housing. SW trim, starting by placing its aperture in line ► Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns. ► Tighten the central nut sufficiently to retain with the valve and then pushing it into place ► Position the fastening device (nut and bolt) in the wheel correctly. all round its edge with the palm of your hand. the middle of the wheel. ► Put the tool box back in place in the middle of
the wheel and clip it in place. Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle Immobilise the vehicle where it does not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level, stable and non-slippery. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake,
unless it is programmed to be in automatic
mode, and switch off the ignition. Hatchback
With an automatic gearbox, select mode P to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake,
unless it is programmed to be in automatic ► To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of mode, and switch off the ignition. the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels). Check for the fixed illumination of the parking brake warning lamps in the instrument panel.
178 In the event of a breakdown
► Fit security socket 2 on wheelbrace 5 to ► Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient Fitting a wheel slacken the security bolt. space between the wheel and the ground to 8 ► Slacken the other bolts using the admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily. wheelbrace 5 only. Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may slip or collapse - risk of injury!
Take care to position the jack strictly at one of the jacking points A or B under the vehicle, ensuring that the head of the jack is Fitting a steel or "space-saver" type centred under the contact area of the vehicle. spare wheel If the vehicle is equipped with alloy wheels, Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the the washers do not make contact with the vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing - risk of steel or "space-saver" type spare wheel. The injury! ► Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and wheel is secured by the conical contact of ensure that it is directly below the front A or each bolt. rear B jacking point on the underbody, whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed.
► Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place.
► Remove the wheel.
► Fit the wheel on the hub. ► Extend jack 6 until its head comes into ► Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. contact with jacking point A or B; contact area A ► Pre-tighten the security bolt using the or B on the vehicle must be properly inserted wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. into the central part of the head of the jack. ► Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 5 only.
179 In the event of a breakdown
After changing a wheel after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.
The headlamps have polycarbonate lenses with a protective coating: – Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive
cloth, nor with detergent or solvent products. With a "space-saver" type spare wheel – Use a sponge and soapy water or a pH Deactivate certain driving aid functions neutral product. (Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise control, – When using a high-pressure washer on ► Lower the vehicle again fully. etc.). persistent marks, do not keep the lance ► Fold jack 6 and remove it. Do not exceed the maximum authorised directed towards the headlamps, lamps or
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). their edges for too long, so as not to damage Driving with more than one “space-saver” their protective coating and seals. type spare wheel is prohibited.
Changing a bulb must only be done with Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the ignition off and after the headlamp / workshop as soon as possible to have lamp has been switched off for several the tightness of the bolts and the pressure of minutes - risk of serious burns! the spare wheel checked. Do not touch the bulb directly with your Have the punctured tyre examined. After fingers; use a lint-free cloth. inspection, the technician will advise you on It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet ► Tighten the security bolt using the whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. be replaced. headlamp. ► Tighten the other bolts using the Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb wheelbrace 5 only. of the same type and specification. To avoid ► Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts Changing a bulb lighting imbalance, replace the bulbs in pairs. (depending on equipment). In some weather conditions (e.g. low ► Store the tools. Refitting the lamp units temperature or humidity), misting on the Perform the operations in the reverse internal surface of the glass of the headlamps order to dismantling. and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear
180 In the event of a breakdown
Light-emitting diode (LED) Front lamps Model with halogen lamps 8 headlamps and lamps Model with "Full LED" technology Depending on version, the affected types of lamps
headlamps / lamps are: – Full LED technology headlamps. – Offset daytime running lamps. – Direction indicator side repeaters. – Side spotlamps. – 3D rear lamps. – Third brake lamp. – Number plate lamps.
For the replacement of this type of bulb, 1. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps (LEDs) you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or 2. Main beam headlamps (H7) a qualified workshop.
3. Dipped beam headlamps (H7) Do not touch the "Full LED" technology 1. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps / 4. Direction indicators (PWY24W). headlamps - risk of electrocution! Direction indicators 2. Dipped beam headlamps Opening the bonnet / Accessing the 3. Main beam headlamps bulbs With the engine warm, proceed with caution - 4. Static cornering lamps risk of burns! Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the cooling fan - risk of strangulation!
181 In the event of a breakdown
Halogen bulbs (Hx) Main beam headlamps ► Pull the connector rearwards to disconnect it. To ensure good quality lighting, check ► Push the spring forwards then to the right to that the bulb is correctly positioned in its release the bulb. housing. ► Remove the bulb and replace it. Rear lamps Direction indicators
Rapid flashing of a direction indicator Model with LED lamps
lamp (left or right) indicates that one of the bulbs on the corresponding side has failed.
► Remove the protective cover by pulling the tab. ► Pull the connector rearwards to disconnect it. ► Pull the bulb rearwards to extract it. ► Replace the bulb.
Dipped beam headlamps
► Turn the connector a quarter turn anti-clockwise. ► Pull the bulb connector. ► Remove the bulb and replace it.
Amber coloured bulbs must be replaced by bulbs with identical specifications and
colour. ► Remove the protective cover by pulling the tab.
182 In the event of a breakdown
Model with adaptive 3D Full LED Reversing lamps
lamps 8
► Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then right. Foglamps ► Remove the cover completely. These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear 1. Direction indicators (LED) ► Take the tweezers from their housing. bumper. 2. Brake lamps (LED) ► Pass your hand under the bumper. 3. Sidelamps / Daytime running lamps (LED) ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and 4. Reversing lamps (P21W) remove it. 5. Foglamps (P21W) ► Turn the bulb a quarter turn and replace it. Reversing lamps / Foglamps. To change the bulb within a few minutes of switching off the ignition, take care not to touch the exhaust - risk of burns!
Changing a fuse ► Open the glove box. Accessing the tools ► Press on the central handle of the fusebox The extraction tweezers are located behind the cover. fusebox cover. ► Lower the cover completely. Depending on version: ► Take the tweezers from their housing.
183 In the event of a breakdown
Changing a fuse The replacement of a fuse not shown in Before installing other electrical equipment the allocation tables may cause a serious or accessories on your vehicle, contact a Before changing a fuse: malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. ► Identify the cause of the fault and fix it. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. ► Stop all power consumption. PEUGEOT accepts no responsibility for
► Immobilise the vehicle and switch the ignition off. the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle ► Identify the defective fuse using the current or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from allocation tables and diagrams. the installation of accessories not supplied To replace a fuse, it is essential to: and not recommended by PEUGEOT and not ► Use the special tweezers to extract the fuse installed in accordance with specifications, in from its housing and check the condition of its Good Failed particular when the combined power
filament. consumption of all of the additional equipment ► Always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of connected exceeds 10 milliamperes. the same rating (same colour); use of a different rating may cause malfunctions - risk of fire! Tweezers Fuses in the dashboard If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have The fusebox is located in the lower dashboard the electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT Installing electrical accessories (left-hand side). dealer or a qualified workshop. Your vehicle's electrical system is designed to operate with standard or optional To access the fuses, follow the same procedure The fuse allocation tables and the equipment. as described for accessing the fuse replacement corresponding diagrams are available tools. from a PEUGEOT dealer or from a qualified workshop.
Fuse tables Box 1
184 In the event of a breakdown 8
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F1 10 A "Electrochrome" mirrors. F3 5 A Adaptive 3D rear lamps. F4 15 A Horn. F5 20 A Rear screenwash pump (SW). F6 20 A Windscreen wash pump. F7 10 A Rear USB ports. F8 20 A Rear wiper (SW). F10 30 A Central locking. F11 30 A Tailgate locking/unlocking. F14 5 A Emergency and assistance calls - Alarm control unit. F24 5 A Hi-Fi amplifier. F27 5 A Alarm siren. F29 20 A Touch screen audio system. F31 15 A Rear 12 V socket.
185 In the event of a breakdown
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F32 15 A Lighter / Front 12 V socket. Box 2
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F2 10A Heated door mirrors. F3 40 A Front one-touch windows. F4 15 A Driver’s door control panel - Memorisation of electric seats. F5 40 A Rear one-touch windows. F6 15 A 12 V socket in boot. F7 30 A Heated seats. F10 20 A Trailer interface unit. F12 25 A Hi-Fi amplifier. Passenger compartment fusebox
186 In the event of a breakdown
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions 8 F36 30 A Panoramic sunroof. F37 30 A Panoramic sunroof blind. F38 30 A Electric seats. F39 30 A Motorised tailgate unit. F40 25 A Additional heating. Trailer interface unit
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F36 20 A Brake lamps - Reversing lamps (trailer). F37 20 A Sidelamps - Direction indicators (trailer). F38 20 A Interior lighting (caravan). F40 2 A Audible signal (trailer).
Engine compartment fuses The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery.
187 In the event of a breakdown
Accessing the fuses ► Release the two latches A. ► Remove the cover. ► Replace the fuse. ► When you have finished, close the cover carefully, then engage the two latches A to ensure that the fusebox is properly sealed.
Fuse tables
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions F5 50 A Right-hand direction indicators - Front right-hand sidelamps - Right-hand brake lamps - Left-hand reversing lamps - Right-hand foglamps. F16 20 A Daytime running lamps. F18 10 A Right-hand main beam headlamp.
188 In the event of a breakdown
Fuse N° Rating (A) Functions 8 F19 10 A Left-hand main beam headlamp. F24 40 A Trailer interface unit. F27 25 A Right-hand dipped beam headlamp - Right-hand reversing lamps - Left-hand foglamps - Rear left-hand sidelamps - Third brake lamp. F29 40 A Windscreen wipers. F32 80 A Left-hand dipped beam headlamp - Static cornering lamps - Direction indicator side repeaters - Left-hand direction indicators - Front left-hand and rear right-hand sidelamps - Left-hand brake lamps - Number plate lamps.
naked flames and sources of sparks, to avoid ► Release the bonnet by pulling the internal 12 V battery any risk of explosion or fire. release lever, then the external safety catch. Procedure for starting the engine using another Wash your hands afterwards. ► Raise the bonnet. battery or charging a discharged battery. (+) Positive terminal. This terminal has a quick-release clamp. Lead-acid starter batteries Access to the battery (-) Negative terminal. The battery is located under the bonnet. As the battery's negative terminal is not These batteries contain harmful accessible, a remote earth point is located near substances (sulphuric acid and lead). the battery. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must never under any Starting using another circumstances be discarded with household waste. battery Take used remote control batteries and If your vehicle's battery is flat, the engine can be vehicle batteries to a special collection point. started using a backup battery (either external or from another vehicle) and jump leads or using a Protect your eyes and face before battery booster. handling the battery. Never start the engine by connecting a All operations on the battery must be carried For access to the (+) terminal: battery charger. out in a well ventilated area and away from Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster.
189 In the event of a breakdown
Check beforehand that the backup battery ► Connect one end of the green or black cable In some circumstances, it may be necessary to has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B or of charge the battery: at least equal to that of the discharged the booster (or to an earth point on the assisting – using the vehicle mainly for short journeys; battery. vehicle). – if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for The two vehicles must not be in contact with ► Connect the other end of the green or black several weeks. each other. cable to the earth point C. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Switch off all electricity-consuming equipment ► Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and workshop. on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, leave it running for a few minutes. To charge the vehicle's battery yourself, lighting, etc.). ► Operate the starter on the broken down use only a charger compatible with Make sure that the jump leads are well away vehicle and let the engine run. lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage of from the engine’s moving parts (fan, belt, If the engine does not start immediately, switch 12 V. etc.). off the ignition and wait a few moments before Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the trying again. engine is running. ► Wait for it to return to idle. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the charger.
► Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order. ► Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if Never reverse polarities. the vehicle has one. ► Allow the engine to run for at least It is not necessary to disconnect the 30 minutes, with the vehicle stationary, so that battery. the battery reaches an adequate state of charge. ► Switch off the ignition. Drive cautiously during the first 30 ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio minutes after starting the engine. system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
With an automatic gearbox, never try to start the engine by pushing the vehicle.
► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the vehicle has one. Charging the battery using a ► Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the battery charger (+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the For optimum service life of the battery, it is booster. essential to maintain an adequate state of charge.
190 In the event of a breakdown
If this label is present, use only a 12 V Quick-release terminal clamp charger to avoid causing irreversible 8 Disconnecting the (+) terminal damage to the electrical components related
to the Stop & Start system.
Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk of explosion! If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified workshop who will verify that the internal components
have not been damaged and that the case ► Switch off charger B before connecting has not cracked, which would mean a risk of the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any toxic and corrosive acid leaking. dangerous sparks.
► Ensure that the charger cables are in good ► Depending on equipment, lift the plastic cover condition. Some functions, including Stop & Start, on the (+) terminal. ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the are not available if the battery is not ► Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. vehicle has one. sufficiently charged. ► Remove clamp B by lifting it off. ► Connect the cables of charger B as follows: • the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal Reconnecting the (+) terminal Disconnecting the battery of battery A, In order to maintain an adequate state of charge • the negative (-) black cable to earth point C for starting the engine, it is recommended that on the vehicle. the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is ► At the end of the charging operation, switch taken out of service for a long period. off charger B before disconnecting the cables Before disconnecting the battery: from battery A. ► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows, roof). ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio system, wipers, lighting, etc.). 24v 12v ► Switch off the ignition and wait for 4 minutes.
At the battery, it is only necessary to disconnect the (+) terminal. ► Raise lever A fully. ► Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal.
191 In the event of a breakdown
► Push clamp B fully down. The Stop & Start system may not be Wash your hands afterwards. ► Lower lever A to lock clamp B. operational during the trip following the For the replacement of batteries, contact a ► Depending on equipment, lower the plastic first engine start. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. cover on the (+) terminal. In this case, the system will only be available again after a continuous period with the Do not force the lever as locking will be vehicle immobilised, the duration of which Accessing the batteries impossible if the clamp is not positioned depends on the exterior temperature and the Front correctly; start the procedure again. state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 The front battery is located under the bonnet. hours). After reconnection After reconnecting the battery, turn on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the Accessories batteries engine, to enable the electronic systems to initialise. (Hybrid) If minor problems nevertheless persist following The hybrid system has two accessory batteries: this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a one at the front and one at the rear of the qualified workshop. vehicle. Referring to the relevant section, reset certain The batteries contain harmful equipment: substances (sulphuric acid and lead). – Electronic key. They must be disposed of in accordance For access to the (+) terminal: – Sunroof and electric sun blind. with regulations and must not, in any ► Release the bonnet by operating the internal – Electric windows. circumstances, be discarded with household release lever, then the external safety catch. – Date and time. waste. ► Raise the bonnet. – Preset radio stations. Take used remote control batteries and (+) Positive terminal with a quick-release After reconnection of the battery, the vehicle batteries to a special collection point. terminal. “Collision risk detection system fault” (-) Negative terminal. message is displayed on the instrument panel Protect your eyes and face before As the battery's negative terminal is not when the ignition is switched on. This handling batteries. accessible, a remote earth point is placed near operation is perfectly normal. The message All operations on the batteries must be carried the battery. will disappear while driving. out in a well ventilated area and away from Rear naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to The rear battery is located in the boot. avoid the risk of explosion or fire. To reach the battery:
192 In the event of a breakdown
Follow the instructions provided by the ► At the end of the charging operation, switch manufacturer of the charger. off charger B before disconnecting the cables 8 Never reverse polarities. from battery A. Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk It is not necessary to disconnect the of explosion! battery. If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified workshop ► Switch off the ignition. ► Lift the boot floor. who will verify that the internal components ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio (+) Positive terminal, protected by a red plastic have not been damaged and that the case system, lighting, wipers, etc.). cover. has not cracked, which would mean a risk of (-) Negative terminal with a black quick-release toxic and corrosive acid leaking. connector. Charging the front battery Disconnection / using a battery charger reconnection of the For optimum service life of the front battery, it batteries is essential to maintain an adequate state of Procedure for disconnecting / reconnecting the charge. batteries in the event of long-term immobilisation In some circumstances, it may be necessary to of the vehicle. charge the front battery: Before disconnecting the batteries: – using the vehicle mainly for short journeys; ► Switch off charger B before connecting ► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows, – if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any roof). several weeks. dangerous sparks. ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► Ensure that the charger cables are in good system, wipers, lighting, etc.), workshop. condition. ► Switch off the ignition and wait for the READY To charge the vehicle's front battery ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the indicator lamp to go out. yourself, use only a charger compatible vehicle has one. ► Observe a waiting time of 4 minutes. with lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage ► Connect the cables of charger B as follows: of 12 V. • the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal of battery A, • the negative (-) black cable to earth point C on the vehicle.
193 In the event of a breakdown
Disconnection – Date and time. – Preset radio stations. Never reverse the order of the disconnection steps - risk of irreversible damage! Towing the vehicle
► Disconnect the (-) terminal of the rear battery General recommendations using the black quick-release connector. Observe the legislation in force in the country where you are driving. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is
higher than that of the towed vehicle. ► Connect the (+) terminal of the front battery The driver must remain at the wheel of the by connecting the red quick-release clamp: towed vehicle and must have a valid driving • Raise lever A fully. licence. • Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on • Push clamp B fully down. the ground, always use an approved towing • Lower lever A to lock clamp B. arm; rope and straps are prohibited. ► Connect the (-) terminal to the rear battery The towing vehicle must move off gently. When the vehicle is towed with its engine using the black quick-release terminal connector. ► Disconnect the (+) terminal of the front off, there is no longer braking and steering battery by disconnecting the red quick-release After reconnection assistance. clamp: After reconnecting the battery, turn on the • Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the A professional towing service must be • Remove clamp B by lifting it off. engine, to enable the electronic systems to called if: initialise. – Broken down on a motorway or main road. Reconnection If minor problems nevertheless persist following – Not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a unlock the steering, or release the parking Never reverse the order of the qualified workshop. brake. reconnection steps - risk of irreversible Referring to the relevant section, reset certain – Not possible to tow a vehicle with an damage! equipment: automatic gearbox, with the engine running.
– Electronic key. – Towing with only two wheels on the ground. – Sunroof and electric sun blind. – Four-wheel drive vehicle. – Electric windows. – No approved towbar available.
194 In the event of a breakdown
Hybrid vehicles Before any intervention, with the ignition on, depress the brake pedal and select mode N, then switch off the hybrid system READY( indicator lamp 8 off). Always call on professionals for recovery of the vehicle on a flatbed lorry or trailer. Use the towing eye only to free the vehicle where it is stuck, or to secure it for recovery on a flatbed lorry or trailer.
Towing constraints Type of vehicle Front wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground (engine / gearbox) ground ground with towbar
Internal combustion / Manual
Internal combustion / Automatic
Hybrid 2WD
2WD: 2-wheel drive. In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox).
195 In the event of a breakdown
Access to the tools Towing your vehicle ► Unlock the steering and release the parking brake. To access the front screw thread: ► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles. ► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a short distance. Towing another vehicle To access the rear screw thread:
Hatchback ► Unclip the cover by pressing at its lower section. ► Release the cover to the right and then downwards. To be towed: ► Screw the towing eye in fully. ► Install the towbar. ► Put the gearbox into neutral. ► Unclip the cover by pressing at its lower part. To tow: Failure to observe this instruction could ► Screw the towing eye in fully. result in damage to certain components ► Install the towbar. (braking, transmission, etc.) and to the ► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both absence of braking assistance the next time vehicles.
the engine is started. SW ► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a The towing eye is stored in a tool box, under the short distance. boot floor. Automatic gearbox: never tow the vehicle For more information on accessing the Tool kit, with the driving wheels on the ground refer to the corresponding section. and the engine off.
196 Technical data
Engine technical data and When exterior temperatures are high, the vehicle performance may be limited in 9 towed loads order to protect the engine. When the exterior temperature is higher than 37°C, reduce the Engines towed weight. The engine characteristics are given in the vehicle's registration document, as well as in Towing even with a lightly loaded vehicle sales brochures. can adversely affect its road holding. Braking distances are increased when towing The maximum power corresponds to the a trailer. value type-approved on a test bed, under When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed conditions defined in European legislation a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the (Directive 1999/99/EC). local legislation in force). For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Weights and towed loads The weights and towed loads relating to the vehicle are indicated on the registration document, as well as in sales brochures. These values are also indicated on the manufacturer's plate or label. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The GTW (Gross Train Weight) values and the towable loads listed are valid for a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres. The towable load must be reduced by steps of 10% for each additional 1,000 metres. The maximum authorised nose weight corresponds to the weight permitted on the towball.
197 Technical data Engines and towed loads - Petrol Engines and towed loads – Diesel BlueHDi
Engines THP 150 THP 165 PureTech 180 S&S EAT8 PureTech 225 S&S EAT8 Engines BlueHDi 130 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 130 S&S EAT8 EAT6 EAT6 Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Automatic 8-speed Gearboxes Automatic Automatic Automatic 8-speed Automatic 8-speed Codes DV5RC ML6C STT DV5RC ATN8 STT 6-speed 6-speed Model codes YHZJ YHZR Codes EP6FDTMD EP6FDTM EP6FADTXD ATN8 STT EP6FADTX ATN8 STT Hatchback: FB... AT6III AT6III SW: FC... Model codes 5GXV 5GYV 5GFT 5GGT Body styles Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback: F3... SW: F4... Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499 1499 Body styles Hatchback Hatchback Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,598 1,598 1,598 1,598 Fuel Diesel Diesel Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110 121 133 165 Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1500 1500 1500 1500 on a 10% or 12% gradient Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unbraked trailer (kg) 745 745 745 745 Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 600 600 1,600 1,600 1,600 1,600 on a 10% or 12% gradient Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 75 75 75 Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 600 745 745 745 745 Engines BlueHDi 160 S&S EAT8 BlueHDi 180 S&S EAT8 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 75 75 75 75 75 Gearboxes Automatic 8-speed Automatic 8-speed Codes DW10FCC AMN8 STT DW10FC AMN8 STT Model codes EHYR EHZR Hatchback: FH... SW: FJ... Body styles Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Cubic capacity (cc) 1,997 1,997 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 120 133
198 Technical data Engines and towed loads – Diesel BlueHDi 9 Engines BlueHDi 130 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 130 S&S EAT8 Gearboxes Manual 6-speed Automatic 8-speed Codes DV5RC ML6C STT DV5RC ATN8 STT Model codes YHZJ YHZR Hatchback: FB... SW: FC... Body styles Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499 1499 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 Fuel Diesel Diesel Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1500 1500 1500 1500 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 745 745 745 745 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 75 75 75
Engines BlueHDi 160 S&S EAT8 BlueHDi 180 S&S EAT8 Gearboxes Automatic 8-speed Automatic 8-speed Codes DW10FCC AMN8 STT DW10FC AMN8 STT Model codes EHYR EHZR Hatchback: FH... SW: FJ... Body styles Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Cubic capacity (cc) 1,997 1,997 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 120 133
199 Technical data
Engines BlueHDi 160 S&S EAT8 BlueHDi 180 S&S EAT8 Engines and towed loads - Diesel
Gearboxes Automatic 8-speed Automatic 8-speed Engines HDi 180 EAT8 Codes DW10FCC AMN8 STT DW10FC AMN8 STT Gearboxes Automatic 8-speed Model codes EHYR EHZR Codes DW10FC AMN8 Hatchback: FH... Model codes EHZN SW: FJ... Hatchback: FH... Body styles Hatchback SW Hatchback SW SW: FJ... Fuel Diesel Diesel Body styles Hatchback SW Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,800 1,800 1,800 1,800 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,997 on a 10% or 12% gradient Max. power: EC standard (kW) 133 Unbraked trailer (kg) 750 750 750 750 Fuel Diesel Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 75 75 75 Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 600 600 on a 10% or 12% gradient 1,800* 1,800* Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 600 750* 750* Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 75
* Only for Russia.
200 Technical data Engines and towed loads - Diesel 9 Engines HDi 180 EAT8 Gearboxes Automatic 8-speed Codes DW10FC AMN8 Model codes EHZN Hatchback: FH... SW: FJ... Body styles Hatchback SW Cubic capacity (cc) 1,997 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 133 Fuel Diesel Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 600 600 on a 10% or 12% gradient 1,800* 1,800* Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 600 750* 750* Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 75 75
* Only for Russia.
201 Technical data Engine and towed loads - Hybrid Dimensions (mm) These dimensions have been measured on an HYBRID 225 e-EAT8 unladen vehicle. Code EP6FADTXHPD Hatchback
Model codes 5GQU/C Hatchback: F3... SW: F4... Body styles Hatchback SW Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,330 1 340 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 745 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 54 62 Petrol engine PureTech 180 Gearbox Electric automatic 8-speed Cubic capacity (cc) 1598 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 132 Fuel Unleaded Electric motor Technology Synchronous with permanent magnets Max. power: EC standard (kW) 80 Battery Technology Lithium-Ion Voltage (Volts AC) 240-400
Max. consumption (kWh) 11.8 Combined power (kW) 165
202 Technical data Dimensions (mm) 9 These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle. Hatchback
SW
203 Technical data
Identification markings – European whole vehicle type approval number. Various visible markings for the identification and – Vehicle identification number (VIN). research of your vehicle.
– Gross vehicle weight (GVW). – Gross train weight (GTW). – Maximum weight on the front axle. – Maximum weight on the rear axle. D. Tyres / paint code label. Fixed at the driver-side door. Bears the following information about the tyres: – tyre pressures, unladen and laden. – tyre specification, made up of the dimensions and type as well as the load and speed indices. – spare tyre inflation pressure. Also indicates the paint colour code.
The vehicle may be originally equipped with tyres with higher load and speed indices than those indicated on the label, without affecting tyre pressure (on cold tyres).
A. Vehicle identification number (VIN), under the bonnet. Stamped on the chassis. B. Vehicle identification number (VIN), on the dashboard. On a label, visible through the windscreen. C. Manufacturer's label. Fixed at the right-hand door. Bears the following information: – Manufacturer’s name.
204 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
PEUGEOT Connect applications interrupt their display while the At all times it is possible to display the rolling vehicle is moving). menus by pressing the screen briefly with three 10 Radio – Changing the system settings and fingers. configuration. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. For pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of the The system is protected in such a way screen, it is possible to switch between pages that it will only operate in the vehicle. either by tapping the tab for the desired page, or The Energy Economy Mode message is by using a finger, sliding the pages to the left or displayed when the system is about to enter to the right. the corresponding mode. Press in the grey zone to go back up a level or to confirm. Press the back arrow to go back a level or The system’s Open Source Software confirm. (OSS) source codes are available at the following addresses: The touch screen is of the "capacitive" Multimedia audio system - https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ type. Applications - Bluetooth® https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional telephone product. The functions and settings described First steps Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands. vary according to the vehicle version and With the engine running, a press mutes configuration. the sound. Certain information is displayed permanently in With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. the upper bar of the touch screen: For safety reasons and because they Increase or decrease the volume using – Air conditioning status information (depending require sustained attention by the driver, the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons on version), and direct access to the the following operations must be carried out (depending on the equipment). corresponding menu. with the vehicle stationary and the ignition Use the buttons on either side of or below the – Radio Media and Telephone menu status on: touch screen for access to the menus, then information. – Pairing the smartphone with the system in press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. – Privacy status information. Bluetooth mode. Depending on the model, use the "Source" or – Access to the touch screen and digital – Using the smartphone. "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen instrument panel settings. – Connection to the CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM for access to the menus, then press the virtual Audio source selection (depending on or Android Auto applications (certain buttons in the touch screen. equipment):
205 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
– FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on Steering mounted controls Steering mounted controls - Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing equipment). selected, access to presets. – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and Type 2 Radio: display the list of stations.
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Steering mounted controls - Media: display the list of tracks. – USB Memory stick. Type 1 Radio (press and hold): update the list of – Media player connected via the auxiliary Voice commands: stations received.
socket (depending on equipment). This control is located on the steering
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Radio: (depending on equipment). Menus Select the previous/next preset radio Short press, smartphone voice commands via station. the system. Applications
Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. Increase volume. Media: Select the previous/next track. Decrease volume. Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. Mute by pressing the volume increase Radio: and decrease buttons simultaneously Short press: display the list of radio (depending on equipment).
stations. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two Long press: update the list. In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to volume buttons. Media: create a profile for an individual or for a (short press): change the Short press: display the list of folders. Media group of people with shared interests, and multimedia source.
Long press: display the available sorting options. configure a wide range of settings (radio Telephone (short press): start telephone Change audio source (radio; USB; AUX if Access configurable equipment. presets, audio settings, ambiences, etc.). call. equipment connected; CD; streaming). Settings are applied automatically. (short press): access Confirm a selection. Call in progress telephone menu. (long press): reject an incoming call, In very hot conditions, the volume may Increase volume. Telephone be limited to protect the system. It may end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu. enter standby mode (with the screen and Decrease volume. sound off) for 5 minutes or more. Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous/next station. The system will resume normal operation Mute/restore sound by simultaneously (rotate): previous/next track, move in a when the temperature in the passenger pressing the increase and decrease Media list. compartment has dropped. volume buttons.
206 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing Radio Media Settings selected, access to presets. 10 Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received. Menus Applications
Select an audio source or radio station. Configure a personal profile and/or configure the sound (balance, ambience, etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, Telephone etc.).
Driving
Access configurable equipment.
Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth®.
Run certain applications on a smartphone connected via MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay® or Android Activate, deactivate or configure certain Auto. vehicle functions.
207 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Navigation Applications Press this button to search and select a Enter the FM and AM waveband values recipient. using the virtual keypad. Viewing photos Select the "Quick messages” tab. Press "OK" to confirm. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. Press this button to select the display Radio reception may be affected by the settings for messages. To protect the system, do not use a USB use of electrical equipment not approved Press this button to write a new message. hub. by the Brand, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The system can read folders and image files in Press the bin alongside the selected The exterior environment (hills, buildings, the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp and .png. message to delete it. tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press Applications to display the main Press this button alongside the selected
block reception, including in RDS mode. page. message to display the secondary page. This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Configure the navigation and select your Press "Photos". Press this button to edit and modify the TM ® context of radio wave transmission, and destination via MirrorLink , CarPlay or existing text. in no way indicative of an audio system Android Auto. Select a folder. Press this button to write a new message. malfunction.
Air conditioning Select an image to view. Press the bin to delete the message.
Changing the waveband Press this button to display the details of Press Radio Media to display the main the photo. Radio page. Press the back arrow to go back a level. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the 18,5 21,5 secondary page. Selecting a station Press "Band" to change waveband. Managing messages Press Radio Media to display the main Press Applications to display the main page. Press in the shaded area to confirm. page. Press one of the buttons to perform an automatic search for radio stations. Press "SMS". Manage various temperature and air flow Or Presetting a station Move the slider to manually search for settings. Select the "SMS” tab. Select a radio station or frequency. frequencies up or down. Make a short press on the star outline. If Or Press this button to select the display the star is solid, the radio station is Press the frequency. settings for messages. already preset.
208 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Enter the FM and AM waveband values Or Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the using the virtual keypad. Select a radio station or frequency. secondary page. 10 Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Preset". Activate/deactivate "News". Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved Activating/Deactivating RDS by the Brand, such as a USB charger RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Playing TA messages connected to the 12 V socket. listening to the same station by automatically The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives The exterior environment (hills, buildings, retuning to alternative frequencies. priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press to display the main function needs good reception of a radio station block reception, including in RDS mode. Radio Media page. that transmits this type of message. While traffic This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Press the " " button to access the information is being broadcast, the current context of radio wave transmission, and OPTIONS secondary page. media is automatically interrupted so that the in no way indicative of an audio system Activate/deactivate " ". TA message can be heard. Normal play of the malfunction. RDS previously playing media resumes at the end of Press in the shaded area to confirm. the message. Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main page. Press Radio Media to display the main RDS station tracking may not be Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page. available nationwide, as many radio secondary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the stations do not cover 100 % of the country. Activate/deactivate "TA". secondary page. This explains the loss of reception of the Press "Band" to change waveband. station during a journey. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Displaying text information The "Radio Text" function displays information Audio settings Presetting a station transmitted by the radio station relating to the Press Radio Media to display the main Select a radio station or frequency. station or the currently playing song. page. Make a short press on the star outline. If Press Radio Media to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the the star is solid, the radio station is page. secondary page. already preset. Press "Audio settings".
209 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Select the "Tone", "Balance", "Sound", DAB (Digital Audio Press in the shaded area to confirm. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition "Voice" or "Ringtones" tab to configure is switched off or a USB memory stick is the sound settings. Broadcasting) radio connected. The audio system memorises these If "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated, there Press the back arrow to confirm. lists, which will subsequently load faster if they may be a time offset of a few seconds have not been changed. Terrestrial Digital Radio when the system switches to "FM" analogue In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience, Bass, Digital radio provides higher quality sound. radio, and in some cases a change in volume. Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Medium and Treble sound settings are The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a When the digital signal quality is restored, the Depending on equipment different and independent for each audio choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical system automatically changes back to "DAB". Connect a portable device (MP3 player, source. order. Press to display the main etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an In the "Balance” tab, the All passengers, Radio Media If the "DAB" station being listened to is page. audio cable (not supplied). Driver and Front only settings are common not available on "FM", or if "FM-DAB Press the " " button to access the This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" to all sources. OPTIONS Follow-up" is not activated, the sound will cut secondary page. has been selected in the audio settings. In the "Sound” tab, activate or deactivate out while the digital signal is too weak. First adjust the volume on the portable device "Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary input" Press "Band" to select "DAB band". (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the and "Touch tones". Press in the shaded area to confirm. audio system. Media Controls are managed via the portable device. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation with the Arkamys© system) uses audio Selecting the source processing to adjust the sound quality FM-DAB Follow-up USB port Press Radio Media to display the main according to the number of passengers in the "DAB" does not cover 100 % of the country. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB page. vehicle. When the digital radio signal is poor, the port or connect the USB device to the "FM-DAB Follow-up" enables you to continue USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Press the "SOURCES" button. listening to the same station by automatically Select the source. Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© To protect the system, do not use a USB switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue optimises the sound distribution inside hub. ® station (if there is one). BluetoothStreaming the passenger compartment. Press Radio Media to display the main The system builds playlists (in temporary Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed page. memory); this operation can take from a from your smartphone. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the few seconds to several minutes at the first The Bluetooth profile must be activated. secondary page. connection. First adjust the volume on the portable device Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". Reduce the number of non-music files and the (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. system.
210 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Playlists are updated whenever the ignition If play does not start automatically, it may be Information and advice is switched off or a USB memory stick is necessary to start the audio playback from the 10 The system supports USB mass storage connected. The audio system memorises these smartphone. devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players lists, which will subsequently load faster if they Control is from the portable device or by using via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not have not been changed. the system's touch buttons. supplied. Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Once connected in Streaming mode, the Devices are managed using the audio system smartphone is considered to be a media controls. Depending on equipment source. Other devices, not recognised on connection, Connect a portable device (MP3 player, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an ® a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth audio cable (not supplied). Connecting Apple players streaming, if compatible. This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket To protect the system, do not use a USB has been selected in the audio settings. using a suitable cable (not supplied). hub. First adjust the volume on the portable device Play starts automatically. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the Control is via the audio system. The audio system will only play audio files with audio system. ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file Controls are managed via the portable device. The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists/ extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and Selecting the source albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ 320 Kbps. podcasts). It is also possible to use a It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. Press Radio Media to display the main classification structured in the form of a No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. page. library. All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. Press the "SOURCES" button. The default classification used is by artist. To The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and Select the source. modify the classification used, return to the 48 KHz. BluetoothStreaming® first level of the menu then select the desired To avoid reading and display problems, we classification (playlists for example) and recommend choosing file names less than 20 Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed confirm to go down through the menu to the characters long that do not contain any special from your smartphone. desired track. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). The Bluetooth profile must be activated. Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format First adjust the volume on the portable device The version of software in the audio system may (File Allocation Table). (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the not be compatible with the generation of the We recommend using the original USB system. Apple® player. cable for the portable device.
211 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Telephone MirrorLinkTM smartphone Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® application in the system. interface. USB sockets connection Once the connection is established, a page is On connecting the USB cable, the TM displayed, showing the applications already Depending on equipment, for more information The "MirrorLink " function requires a CarPlay® function deactivates the downloaded to the smartphone that are on the USB sockets compatible with the compatible smartphone and applications. ® TM system's Bluetooth mode. CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto compatible with MirrorLink technology. applications, refer to the "Ease of use and Access to the different audio sources remains TM When the USB cable is disconnected comfort" section. Telephone not connected by available in the margin of the MirrorLink Bluetooth® display, using the touch buttons located in the and the ignition is switched off then back on, the system will not automatically switch to The synchronisation of a smartphone When connecting a smartphone to the upper bar. Radio Media mode; the source must be allows users to display applications system, we recommend enabling Access to the menus for the system is possible ® TM changed manually. adapted to the CarPlay , MirrorLink or Bluetooth® on the smartphone. at any time using the dedicated buttons. Android Auto technology of the smartphone Connect a USB cable. The smartphone ® ® There may be a pause before The CarPlay navigation can be accessed on the vehicle screen. For the CarPlay charges when connected by a USB cable. ® applications become available, at any time by pressing the system's technology, the CarPlay function must be From the system, press " " to Telephone depending on the quality of the network. Navigation button. activated on the smartphone beforehand. display the main page. For the communication process between TM Press "MirrorLink " to start the Android Auto smartphone the smartphone and the system to work, it is application in the system. CarPlay® smartphone essential in all cases that the smartphone is Depending on the smartphone, it may be connection unlocked. TM connection necessary to activate the "MirrorLink " On the smartphone, download the Connect a USB cable. The smartphone As the principles and standards are function. Android Auto application. charges when connected by a USB cable. constantly changing, it is recommended During the procedure, several screen From the system, press to The "Android Auto" function requires the that you keep the smartphone's operating pages relating to certain features are Telephone display the CarPlay® interface. use of a compatible smartphone and system up-to-date, as well as the date and displayed. Or applications. time of the smartphone and of the system. Accept to start and complete the connection. For the list of eligible smartphones, go to the If the smartphone has already connected Brand's national website. Telephone connected by Bluetooth® by Bluetooth®. Telephone not connected by Connect a USB cable. The smartphone ® Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Bluetooth charges when connected by a USB cable. charges when connected by a USB cable. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone From the system, press "Telephone" to From the system, press "Telephone" to charges when connected by a USB cable. display the main page. display the main page. From the system, press "Telephone" to Press the "PHONE" button to access the Press the "PHONE" button to display the display the main page. secondary page. secondary page.
212 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Press "Android Auto" to start the Pairing a Bluetooth® interface. application in the system. 10 Depending on the smartphone, it may be telephone On connecting the USB cable, the necessary to activate the "Android Auto" CarPlay® function deactivates the The services available depend on the function. system's Bluetooth® mode. network, the SIM card and the During the procedure, several screen compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. pages relating to certain features are Consult the telephone user guide and the When the USB cable is disconnected displayed. service provider to check which services are and the ignition is switched off then back Accept to start and complete the connection. available. on, the system will not automatically switch to When connecting a smartphone to the Radio Media mode; the source must be system, we recommend enabling The Bluetooth function must be activated changed manually. Bluetooth® on the smartphone. and the telephone configured as "Visible ® The CarPlay navigation can be accessed Telephone connected by Bluetooth® to all” (in the telphone settings). at any time by pressing the system's From the system, press "Telephone" to Navigation button. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is display the main page. used (from the telephone or from the system), Android Auto smartphone Press the "PHONE" button to display the ensure that the code is the same in the system secondary page. and in the telephone. connection Press "Android Auto" to start the On the smartphone, download the application in the system. If the pairing procedure fails, we Android Auto application. Access to the different audio sources remains recommend deactivating and then available in the margin of the Android Auto reactivating the Bluetooth function on the The "Android Auto" function requires the display, using the touch buttons located in the telephone. use of a compatible smartphone and upper bar. applications. Access to the menus for the system is possible Procedure from the telephone at any time using the dedicated buttons. Select the name of the system in the list Telephone not connected by There may be a pause before of detected devices. Bluetooth® applications become available, In the system, accept the connection request Connect a USB cable. The smartphone depending on the quality of the network. from the telephone. charges when connected by a USB cable. From the system, press "Telephone" to display the main page.
213 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Procedure from the system Visit the Brand's website for more information Press on the name of the telephone Calling a new number Press Telephone to display the main (compatibility, additional help, etc.). selected in the list to disconnect it. Press Telephone to display the main page. Press again to connect it. page. Press "Bluetooth search". Automatic reconnection Enter the phone number using the digital The list of detected telephones is On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Deleting a telephone keypad. displayed. connected is present again, it is automatically Press the basket at the top right of the Press "Call" to start the call. Select the name of the chosen telephone recognised and within about 30 seconds screen to display a basket alongside the in the list. after switching on the ignition, the pairing is telephone chosen. established automatically (Bluetooth activated). Press the basket alongside the telephone Calling a contact Connection sharing To modify the connection profile: chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main The system offers to connect the telephone with Press Telephone to display the main page. 3 profiles: page. Receiving a call Or press and hold – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), Press the "PHONE" button to access the An incoming call is announced by a ring and a – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of secondary page. superimposed display in the screen. the steering mounted PHONE button. audio files on the telephone), Press "Bluetooth connection" to Make a short press on the steering – "Mobile internet data". display the list of paired devices. mounted PHONE button to accept an Press "Contacts". Select one or more profiles. Press the "Details" button for a paired incoming call. Select the desired contact from the displayed list. device. And Press "Call". Press "OK" to confirm. Select one or more profiles. Make a long press
Depending on the type of telephone, you may by Press "OK" to confirm. on the steering mounted PHONE button Calling a recently used prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and to reject the call. number messages. Or Managing paired telephones Press "End call". Press Telephone to display the main The ability of the system to connect just This function lets you connect or disconnect a page. one profile depends on the telephone. device or delete a pairing. Or All three profiles may connect by default. Press Telephone to display the main Making a call Press and hold page. The profiles compatible with the system Press the "PHONE" button to access the Using the telephone is not recommended the steering mounted button. are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, secondary page. while driving. MAP and PAN. Press "Bluetooth connection" to Parking the vehicle. Press "Recent calls". display the list of paired devices. Make the call using the steering mounted Select the desired contact from the displayed list. controls.
214 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Calling a new number It is always possible to make a call Press the back arrow again to confirm. directly from the telephone; as a safety 10 Press Telephone to display the main page. measure, first park the vehicle. Press this button to reset the selected Enter the phone number using the digital profile. keypad. Setting the ringtone Press "Call" to start the call. Adjusting the brightness Press Telephone to display the main Press Settings to display the main page. page. Calling a contact Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press Brightness. secondary page. Press Telephone to display the main Press "Ring volume" to display the page. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of volume bar. Or press and hold the screen and/or the instrument panel Press the arrows or move the slider to set (depending on version). the ring volume. the steering mounted PHONE button. Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Press "Contacts". Settings Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Modifying system settings Press "Call". Configuring profiles Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Calling a recently used secondary page. Press "Profiles". number Press "System configuration". Press Telephone to display the main Select "Profile 1", "Profile ",2 "Profile 3” or Press the "Units" tab to change the units of page. " ". Common profile distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Or Press this button to enter a name for the Press the "Factory settings" tab to restore the Press and hold profile using the virtual keypad. initial settings. Press "OK" to save. the steering mounted button. Returning the system to factory settings Press the back arrow to confirm. activates the English language by default Press "Recent calls". (depending on version). Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press this button to activate the profile.
215 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Press the "System info" tab to display the Press the back arrow to confirm. Press the back arrow to save the settings. Frequently asked versions of the various modules installed in the system. questions The system may not automatically Press the "Privacy" tab, Selecting the language manage the change between winter and The following information groups together the or Press to display the main page. Settings summer time (depending on the country of answers to the most frequently asked questions Press Settings to display the main page. sale). concerning the system. Press "Configuration" to access the Press "Privacy" to activate or deactivate secondary page. Radio the private data mode. Select "Language" to change the Setting the date The reception quality of the tuned radio Activate or deactivate: language. Press Settings to display the main page. station gradually deteriorates or the station Press the back arrow to confirm. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press "Configuration" to access the is displayed, etc.). – "Only data sharing” secondary page. The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s – "Data and vehicle position sharing" Setting the time Press "Date and time". transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Press the back arrow to confirm. Press Settings to display the main page. geographical area. Select "Date". ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Press this button to set the date. to enable the system to check whether there is secondary page. a more powerful transmitter in the geographical Press "Configuration" to access the Press "Date and time". Press the back arrow to save the date. area. secondary page. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, Press "Screen configuration". Select "Time". Select the display format for the date. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, Press this button to set the time using the including in RDS mode. Press "Brightness". virtual keypad. Press the back arrow again to confirm. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Press "OK" to save the time. not indicative of an audio system malfunction. the screen and/or the instrument panel The aerial is missing or has been damaged Time and date setting is only available if (depending on version). Press this button to set the time zone. (for example while entering a car wash or "GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated. Press the back arrow to confirm. underground car park). Select the display format for the time ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. Press "Animation". (12h/24h). I cannot find some radio stations in the list of Activate or deactivate: “Automatic Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 received stations. scrolling”. hour). The name of the radio station changes. Select "Animated transitions". Activate or deactivate GPS The station is no longer received or its name has synchronisation (UTC). changed in the list.
216 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Frequently asked ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer "Radio" page. of this information. 10 questions Some radio stations send other information The following information groups together the in place of their name (the title of the song for Telephone answers to the most frequently asked questions example). I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. concerning the system. The system interprets these details as the station The telephone's Bluetooth function may be name. switched off or the telephone may not be visible. Radio ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth The reception quality of the tuned radio "Radio" page. switched on. station gradually deteriorates or the station ► Check in the telephone settings that it is presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz Media "visible to all". is displayed, etc.). Playback of my USB memory stick starts only The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). the system. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Some files supplied with the memory stick may ► Check the compatibility of the telephone on geographical area. greatly slow down access to reading the memory the Brand's website (services). ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing Android Auto and CarPlay do not work. to enable the system to check whether there is time). Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the a more powerful transmitter in the geographical ► Delete the files supplied with the memory USB cables are of poor quality. area. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ► Use genuine USB cables to ensure The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, file structure on the memory stick. compatibility. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, Some characters in information about the The volume of the telephone connected in including in RDS mode. currently playing media are not displayed Bluetooth mode is inaudible. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is correctly. The volume depends on both the system and the not indicative of an audio system malfunction. The audio system is unable to process certain telephone. The aerial is missing or has been damaged types of character. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to (for example while entering a car wash or ► Use standard characters to name tracks and maximum if required, and increase the volume of underground car park). folders. the telephone if necessary. ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. Playback of streaming files does not start. Ambient noise affects the quality of the I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The connected device does not automatically telephone call. received stations. launch playback. ► Reduce ambient noise (close windows, The name of the radio station changes. ► Start playback from the device. reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). The station is no longer received or its name has Track names and playing times are not The contacts are not listed in alphabetical changed in the list. displayed on the audio streaming screen. order.
217 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Some telephones offer display options. When the engine is off, the system switches Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can off after several minutes of use. be transferred in a specific order. When the engine is switched off, the system's ► Modify the telephone directory display operating time depends on the state of charge of settings. the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system Settings automatically goes into energy economy mode When the treble and bass settings are and switches off to maintain an adequate charge changed, the ambience is deselected. in the battery. When the ambience is changed, the treble ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the and bass settings are reset. charge of the battery. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and bass settings, and vice versa. ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. When the balance settings are changed, the distribution is deselected. When the distribution setting is changed, the balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the balance settings, and vice versa. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution setting to obtain the desired sound quality. There is a difference in sound quality between audio sources. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound functions to the middle position.
218 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
PEUGEOT Connect Nav applications interrupt their display while the Use the menu buttons on either side of or below
vehicle is moving). the touch screen for access to the menus, then 11 – Watching a video (the video stops when the press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. vehicle starts to move again). Depending on the model, use the "Source" or – Changing the system settings and "Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus, then configuration. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Display the rolling menus at any time by pressing The system is protected in such a way the screen briefly with three fingers. that it will only operate in the vehicle. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. The Energy Economy Mode message is Press the back arrow to go back a level. displayed when the system is about to enter Press "OK" to confirm.
the corresponding mode. The touch screen is of the "capacitive" GPS navigation - type. System and map updates can be To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive Applications - Multimedia downloaded from the Brand’s website. cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional audio system - Bluetooth® The update procedure is also available on the product. website. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. telephone Do not touch the screen with wet hands. The functions and settings described The system’s Open Source Software Certain information is displayed permanently vary according to the vehicle version and (OSS) source codes are available at the in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch configuration. following addresses: screen (depending on equipment): https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ – Air conditioning status information (depending https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ For safety reasons and because they on version), and direct access to the require sustained attention by the driver, corresponding menu. the following operations must be carried out – Go directly to the audio source selection with the vehicle stationary and the ignition First steps option, to view the list of radio stations (or list of on: With the engine running, a press mutes titles depending on the source). – Pairing the smartphone with the system in the sound. – Go to the "Notifications" of messages, emails, Bluetooth mode. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. map updates and, depending on the services, – Using the smartphone. Increase or decrease the volume using the navigation notifications. ® TM – Connection to the CarPlay , MirrorLink the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons – Go to the settings for the touch screen and the or Android Auto applications (certain (depending on the equipment). digital instrument panel.
219 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Audio source selection (depending on enter standby mode (with the screen and Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, Applications equipment): sound off) for 5 minutes or more. end call; when no call is in progress, access – FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on The system will resume normal operation telephone menu. equipment). when the temperature in the passenger Radio (rotate): automatic search for the – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and compartment has dropped. previous / next station. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Media (rotate): previous / next track, move in a – USB memory stick. list. – Media player connected via the auxiliary Steering mounted controls Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing socket (depending on equipment). selected, access to presets. Voice control: – Video (depending on equipment). Radio: display the list of stations. This control is located on the steering Media: display the list of tracks.
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Radio (press and hold): update the list of (depending on equipment). stations received. Run certain applications on a smartphone Short press, system voice control. connected via CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM Long press, voice control for smartphone or (available in some countries) or Android Auto. CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM (availability depending on Menus Check the status of Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi country), Android Auto via the system. connections. Increase volume. Connected navigation Radio Media Decrease volume. Mute by pressing the volume increase In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to and decrease buttons simultaneously FM 87.5 MHz create a profile for an individual or for a (depending on equipment). group of people with shared interests, and Restore the sound by pressing one of the two configure a wide range of settings (radio volume buttons. presets, audio settings, navigation history, Media (short press): change the favourite contacts, etc.). Settings are applied multimedia source. automatically. Telephone (short press): start telephone call.
Call in progress (short press): access Enter navigation settings and choose a In very hot conditions, the volume may Select an audio source or radio station, or telephone menu. destination. be limited to protect the system. It may Use real-time services, depending on equipment. display photographs.
220 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Applications Telephone Vehicle 11
Run certain applications on a smartphone Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, read Activate, deactivate or configure certain connected via CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM messages and emails and send quick vehicle functions. (available in some countries) or Android Auto. messages. Check the status of Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi Air conditioning connections. Settings
Radio Media
18,5 21,5 FM 87.5 MHz
Manage various temperature and air flow Configure a personal profile and/or settings.
configure the sound (balance, ambience, Select an audio source or radio station, or etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, display photographs. etc.).
221 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Voice commands Example of a "voice command" for the radio and step. There's more information available in media: "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to "Play artist Madonna" "expert" when you feel comfortable. Steering wheel-mounted Example of a "voice command" for the controls telephone: Global voice commands Voice commands: "Call David Miller" Voice commands Voice commands can be issued from any The voice commands, with a choice of 17 screen page after a short press on the "Voice languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech, Set dialogue mode as novice - expert commands" button located on the steering Select user 1 / Select profile John Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, Increase temperature wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, A number of commands are available when a Decrease temperature (depending on equipment), as long as there is no Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, menu is selected.
telephone call in progress. Turkish), are made using the language Help messages To ensure that voice commands are previously chosen and set in the system. There are lots of topics I can help you with. always recognised by the system, please For some voice commands, there are You can say: "help with phone", "help with follow these recommendations: alternative synonyms. navigation", "help with media" or "help with – Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ... use natural language in a normal tone radio". For an overview on how to use voice The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate without breaking up words or raising your controls, you can say "help with voice controls". to address" and "Display POI in the city", are voice. Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" – always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) not available. and we'll start that again. before speaking.
– for best results, closing the windows and Information - Using the "Navigation" voice sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous Press the Push To Talk button and tell me interference (depending on version). system what you'd like after the tone. Remember commands – before issuing a voice command, ask any When voice commands are activated, by you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this Voice commands other passengers to refrain from speaking. briefly pressing the button, help is button. If you press it again while I'm waiting for displayed on the touch screen, offering various you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you Navigate home menus and enabling voice-based interaction with need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to Navigate to work First steps the system. undo something, say "undo". And to get Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club
Example of a "voice command" for information and tips at any time, just say "help". Navigate to contact, John Miller navigation: If you ask to me do something and there's some Navigate to address 11 regent street, London "Navigate to address 11 regent street, information missing that I need, I'll give you Help messages London" some examples or take you through it step by
222 PEUGEOT Connect Nav step. There's more information available in To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the distance" or "arrival time". To learn more "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to address, the contact name or an intersection. For commands, try saying "help with navigation". 11 "expert" when you feel comfortable. example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, Voice commands London", "navigate to contact, John Miller", Global voice commands or "navigate to intersection of Regent Street, Show POI ''hotel'' at the destination Voice commands London". You can specify if it's a preferred Show nearby POI petrol station address, or a Point of Interest. For example, say Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London Set dialogue mode as novice - expert "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or Navigate to POI petrol station along the route Select user 1 / Select profile John "navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London". Help messages Increase temperature Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see Decrease temperature Points of Interest on a map, you can say things To see points of interest on a map, you can Help messages like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show information say "help with points of interest" or nearby parking", "show hotel at the destination" There are lots of topics I can help you with. "help with route guidance". or "show petrol station along the route". If you You can say: "help with phone", "help with To choose a destination, say something like prefer to navigate directly to a point of interest, navigation", "help with media" or "help with "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station". radio". For an overview on how to use voice can't find the destination but the street's right, If you feel you are not being well understood, controls, you can say "help with voice controls". say for example "select the street in line three". try to say the word "POI" in front of the point Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" To move around a displayed list, you can say of interest. For example say "navigate to POI and we'll start that again. "next page" or "previous page". You can undo restaurant at the destination". your last action and start over by saying "undo", To choose a POI, say something like "select "Navigation" voice or say "cancel" to cancel the current action. line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest commands Voice commands and don't see the one you're after, you can filter further by saying something like "select POI in Voice commands Tell me the remaining distance line 2", or "select the city in line 3". You can also Tell me the remaining time scroll through the list by saying "next page" or Navigate home Tell me the arrival time "previous page". Navigate to work Stop route guidance Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club Depending on the country, give Help messages Navigate to contact, John Miller destination (address) instructions in the language configured for the system. Navigate to address 11 regent street, London You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance".
Help messages To get information about your current route, you can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining
223 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
"Radio Media" voice Voice commands Media voice commands are available David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of only with a USB connection. calls, say "display calls". For more information on commands What's playing? SMS, you can say "help with texting". Voice commands Help messages To choose a contact, say something like "select "Telephone" voice line three". To move around the list say "next Turn on source radio - Streaming Bluetooth To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying commands page" or "previous page". You can undo your last - … "play" and then the item. For example, say "play action and start over by saying "undo", or say Help messages song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". If there is no telephone connected by "cancel" to cancel the current action. You can undo your last action and start over Bluetooth, a voice message announces: You can select an audio source by saying "turn by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the "Please first connect a telephone", and the "Text message" voice on source" followed by the device name. For current action. voice session is closed. commands example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", Voice commands Voice commands or "turn on source, radio". Use the command If there is no telephone connected by "play" to specify the type of music you'd like to Play song Hey Jude Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Call David Miller* hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", Play artist Madonna "Please first connect a telephone", and the Call voicemail* or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Play album Thriller voice session is closed. Display calls* Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play Help messages album, Thriller". Help messages The "Text messages" voice commands Voice commands I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say To make a phone call, say "call" followed by function allows you to dictate and send "play" and then a song title, an album title, or the contact name, for example: "Call David an SMS. Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 an artist name. For example, say "play song Miller". You can also include the phone type, for Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Tune to 98.5 FM Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play example: "Call David Miller at home". To make between each word. Tune to preset number five album Thriller". To select a line number from the a call by number, say "dial" followed by the When you have finished, the voice recognition Help messages display, say "select line two". To move around phone number, for example, "Dial 107776 835 system will automatically generate an SMS. a displayed list, you can say "next page" or 417". You can check your voicemail by saying You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" "previous page". You can undo your last action Voice commands "call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick and the station name or frequency. For example and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" message to", followed by the contact, and then "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 to cancel the current action. Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late the name of the quick message you'd like to FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for Help messages send. For example, "send quick message to example "tune to preset number five".
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding * This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed. download has been performed.
224 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of From the list of quick messages, say the name of Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the phone menu calls, say "display calls". For more information on the one you'd like to send. To move around the for the names of the supported messages. 11 SMS, you can say "help with texting". list you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next The system only sends pre-recorded To choose a contact, say something like "select page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "Quick messages". line three". To move around the list say "next action and start over by saying "undo", or say page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "cancel" to cancel the current action. action and start over by saying "undo", or say Voice commands "cancel" to cancel the current action. Navigation Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving "Text message" voice Send SMS to David Miller at the office, don't Choice of a destination commands wait for me Help messages To a new destination If there is no telephone connected by Intuitive method: Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Please say "call" or "send quick message to", Press Navigation to display the main "Please first connect a telephone", and the and then select a line from the list. To move page. voice session is closed. around a list shown on the display, you can Press "Search…". say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or The "Text messages" voice commands "previous page". You can undo your last action Enter an address or key words for your function allows you to dictate and send and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" destination. an SMS. to cancel the current action. Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Voice commands criteria". between each word. Or When you have finished, the voice recognition Listen to most recent message* Guided method: system will automatically generate an SMS. Help messages Before you can use the navigation Voice commands To hear your last message, you can say "listen to feature, you must enter the "City", the most recent message". When you want to send "Street" (suggestions are displayed Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for automatically when you begin typing), and the Help messages you to use. Just use the quick message name "Number" on the virtual keypad, or select an and say something like "send quick message to
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed.
225 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
address from the "Contact" list or the address To a recent destination To a contact "History". Press Navigation to display the main Press Navigation to display the main page. page. If you do not confirm the house number, Press the "MENU" button to access the Press the "MENU" button to access the the navigation system will show one end secondary page. secondary page. of the street. Select "My destinations". Select "My destinations". Press the "MENU" button to access the Select the "Recent” tab. Select the "Contact” tab. secondary page. Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a contact in the list to start guided Select "Enter address". the "Guidance criteria”. navigation. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Then To points of interest (POI) Select the Country Guided method: Select "Position" to see the point of Points of interest (POI) are listed in different Select the keyboard “language”. arrival on the map. categories. Press to display the main Change the keyboard "type" according to Navigation page. the selected "language": ABCDE; To "Home" or "My work" Press the " " button to access the AZERTY; QWERTY or QWERTZ. Press Navigation to display the main MENU secondary page. Enter the "City", the "Street" and the page. Select "Points of interest". "Number", and confirm by pressing on Press the "MENU" button to access the the displayed suggestions. secondary page. Select the "Travel", "leisure", Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Select "My destinations". "Commercial", "Public" or "Geographic” criteria". tab. And/or Select the "Preferred” tab. Or Select "See on map" to choose the Select "Home". Select "Search" to enter the name and "Guidance criteria". address of a POI. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Or Select "My work". Press "OK" to calculate the route.
Zoom in/out using the touch buttons or Or Or with two fingers on the screen. Select a preset favourite destination. Intuitive method:
226 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
You can only select this method in order To a point on the map A marker is displayed in the middle of the to use the service if a network connection screen, with the "Latitude" and 11 Press Navigation to display the main is active; this may be either a "network " " coordinates. page. Longitude connection provided by the vehicle", if you Choose the type of coordinates: Explore the map by sliding a finger on the use the Peugeot Connect Packs solution, or DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds. screen. else a "network connection provided by the DD for: Degrees, Decimals. Select the destination by pressing on the map. user" via a smartphone, Press this button to start guided Tap the screen to place a marker and In both cases, the system is automatically navigation. display the sub-menu. connected to the Internet, if network coverage Or Press this button to start guided permits. Press this button to save the displayed navigation. address. Or Press Navigation to display the main OR Press this button to save the displayed page. Press this button to enter the " " address. Latitude Press the "MENU" button to access the value using the virtual keypad. secondary page. A long press on a point opens a list of And Select "Search". nearby POIs. Press this button to enter the "Longitude" value using the virtual keypad. Press on the mode shown in the bottom right of the screen (On-Board or Connected) to change To GPS coordinates TMC (Traffic Message "Database". Press Navigation to display the main Select the "Database" in "On-Board" page. Channel) mode (integrated into the map), or in Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Available in some countries. "Connected" mode (connected to the Internet). screen. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages Press the back arrow to confirm. Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next are based on a European standard for traffic image. information broadcasting via the RDS system on Enter an address or key words for your Press this button to display the world FM radio, sending traffic information in real time. destination (POI). map. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS Press "OK" to start the search. Using the grid, select the desired country or Navigation system map and taken into account region by zooming. straight away when routes are calculated, to Select the "On the route", "Around the Press this button to display or enter the avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads. vehicle" or "At destination" tab to refine GPS coordinates. Danger zone alerts may or may not be your search. displayed, depending on the applicable Select the desired address to calculate the route.
227 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
legislation and subscription to the update the smartphone operating system Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or Press "Private mode". corresponding service. as well as the date and time on the "Stored” tab. smartphone and system, to ensure that the Select a network. THEN communication process between the Activate or deactivate: Connected navigation smartphone and the system functions Using the virtual keypad, enter the Wi-Fi correctly. network "Key” and "Password". – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press "OK" to establish a connection – “Only data sharing" Connected navigation USB connection between the smartphone and the – "Sharing data and vehicle position" connection Connect the USB cable. vehicle’s system. The smartphone charges when connected Depending on version, vehicle trim level and Settings specific to by the USB cable. Usage restrictions: subscription to online services and options. ® Bluetooth connection – With CarPlay , connection sharing is connected navigation Network connection provided by the Activate the Bluetooth function on the only available with a Wi-Fi connection. Press Navigation to display the main – With MirrorLinkTM, connection sharing is page. vehicle telephone and ensure that it is visible to all (see the "Connect-App" section). only available with a USB connection. Press the "MENU" button to access the If you use the Peugeot Connect Packs Wi-Fi connection The quality of services depends on the quality secondary page. solution, the system is automatically Select a Wi-Fi network detected by the of the network connection. Select "Settings". connected to the Internet and connected system and connect to it. services, and does not require the user to Select the "Map” tab. provide a connection via their smartphone. This function is only available if it has Authorize sending OR been activated either via the information Activate or deactivate: "Notifications" or via the "Applications" menu. – "Allow declaration of danger zones". Network connection provided by the Press Settings to display the main page. – "Guidance to final destination on foot". Press "Notifications". user These settings must be configured for each Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
profile. Select Wi-Fi to activate it. secondary page. Select "System configuration". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. For the list of suitable smartphones, visit OR Select the "Alerts” tab. the Brand's national website. Press Connect-App to display the main Select the "Private mode” tab. page. Activate or deactivate: Activate and enter settings for sharing the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the OR smartphone connection. secondary page. Press "Notifications". – "Advise of car park nearby". Select "Wi-Fi network connection". As processes and standards are – "Filling station alert". constantly changing, we recommend you
228 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "Private mode". – “Risk areas alert" then press the warning icon Declaration: "Risk areas (triangle) to configure alerts. 11 THEN – "Give an audible warning". alert" Activate or deactivate: – "Advise proximity of POI 1". To send information about danger zones, – "Advise proximity of POI 2". select the option:Allow declaration of – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. danger zones – “Only data sharing" – "Sharing data and vehicle position" Press Navigation to display the main The "Notifications", in the upper bar, can page. be accessed at any time. Settings specific to Press the "Declare a new danger zone" connected navigation button located in the side bars or the Danger zone alerts may or may not be upper bar of the touch screen (depending on Press Navigation to display the main displayed, depending on the applicable equipment). page. legislation and subscription to the Select the "Type” option to select the type Press the "MENU" button to access the corresponding service. of "Danger area". secondary page. Select the ""Speed" option and enter it Select "Settings". When "TOMTOM TRAFFIC” appears, the using the virtual keypad. services are available. Press "OK" to save and send the Select the "Map” tab. The services offered with connected information. navigation are as follows. Activate or deactivate: A Connected Services pack: Displaying fuel information – "Allow declaration of danger zones". – Weather, Press Navigation to display the main – "Guidance to final destination on foot". – Filling stations, page. These settings must be configured for each – Car park, Press this button to display the list of profile. – Traffic, services. Press “OK” to confirm your selection. – POI local search. Press "POI on map" to display the list A Danger area pack (optional). of points of interest. Select the "Alerts” tab. Press one of the buttons to search for " ". Activate or deactivate: Stations Activate/deactivate "Stations". – "Advise of car park nearby". Press this button to display a secondary – "Filling station alert". page.
229 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select the "Settings” tab. Press this button to display the list of CarPlay® function must first be activated on Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® services. the smartphone. interface. Select the desired fuel. Select "View map". In all cases, the smartphone must be On connecting the USB cable, the unlocked, to enable the communication CarPlay® function deactivates the Press "OK" to save. Select "Weather". process between the smartphone and the system's Bluetooth® mode. system to function. Press this button to display basic As principles and standards are constantly Displaying charging station information. changing, we recommend keeping the When the USB cable is disconnected details Press this button to display detailed smartphone's operating system up-to- and the ignition is switched off then back weather information. date, together with the date and time on on, the system will not automatically switch to Press Navigation to display the main the smartphone and the system. Radio Media mode; the source must be page. The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will changed manually. Press this button to display the list of be the maximum temperature for the day. services. The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will be Connectivity TM Press "POI on map" to display the list the minimum temperature for the night. Press Applications to display the main MirrorLink smartphone of points of interest. page. connection Press one of the buttons to search for Press "Connectivity" to access the CarPlay®, The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a "Stations". Applications MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions. Activate/deactivate "Stations". compatible smartphone and compatible USB ports CarPlay® smartphone applications. Press this button to display a secondary Depending on equipment, for more information You can check that your telephone is ® connection page. on the USB ports compatible with CarPlay , compatible on the Brand's website (services). TM Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Select the "Settings” tab. MirrorLink or Android Auto applications, refer When connecting a smartphone to the to the "Ease of use and comfort" section. charges when connected by a USB cable. system, we recommend enabling Select the desired connector type. Press "Telephone" to display the ® For the list of suitable smartphones, visit CarPlay® interface. Bluetooth on the smartphone. the Brand's national website. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Press "OK" to save. Or Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. Synchronising a smartphone enables charges when connected by a USB cable. From the system, press "Applications" to Displaying weather users to display applications that support From the system, press "Applications" to display the main page. the smartphone’s MirrorLinkCarPlay®, TM or display the main page. Press "Connectivity" to access the TM information Android Auto technology on the vehicle’s Press "Connectivity" to access the "CarPlay®” "MirrorLink ” function. TM Press Navigation to display the main screen. For CarPlay® technology, the function. Press "MirrorLink " to start the page. application in the system.
230 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Depending on the smartphone, it may be From the system, press "Applications" to interface. necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM" display the main page. 11 function. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Android On connecting the USB cable, the During the procedure, several screen Auto” function. CarPlay® function deactivates the pages relating to certain features are Press "Android Auto" to start the system's Bluetooth® mode. displayed. application in the system. Accept to start and complete the connection. During the procedure, several screen When the USB cable is disconnected Once the connection is established, a page is pages relating to certain features are and the ignition is switched off then back displayed, showing the applications already displayed. on, the system will not automatically switch to downloaded to the smartphone that are Accept to start and complete the connection. Radio Media mode; the source must be compatible with MirrorLinkTM technology. Access to the different audio sources remains changed manually. Access to the different audio sources remains available in the margin of the Android Auto available in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM display, using the touch buttons located in the MirrorLinkTM smartphone display, using the touch buttons located in the upper bar. upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible connection Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons. at any time using the dedicated buttons. The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a In Android Auto mode, the function that compatible smartphone and compatible There may be a pause before displays rolling menus by briefly pressing applications. applications become available, the screen with three fingers is disabled. You can check that your telephone is depending on the quality of the network. compatible on the Brand's website (services). There may be a pause before applications become available, When connecting a smartphone to the Android Auto smartphone depending on the quality of the network. system, we recommend enabling connection Bluetooth® on the smartphone. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Install the "Android Auto" application on Car Apps charges when connected by a USB cable. the smartphone via "Google Play". Press Applications to display the main From the system, press " " to Applications The "Android Auto" function requires the use page. display the main page. of a compatible smartphone and applications. Press "Car Apps" to display the applications Press " " to access the Connectivity home page. "MirrorLinkTM” function. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the charges when connected by a USB cable. application in the system.
231 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Internet Browser If the pairing procedure fails, we – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of Wi-Fi connection sharing recommend deactivating and then audio files on the smartphone), Press Applications to display the main Depending on equipment. reactivating the Bluetooth function on the – " ". page. Mobile internet data Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system. smartphone. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Connected The "Mobile internet data" profile must Press Connect-App to display the main Apps” function. be activated for connected navigation (if page. Press "Connected Apps" to display the browser Procedure from the smartphone the vehicle does not have "Emergency and Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the home page. Select the name of the system in the list assistance call" services), after first activating secondary page. Select the country of residence. of detected devices. smartphone connection sharing. Select "Share Wi-Fi connection". In the system, accept the connection request Select one or more profiles. Press "OK" to save and start the browser. from the smartphone. Select the "Activation" tab to activate or deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. Press "OK" to confirm. And/or Connection to the internet is via one of Procedure from the system Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s the network connections provided by the Press Connect-App to display the main network name and password. vehicle or the user. page. Wi-Fi connection Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press "OK" to confirm. Network connection via the smartphone's Wi-Fi. secondary page. ® Press Connect-App to display the main Bluetooth connection Press "Bluetooth connection". To protect against unauthorised access page. and to make all systems as secure as The services available depend on the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Search". possible, the use of a security code or a network, the SIM card and the secondary page. The list of detected smartphones is complex password is recommended. compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Select " ". displayed. Wi-Fi network connection Consult the smartphone user guide and the Select the name of the chosen service provider to check which services are Select the " ", " " or smartphone in the list. Secured Not secured Managing connections available. "Stored” tab. Press Connect-App to display the main Depending on the type of smartphone, Select a network. page. you may by prompted to accept the The Bluetooth function must be activated Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the transfer of contacts and messages. Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi and the smartphone configured as secondary page. network "Key" and "Password". "Visible to all". Select "Manage connection". Press "OK" to establish the connection. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is Connection sharing With this function, you can view the access to used (from the smartphone or from the system), The system offers to connect the smartphone connected services, the availability of connected ensure that the code is the same in the system with 3 profiles: The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi services and modify the connection mode. and in the smartphone. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), connection sharing are exclusive.
232 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Wi-Fi connection sharing Radio This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the context of radio wave transmission, and 11 Depending on equipment. in no way indicative of an audio system Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system. Selecting a station malfunction. Press Connect-App to display the main Press Radio Media to display the main page. page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press "Frequency". Presetting a station secondary page. Press one of the buttons to perform an Select a radio station or frequency. Select " ". Share Wi-Fi connection automatic search for radio stations. (refer to the corresponding section) Or Press "Presets". Select the " " tab to activate or Activation Move the slider to manually search for Make a long press on one of the buttons deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. frequencies up or down. to preset the station. And/or Or Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s Press Radio Media to display the main Changing the waveband network name and password. page. Press Radio Media to display the main Press "OK" to confirm. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page. secondary page. To change the waveband, press "Band…", To protect against unauthorised access Select "Radio stations" on the secondary displayed at the top right of the screen. and to make all systems as secure as page. possible, the use of a security code or a Press "Frequency". Activating/Deactivating RDS complex password is recommended. Enter the values using the virtual keypad. RDS, if activated, allows you to continue First enter the units then click on the listening to the same station by automatic decimals field to enter the figures after the retuning to alternative frequencies. Managing connections decimal point. Press Radio Media to display the main Press Connect-App to display the main Press "OK" to confirm. page. page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Radio reception may be affected by the secondary page. secondary page. use of electrical equipment not approved Select "Radio settings". Select "Manage connection". by the Brand, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. Select "General". With this function, you can view the access to The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Activate/deactivate "Station follow". connected services, the availability of connected tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may services and modify the connection mode. block reception, including in RDS mode.
233 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "OK" to confirm. TA message can be heard. Normal play of the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Media previously playing media resumes at the end of secondary page. the message. Select "Radio settings". RDS station tracking may not be Select "Announcements". USB port available nationwide, as many radio Activate/deactivate "Traffic Select "General". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB stations do not cover 100 % of the country. announcement". Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". port or connect the USB device to the This explains the loss of reception of the Press "OK" to confirm. USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). station during a journey. Activate/deactivate "Station follow". To protect the system, do not use a USB hub. Displaying text information DAB (Digital Audio Press "OK". The "Radio Text" function displays information The system builds playlists (in temporary memory); this operation can take from a transmitted by the radio station relating to the Broadcasting) radio If “FM-DAB auto tracking" is activated, few seconds to several minutes at the first station or the currently playing song. there may be a time offset of a few connection. Press Radio Media to display the main Terrestrial Digital Radio seconds when the system switches to "FM" Reduce the number of non-music files and the page. Digital radio provides higher quality sound. analogue radio, and in some cases a change number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a in volume. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition secondary page. choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical When the digital signal quality is restored, the is switched off or a USB memory stick is Select "Radio settings". order. system automatically changes back to "DAB". connected. The audio system memorises these Press Radio Media to display the main Select " ". lists, which will subsequently load faster if they General page. If the "DAB" station being listened to is Activate/deactivate "Display radio text". have not been changed. Press “Band …" at the top right of the screen to not available on “FM” (“FM-DAB" option display the "DAB" waveband. shaded), or "FM-DAB auto tracking" is not Press " " to confirm. Auxiliary socket (AUX) OK activated, the sound will cut out while the Depending on equipment FM-DAB tracking digital signal is too weak. Connect a portable device (MP3 player, “DAB" does not cover 100 % of the territory. etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an Playing TA messages When the digital radio signal is poor, “FM-DAB audio cable (not supplied). The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives auto follow-up" enables you to continue listening This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this to the same station by automatically switching to has been selected in the audio settings. function needs good reception of a radio station the corresponding FM analogue station (if there First adjust the volume on the portable device that carries this type of message. While traffic is one). (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the information is being broadcast, the current Press Radio Media to display the main audio system. media is automatically interrupted so that the page. Controls are managed via the portable device.
234 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Media Selecting the source If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the 11 Press Radio Media to display the main smartphone. page. USB port Control is from the portable device or by using Select "SOURCES". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB the system's touch buttons. Select the source. port or connect the USB device to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Once connected in streaming mode, the Watching a video smartphone is considered to be a media To protect the system, do not use a USB Depending on equipment/Depending on version/ source. hub. Depending on country. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. The system builds playlists (in temporary Connecting Apple® players memory); this operation can take from a Video control commands are accessible Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using few seconds to several minutes at the first only through the touch screen. a suitable cable (not supplied). connection. Play starts automatically. Press Radio Media to display the main Reduce the number of non-music files and the Control is via the audio system. number of folders to reduce the waiting time. page. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition Select "SOURCES". The classifications available are those of is switched off or a USB memory stick is Select Video to start the video. the portable device connected (artists/ connected. The audio system memorises these albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ lists, which will subsequently load faster if they To remove the USB memory stick, press podcasts). have not been changed. the pause button to stop the video, then The default classification used is by artist. To remove the memory stick. modify the classification used, return to the Auxiliary socket (AUX) The system can play video files in the MPEG-4 first level of the menu then select the desired Part 2, MPEG-2, MPEG-1, H.264, H.263, VP8, Depending on equipment classification (playlists for example) and WMV and RealVideo formats. Connect a portable device (MP3 player, confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track. etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an ® audio cable (not supplied). Streaming Bluetooth The version of software in the audio system may This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed not be compatible with the generation of the has been selected in the audio settings. from your smartphone. Apple® player. First adjust the volume on the portable device The Bluetooth profile must be activated. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the First adjust the volume on the portable device (to audio system. a high level). Controls are managed via the portable device. Then adjust the volume of the audio system.
235 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Information and advice Telephone Procedure from the system The ability of the system to connect just one profile depends on the telephone. The system supports USB mass storage Press Telephone to display the main All three profiles may connect by default. devices, BlackBerry® devices and Apple® players Pairing a Bluetooth® page. via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not Press "Bluetooth search". supplied. telephone The profiles compatible with the system Or are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, Devices are managed using the audio system The services available depend on the Select "Search". MAP and PAN. controls. network, the SIM card and the The list of detected telephones is Other devices, not recognised on connection, compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. displayed. Visit the Brand's website for more information must be connected to the auxiliary socket using Consult the telephone user guide and the Select the name of the chosen telephone (compatibility, additional help, etc.). a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth service provider to check which services are in the list. streaming, if compatible. available. Automatic reconnection The audio system will only play audio files with On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file Connection sharing The Bluetooth function must be activated connected is present again, it is automatically extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and The system offers to connect the telephone with and the telephone configured as "Visible recognised and within about 30 seconds 320 Kbps. 3 profiles: to all” (in the telphone settings). after switching on the ignition, the pairing is It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), established automatically (Bluetooth activated). No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is To modify the connection profile: All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. audio files on the telephone), used (from the telephone or from the system), Press Telephone to display the main The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and – "Mobile internet data". ensure that the code is the same in the system page. 48 KHz. and in the telephone. The "Mobile internet data" profile must Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the To avoid reading and display problems, we be activated for connected navigation, secondary page. recommend choosing file names less than 20 If the pairing procedure fails, we after first activating smartphone connection Select "Bluetooth connection" to display characters long that do not contain any special recommend deactivating and then sharing. the list of paired devices. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). reactivating the Bluetooth function on the Press the "Details" button. Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format telephone. Select one or more profiles. (File Allocation Table). Select one or more profiles. Press "OK" to confirm. We recommend using the original USB Procedure from the telephone cable for the portable device. Select the system name in the list of Press "OK" to confirm. Depending on the type of telephone, you may by detected devices. prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and In the system, accept the connection request messages. from the telephone.
236 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
The ability of the system to connect just Managing paired telephones Select "End call" on the touch screen. one profile depends on the telephone. This function lets you connect or disconnect a 11 All three profiles may connect by default. device or delete a pairing. Press Telephone to display the main Making a call The profiles compatible with the system page. Using the telephone is not recommended are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the while driving. MAP and PAN. secondary page. Park the vehicle. Select "Bluetooth connection" to display Make the call using the steering mounted Visit the Brand's website for more information the list of paired devices. controls. (compatibility, additional help, etc.). Press on the name of the telephone selected in the list to disconnect it. Automatic reconnection Press again to connect it. Calling a new number On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Press Telephone to display the main connected is present again, it is automatically Deleting a telephone page. recognised and within about 30 seconds Select the basket at top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital after switching on the ignition, the pairing is screen to display a basket alongside the keypad. established automatically (Bluetooth activated). telephone chosen. Press "Call" to start the call. To modify the connection profile: Press the basket alongside the telephone Press Telephone to display the main chosen to delete it. page. Calling a contact Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main secondary page. An incoming call is announced by a ring and a page. Select "Bluetooth connection" to display superimposed display in the screen. Or press and hold the list of paired devices. Make a short press on the steering Press the "Details" button. mounted telephone button to accept an the steering mounted telephone button. incoming call. Select one or more profiles. And Select "Contact". Make a long press Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Call". on the steering mounted telephone button to reject the call. Or
237 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Calling a recently used Press this button to sort contacts by Managing quick messages Access to email messages depends on Surname+first name or by First the compatibility between the Press Telephone to display the main number name+surname. smartphone and the onboard system. page. Press Telephone to display the main Press the " " button to access the page. The "Email" function allows email OPTIONS secondary page. Or addresses to be entered for a contact, Select " " to display the Settings Press and hold but the system is not able to send emails. Quick messages list of messages. Select the "Delayed", "My arrival", "Not the steering mounted telephone button. Managing messages Audio settings available" or "Other" tab, enabling you to Press Settings to display the main page. Press Telephone to display the main create new messages. Select "Calls". page. Press " " to write a new message. Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Create Select "Audio settings". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the It is always possible to make a call secondary page. Select the message chosen in one of the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", directly from the telephone; as a safety Select "Messages" to display the list of lists. "Voice" or "Ringtone". measure, first park the vehicle. messages. Press "Transfer" to select one or more Press "OK" to save the settings. Select the "All", "Incoming" or "Sent” tab. recipients. Press " Play" to start playing the Managing contacts/entries Select the details of the message chosen message. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation Press Telephone to display the main in one of the lists. with the Arkamys© system) uses audio page. Press "Answer" to send a quick message Managing email processing to adjust the sound quality Select "Contact". stored in the system. Press Telephone to display the main according to the number of passengers in the Select " " to add a new contact. Create Press "Call" to start the call. page. vehicle. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Available only with the front and rear speaker Press the " " tab to enter the Telephone Press " Play" to listen to the message. secondary page. configuration. contact’s telephone number(s). Select "Email" to display the list of Press the "Address" tab to enter the The Ambience setting (choice of 6 Access to "Messages" depends on the messages. contact’s address(es). ambiences) and the , and compatibility between the smartphone Select the "Incoming", "Sent" or "Not Bass Medium Press the "Email" tab to enter the sound settings are different and and the onboard system. read” tab. Treble contact’s email address(es). independent for each audio source. Some smartphones retrieve messages or Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Press "OK" to save. Activate or deactivate " ". email messages more slowly than others. Press " Play" to start playing the Loudness message.
238 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Access to email messages depends on The "Position” settings (All passengers, Press "OK" again to save the settings. the compatibility between the Driver and Front only) are common to all 11 smartphone and the onboard system. sources. The location for the photograph is Activate or deactivate "Touch tones", square; the system reshapes the original "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary photograph if in another format. Settings input". Press this button to reset the selected Audio settings Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© profile. optimises the sound distribution inside Press Settings to display the main page. Resetting the selected profile activates the passenger compartment. the English language by default. Select "Audio settings". Configuring profiles Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to link "Audio settings" with it. Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", Press Settings to display the main page. "Voice" or "Ringtone". Select "Audio settings". Press "OK" to save the settings. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", secondary page. "Voice" or "Ringtone". Select "Setting of the profiles". The balance/distribution (or spatialisation Press "OK" to save the selected profile’s © with the Arkamys system) uses audio settings. processing to adjust the sound quality Select "Profile 1", "Profile ",2 "Profile 3” or according to the number of passengers in the "Common profile". Modifying system settings Press this button to enter a name for the vehicle. Press Settings to display the main page. Available only with the front and rear speaker profile using the virtual keypad. Press "OK" to confirm. configuration. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the secondary page. Press this button to add a photograph to The Ambience setting (choice of 6 Select "Screen configuration". the profile. ambiences) and the Bass, Medium and Insert a USB memory stick containing the Treble sound settings are different and Select "Animation". photograph in the USB port. independent for each audio source. Activate or deactivate:Automatic Select the photograph. Activate or deactivate "Loudness". scrolling Press "OK" to accept the transfer of the Select "Brightness". photograph.
239 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Select "Setting the time-date". Press "OK" to confirm. Navigation the screen and/or the instrument panel. I cannot enter the navigation address. Press Settings to display the main page. Select "Date". The system may not automatically The address is not recognised. Press this button to set the date. manage the change between winter and ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the summer time (depending on the country of the "Search…" button at the bottom of the secondary page. Press "OK" to confirm. sale). "Navigation” page. Select "System settings". The route calculation is not successful. Select the display format for the date. The route settings may conflict with the current Select " " to change the units of distance, Units Colour schemes location (for example, if toll roads are excluded fuel consumption and temperature. Time and date setting is only available if Depending on equipment/Depending on version. but the vehicle is on a toll road). Select "Factory settings" to restore the initial "GPS synchronisation" is deactivated. ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation" settings. As a safety measure, the procedure for menu. changing the colour scheme is only I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts. Resetting the system to "Factory possible when the vehicle is stationary. settings" activates English and degrees Setting the time You have not subscribed to the online services Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time. Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. option. ► If you have subscribed to the option: Select "System info" to display the versions of Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Color schemes". - a few days may elapse before the service is the various modules installed in the system. secondary page. activated, Select "Setting the time-date". Select a colour scheme in the list then - services may not be selected in the system Selecting the language press "OK" to confirm. menu, Press Settings to display the main page. Select "Time". - online services are not active ("TOMTOM Whenever the colour scheme is Press this button to set the time using the TRAFFIC" not shown on the map). changed, the system restarts, temporarily Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the virtual keypad. The POIs do not appear. displaying a black screen. secondary page. Press "OK" to confirm. The POIs have not been selected. Select "Languages" to change the ► Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select language. Press this button to set the time zone. POIs in the POI list. Frequently asked The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is Setting the date Select the display format for the time questions not working. Press Settings to display the main page. (12h/24h). The audible warning is not active or the volume Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 The following information groups together the is too low. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the hour). answers to the most frequently asked questions secondary page. Activate or deactivate GPS concerning the system. synchronisation (UTC).
240 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Navigation ► Activate the audible warning in the The altitude is not displayed. "Navigation" menu and check the voice volume On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to 11 I cannot enter the navigation address. in the sound settings. 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites The address is not recognised. correctly. ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing The system does not suggest a detour ► Wait until the system has started up the "Search…" button at the bottom of the around an incident on the route. The route settings do not take account of TMC completely so that there is GPS coverage by at "Navigation” page. messages. least 4 satellites. The route calculation is not successful. ► Configure the "Traffic info " function in Depending on the geographical environment The route settings may conflict with the current the route settings list (Without, Manual or (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of location (for example, if toll roads are excluded Automatic). reception of the GPS signal may vary. but the vehicle is on a toll road). This behaviour is normal. The system is ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation" I receive a warning about a "Danger area" dependent on the GPS signal reception menu. that is not on my route. As well as providing guided navigation, the conditions. I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts. system announces all "Danger areas" positioned My navigation is no longer connected. You have not subscribed to the online services in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may During start-up and in certain geographical option. provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on areas, the connection may be unavailable. ► If you have subscribed to the option: nearby or parallel roads. ► Check that the online services are activated - a few days may elapse before the service is ► Zoom the map to show the exact location (settings, contract). activated, of the "Danger area". You can select "On the - services may not be selected in the system route" to stop receiving warnings or decrease the menu, Radio warning duration. - online services are not active ("TOMTOM The reception quality of the tuned radio TRAFFIC" not shown on the map). Certain traffic jams along the route are not station gradually deteriorates or the station indicated in real time. The POIs do not appear. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz On starting, a few minutes may elapse before The POIs have not been selected. is displayed, etc.). the system begins to receive traffic information. ► Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s ► Wait until traffic information is being received POIs in the POI list. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the correctly (traffic information icons shown on the The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is geographical area. map). not working. ► Activate the "RDS" function by means of the In certain countries, only major routes The audible warning is not active or the volume short-cut menu to enable the system to check (motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic is too low. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in information. the geographical area. This is perfectly normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available.
241 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
The aerial is missing or has been damaged There may be an extended pause after The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with Settings (for example while entering a car wash or inserting a USB stick. the system. When the treble and bass settings are underground car park). The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, ► You can check that your telephone is changed, the ambience is deselected. ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to compatible on the Brand's website (services). When the ambience is changed, the treble The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, a few minutes. The volume of the telephone connected in and bass settings are reset. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, This is perfectly normal. Bluetooth mode is inaudible. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and including in RDS mode. The volume depends on both the system and the Some characters in information about the bass settings, and vice versa. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is telephone. currently playing media may not be displayed ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience not indicative of an audio system malfunction. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to correctly. settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The audio system is unable to process certain maximum if required, and increase the volume of When the balance settings are changed, the stations received. types of character. the telephone if necessary. distribution is deselected. The name of the radio station changes. ► Use standard characters to name tracks and Ambient noise affects the quality of the When the distribution setting is changed, the The station is no longer received or its name has folders. telephone call. balance settings are deselected. changed in the list. ► Reduce the ambient noise level (close Playback of streaming files does not start. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the Some radio stations send other information The connected device does not automatically windows, reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). balance settings, and vice versa. in place of their name (the title of the song for launch playback. Some contacts are duplicated in the list. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution example). ► Start playback from the device. The options for synchronising contacts are: setting to obtain the desired sound quality. The system interprets these details as the station Track names and playing times are not synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the There is a difference in sound quality name. displayed on the audio streaming screen. contacts on the telephone, or both. When both between audio sources. ► Press the "Update list" button in the "Radio The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer synchronisations are selected, some contacts To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound stations” secondary menu. of this information. may be duplicated. settings can be tailored to different audio ► Select "Display SIM card contacts" or sources, which can generate audible differences "Display telephone contacts". Media Telephone when changing source. Playback of my USB memory stick starts only I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The contacts are not listed in alphabetical ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). The telephone's Bluetooth function may be order. to the sources listened to. We recommend Some telephones offer display options. Some files supplied with the memory stick may switched off or the telephone may not be visible. setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:, Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can greatly slow down access to reading the memory ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth Balance) to the middle position, setting the be transferred in a specific order. stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing switched on. musical ambience to "None", setting loudness ► Modify the telephone directory display time). ► Check in the telephone settings that it is correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive" settings. ► Delete the files supplied with the memory "visible to all". in Radio mode. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ► Deactivate then reactivate the telphone’s The system does not receive SMS. ► In all cases, after applying sound settings, SMS text messages cannot be sent to the file structure on the memory stick. Bluetooth function. adjust the volume level on the portable device (to system in Bluetooth mode.
242 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Settings a high level) first.Then adjust the volume level on the audio system. 11 When the treble and bass settings are When the engine is off, the system switches changed, the ambience is deselected. off after several minutes of use. When the ambience is changed, the treble When the engine is switched off, the system's and bass settings are reset. operating time depends on the state of charge of Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and the battery. bass settings, and vice versa. The switch-off is normal: the system ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience automatically goes into energy economy mode settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. and switches off to maintain an adequate charge When the balance settings are changed, the in the battery. distribution is deselected. ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the When the distribution setting is changed, the charge of the battery. balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available balance settings, and vice versa. if the synchronisation with the satellites is ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution deactivated. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. ► Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting. There is a difference in sound quality Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS between audio sources. synchronisation" (UTC). To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. We recommend setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:, Balance) to the middle position, setting the musical ambience to "None", setting loudness correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive" in Radio mode. ► In all cases, after applying sound settings, adjust the volume level on the portable device (to
243 Alphabetical index
180° rear vision 141 Airbags, front 82, 84, 87 Blind 39–40 Airbags, lateral 83–84 Blind spot monitoring system, active 135 Air conditioning 48, 51 Blind spot sensors 135 Air conditioning, automatic 52 BlueHDi 18, 166, 172 A Air conditioning, digital 49 Bluetooth (hands-free) 213–214, 236–237 ABS 78 Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic 49 Bluetooth (telephone) 213–214, 236–237 Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) 154 Air intake 50–51 Bodywork 171 Accessories 75, 161 Air vents 48 Bonnet 162–163 Active Safety Brake 128–130 Alarm 31–32 Bonnet, active 84 Active suspension 107 Amplifier, audio 56 Boot 34, 37, 64 Active Suspension Control 107 Android Auto connection 231 Brake discs 167 Adaptive LED Technology 28, 65 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 78 Brake lamps 182–183 Adaptive rear lighting 65 Antitheft / Immobiliser 26 Brakes 167 AdBlue® 18, 168 Apple CarPlay connection 212, 230 Braking 106 AdBlue® tank 169 Applications 231 Braking assistance system 78 Additive, Diesel 166 Armrest, front 58 Braking, automatic emergency 128–130 Adjusting headlamps 67 Armrest, rear 59 Braking, dynamic emergency 100–101 Adjusting head restraints 42 Assistance call 76 Brightness 215 Adjusting seat 42–43 Assistance, emergency braking 78, 130 Bulbs 182 Adjusting the air distribution 50–51 Audible warning 76 Bulbs (changing) 180–183 Adjusting the air flow 50–51 Audio streaming (Bluetooth) 211, 235 Adjusting the date 216, 240 Adjusting the height and reach of the steering wheel 45 C Adjusting the lumbar support 42–43 B Cable, audio 235 Adjusting the seat angle 42 Battery 162 Cable, Jack 235 Adjusting the temperature 50 Battery, 12 V 166, 189–193 Capacity, fuel tank 151 Adjusting the time 216, 240 Battery, ancillaries 192 Care of the bodywork 171 Advice on care and maintenance 153, 170 Battery, charging 152, 156, 190, 193 CD 211 Advice on driving 7, 96 Battery (Hybrid) 153, 156 CD, MP3 211 Airbags 81–84, 86 Battery, remote control 30, 54 Central locking 28, 30 Airbags, curtain 83–84 Bicycle carrier 161 Changing a bulb 180–183
244 Alphabetical index
Changing a fuse 183–184, 187–188 Connection, MirrorLink 212–213, 231 Deferred charging 24, 153, 156, 158 Changing a wheel 173, 177 Connection, Wi-Fi network 232–233 Defrosting 52 Changing a wiper blade 72–73 Connectivity 230 Defrosting, front 52 Changing the remote control battery 30 Consumption figures 23 Demisting 52 Charge level indicator 20 Container, AdBlue® 169 Demisting, front 52 Charger, induction 57 Control, emergency boot release 34 Demisting, rear 52 Charger, wireless 57 Control, emergency door 29 Demisting, rear screen 52 Charging cable 154–155, 157 Control, heated seats 44 Dials and gauges 9 Charging connector 153, 156–157 Controls, steering mounted 102–105 Digital instrument panel 9–10 CHECK 20 Control stalk, lighting 65–66 Dimensions 203 Checking the engine oil level 17 Control stalk, wipers 71–74 Dipstick 17, 164 Checking the levels 164–165 Control unit 154–155, 157 Direction indicators 66, 181–183 Checking tyre pressures Courtesy lamp, front 59 Domestic charging 155, 158 (using the kit) 174, 176 Courtesy lamps 59–60 Door pockets 55 Checks 164–165, 166–168 Cover, load space 61 Doors 33 Checks, routine 166–167 Cruise control 115–116, 118–121 Drive Assist Plus 121 Child lock 94 Cruise control, adaptive 121 Driver’s attention warning 131 Children 81, 88–91, 93 Cruise control by speed limit Driving 41, 96 Children (safety) 94 recognition 115–116 Driving aids camera (warnings) 112 Child seats 81, 85–88 Cruise control, dynamic with Stop Driving aids (recommendations) 112 Child seats, conventional 87–88 function 115–116 Driving economically 7 Child seats, i-Size 93 Cup holder 55 Driving modes 107 Child seats, ISOFIX 89–91 Driving positions (storing) 44 Cigar lighter 55 Dynamic stability control (DSC) 78–79 Cleaning (advice) 153, 170–171 Closing the boot 27–28, 34 D Closing the doors 27–28, 33 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - Collision Risk Alert 128–129 Digital radio 210, 234 E Comfort mode 108 Date (setting) 216, 240 EBFD 78 Configuration, vehicle 22, 24 Daytime running lamps 66, 181 Eco-driving (advice) 7 Connected applications 231–232 Deactivating the passenger airbag 82, 86–87 ECO mode 107 Connection, Bluetooth 213–214, 232, 236–237 Deadlocking 26, 28 Economy mode 162
245 Alphabetical index
Electric automatic gearbox (Hybrid) 105 Fitting roof bars 160–161 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear efficiency Electric windows 38 Fittings, boot 60 indicator 108–109 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) 78 Fittings, interior 55 Glove box 55 Emergency braking assistance (EBA) 78 Fittings, rear 59 G.P.S. 227 Emergency call 76 Flap, charging 153, 156–158 Grab handles 55 Emergency switching off 99 Flap, fuel filler 151–152 Emergency warning lamps 75, 172 Flashing indicators 66, 182 Emissions control system, SCR 19, 168 Flat bed (recovery) 195 Energy economy mode 162 Fluid, brake 165 H Energy flows 23 Fluid, engine coolant 165 Hands-free access 36 Energy recovery 19, 106 Foglamps, rear 65, 183 Hands-free tailgate 34, 36–37 Engine 168 Folding the rear seats 47–48 Hazard warning lamps 75, 172 Engine compartment 164–165 Four-wheel drive (4WD) 162 headlamp adjustment 67 Engine, Diesel 151, 164, 172, 199, 201 Frequency (radio) 233–234 Headlamp adjustment 67 Engine, petrol 108, 164, 198 Fuel 7, 151 Headlamps, automatic dipping 68–69 Engines 197–199, 201 Fuel consumption 7, 19 Headlamps, automatic illumination 67 Environment 7, 30, 54 Fuel tank 151–152 Headlamps, dipped beam 181–182 e-Save function (energy reserve) 24 Full Park Assist 145 Headlamps, halogen 67, 181–182 ESC (electronic stability control) 78 Fusebox, dashboard 184 Headlamps, main beam 181–182 Expanded traffic sign recognition 116 Fusebox, engine compartment 184, 187–188 Head restraints, front 42 Fuses 183–184, 187–188 Head restraints, rear 46–48 Fuses, dashboard 184 Heating 48, 53–54 Fuses, engine compartment 189 Heating, additional 53–54 F Heating, programmable 24, 53–54 Fatigue detection 130–131 Hi-Fi system 56 Filling the AdBlue® tank 166, 169 Hill start assist 106–107 Filling the fuel tank 151–152 G Histogramme, fuel consumption 23–24 Filter, air 166 Gauge, fuel 151 Horn 76 Filter, oil 166 Gearbox, automatic 102–105, 107, Horn for pedestrians 76 Filter, particle 166 110, 167, 190 Hybrid 23, 98, 152, 202 Filter, passenger compartment 48, 166 Gearbox, manual 102, 107, 110, 167 Hybrid engine 202 Fitting a wheel 178–179 Gear lever, manual gearbox 102
246 Alphabetical index
Key with remote control 25, 97 Loading 160–161 I Kit, hands-free 213–214, 236–237 Load reduction mode 162 i-Cockpit® amplify function 44 Kit, puncture repair 173–174 Locating your vehicle 26 Ignition 98, 238 Kit, temporary puncture repair 173–176 Locking 26–27 Ignition on 98 Locking from the inside 30 Immobiliser, electronic 97 Locking the doors 30–31 Indicator, AdBlue® range 18 Long objects, transporting 60 Indicator, coolant temperature 18 L Low fuel level 151 Indicator, engine oil level 17 Labels, identification 204 Lumbar 42–43 Indicators, direction 66, 182 Lamp, boot 64 Inflating tyres 167, 204 Lamps, parking 66 Inflating tyres and accessories Lamps, rear 182–183 (using the kit) 174, 176 Lams with “Full LED" technology 67, 69, 181 M Infrared camera 69, 112 Lane assist 121, 125–126, 128 Mains socket (domestic network) 154, 158 Instrument panel 9, 20–21, 113 Lane departure warning active 131, 135 Maintenance (advice) 153, 170 Instrument panel (Hybrid) 9 Leather (care) 171 Maintenance, routine 113, 166 Internet browser 228, 232 LEDs - Light-emitting diodes 66, 181–183 Manoeuvring aids (recommendations) 112 ISOFIX mountings 89 Level, AdBlue® 166 Map reading lamps 59–60 Level, brake fluid 165 Markings, identification 204 Level, Diesel additive 166 Massage function 44 Level, engine coolant 18, 165 Massage, multi-point 44 J Level, engine oil 17, 164 Mat 58, 113 Jack 173–174, 177, 235 Levels and checks 164–166 Memorising a speed 120–121 Jump starting 189 Level, screenwash fluid 72, 165 Menu 212 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs 66, 181–183 Menu, main 23 Lighting, cornering 69 Menus (audio) 207–208, 220–221 Lighting dimmer 20 Menu short cuts 23 K Lighting, exterior 65 Messages 238 Key 25–26, 29 Lighting, guide-me home 26, 67–68 Messages, quick 238 Key, electronic 27–28 Lighting, interior 58–59 Mirror, rear view 46 Keyless Entry and Starting 27–29, 97–98 Lighting, mood 59 Mirrors, door 45–46, 52, 135 Key not recognised 99 Lighting, welcome 67–68 Mirror, vanity 55
247 Alphabetical index
Misfuel prevention 152 Paint colour code 204 Radio 208–209, 211, 233 Motor, electric 108, 152, 202 Parcel shelf, rear 61 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Motorised tailgate 34–35, 37 Park Assist 142 Broadcasting - DAB) 210, 234 Mountings, ISOFIX 89 Parking brake, electric 99–101, 167 Range, AdBlue 18, 166 Parking sensors, audible and visual 136 RDS 209, 233–234 Parking sensors, front 137 READY lamp 163 Parking sensors, rear 137 Rear screen, demisting 52 N Personalisation 9–10 Rechargeable hybrid Navigation 225–227 Plates, identification 204 system 6, 23, 98, 108, 152 Navigation, connected 228–230 Player, Apple® 211, 235 Recharging the battery 190, 193 Net, high load retaining 62–63 Player, USB 210, 235 Recirculation, air 50–51 Night vision 69 Port, USB 56, 59, 210, 230, 235 Recovery 194, 196 Night Vision 69 Power 19 Recovery of the vehicle 195 Power indicator 19 Reduction of electrical load 162 Pressures, tyres 167, 177, 204 Regeneration of the particle filter 166 Pre-tensioning seat belts 81 Regenerative braking (deceleration O Priming pump 173 by engine braking) 106 Obstacle detection 136 Priming the fuel system 172 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation Oil change 164 Profiles 215, 239 detection system 111 Oil consumption 164 Programmable cruise control 119 Reinitialising the remote control 30 OIl, engine 164 Protecting children 82, 85–91, 93 Reminder, lighting on 65 On-board tools 64, 173–174 Puncture 174–175, 177 Remote control 25–29 Opening the bonnet 162–163 Remote functions 24, 54, 157–158 Opening the boot 27, 34 Removing a wheel 178–179 Opening the doors 27, 33 Removing the mat 58 Opening the windows 25 Q Replacing bulbs 180–183 Quiet vehicle warning sound 76 Replacing fuses 183–184, 189 Replacing the air filter 166 Replacing the oil filter 166 P Replacing the passenger compartment Pads, brake 167 R filter 166 Paint 171, 204 Radar (warnings) 112 Reservoir, screenwash 165
248 Alphabetical index
Reset trip 21 Side parking sensors 138 Sunroof, panoramic 39–40 Rev counter 9 Ski flap 60 Sunshine sensor 48 Reversing camera 112, 138–140 Smartphone 24, 54, 157–158 Sun visor 55 Reversing lamps 182–183 Snow chains 111, 161–162 Suspension 167 Roof bars 160–161 Socket, 12 V accessory 55, 59, 63 Suspension with variable vibration Running out of fuel (Diesel) 172 Socket, auxiliary 211, 235 reduction 107 Socket, Jack 235 Synchronising the remote control 30 Speakers 56 Speed limiter 115–118, 120–121 S Speed limit recognition 113, 115 Safety, children 82, 85–91, 93 Speedometer 9, 113 T Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel) 166 Sport mode 107–108 Tables of engines 202 Screen menu map 212 Spotlamps, side 68 Tables of fuses 184, 187–188 Screenwash 72 Stability control (ESC) 78–79 Tailgate 34 Screenwash, front 71 Starting a Diesel engine 151 Tank, fuel 151–152 Screenwash, rear 72 Starting the engine 98 Technical data 198–199, 201–202 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) 19, 168 Starting the vehicle 97, 102–105 Telephone 57, 213–215, 236–238 Seat angle 42 Starting using another battery 99, 189 Temperature, coolant 18 Seat belts 80–81, 87 State of charge, battery 23, 153 Thermal preconditioning of the passenger Seat belts, rear 80 Station, radio 208–209, 233–234 compartment 24, 54 Seat, rear bench 46 Steering mounted controls, audio 206, 220 Ticket holder 55 Seats, electric 43–44 Steering wheel, adjustment 45 Time (setting) 216, 240 Seats, front 42–44 Stickers, customising ~ Stickers, TMC (Traffic info) 227 Seats, heated 44 expressive 171 Tool box 64 Seats, rear 46–48, 85 Stopping the vehicle 98, 102–105 Tools 173–174 Selector, gear 102–106 Stop & Start 22, 49, 52, 109–110, Topping-up AdBlue® 169 Sensors (warnings) 112 151, 162, 166, 192 Total distance recorder 20 Serial number, vehicle 204 Storage 55, 58–60 Touch screen 22–23, 54 Service indicator 16, 20 Storage box 64 Towbar 79, 158 Servicing 16, 166, 167–168 Storage compartments 55 Towed loads 197–199, 201–202 Settings, equipment 22, 24 Storage wells 60, 64 Towing another vehicle 194, 196 Settings, system 215, 239 Storing driving positions 44 Traction control (ASR) 78–79 Sidelamps 66, 181–183 Stowing rings 60, 63 Traffic information (TMC) 227
249 Alphabetical index
Trailer 79, 158 Trailer stability assist (TSA) 79 W Trajectory control systems 78 Wallbox 154 Triangle, warning 172 Warning and indicator lamps 11 Trip computer 21–22 Warning lamp, driver''s seat belt Trip distance recorder 20 not fastened 81 Tyres 167, 204 Warning lamps 11, 20 Tyre under-inflation detection 110, 177 Warning lamp, seat belts 81 Warnings and indicators 11 Washing 113 Washing (advice) 153, 170–171 U Weights 197–199, 201 Under-inflation (detection) 110 Welcome lighting 26, 68 Unlocking 25, 27 Wheel, spare 167, 173–174, 177 Unlocking from the inside 30 Windscreen, heated 52 Unlocking the boot 25, 27 Windscreen wipers 71, 73 Unlocking the doors 30–31 Wiper blades (changing) 72–73 Unlocking the tailgate 25, 27 Wiper, rear 72 Updating the date 216, 240 Wipers 71, 73–74 Updating the time 216, 240 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive 73–74 USB 210–211, 230, 235
V Ventilation 48, 53–54 Video 235 Visibility 52 Vision, 180° forward 141 Visiopark 1 139 Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 138, 140 Voice commands 222–225
250
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, in accordance with the provisions of the European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End-of-Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells. Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Printed in the EU
11-19
www.peugeot.com *19.R8.0040* ANG. 19.R8.0040